Siprotec 5

SIPROTEC 5 for Every Application and Requirement
SIPROTEC 5 Devices
Protection, Automation and Monitoring
Catalog SIPROTEC 5.01 Edition 4
siemens.com/siprotec
Overview of documentation
Manuals
Catalogs
Device
manuals
SIPROTEC 5
catalog
Hardware
manual
Software
Operating
manual
SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5
Tutorial
for SIPROTEC and

Reyrolle
Communication
protocol manuals
Product
information
Engineering
Guide
Online help DIGSI 5

Online help devices
Visio-Uebersicht-us.pdf
Selection Guide
Overview of Documentation for the SIPROTEC 5 System
SIPROTEC 5 catalog
Product information
The catalog describes the system features and the devices

of SIPROTEC 5.
The Product information includes general information about

device installation, technical data, limiting values for input and
output modules, and conditions when preparing for operation.
This document is provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device.
Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle

The selection guide offers an overview of the device series
of the Siemens protection devies, and a device selection table.
Device manuals
Each Device manual describes the functions and applications of
a specific SIPROTEC 5 device. The printed manual and the online
help for the device have the same informational structure.
Hardware manual
The Hardware manual describes the hardware building blocks
and device combinations of the SIPROTEC 5 device family.
Operating manual
The Operating manual describes the basic principles and
procedures for operating and assembling the devices of the
SIPROTEC 5 range.
Communication protocol manual
The Communication protocol manual contains a description of
the protocols for communication within the SIPROTEC 5 device
family and to higher-level network control centers.
Engineering Guide
The Engineering Guide describes the essential steps when engineering with DIGSI 5. In addition, the Engineering Guide shows
you how to load a planned configuration to a SIPROTEC 5 device
and update the functionality of the SIPROTEC 5 device.
DIGSI 5 online help
The DIGSI 5 online help contains a help package for DIGSI 5 and
CFC. The help package for DIGSI 5 includes a description of the
basic operation of software, the DIGSI principles and editors.
The help package for CFC includes an introduction to CFC programming, basic examples of working with CFC, and a reference
chapter with all the CFC blocks available for the SIPROTEC 5
range.
SIPROTEC 5 / DIGSI 5 Tutorial
The tutorial on the DVD contains brief information about
important product features, more detailed information about the
individual technical areas, as well as operating sequences with
tasks based on practical operation and a brief explanation.
2 SIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Siemens Catalog Edition 4
Content
SIPROTEC 5
Devices Protection,
Automation and
Monitoring
Catalog SIPROTEC 5.01 - Edition 4
Invalid:
Edition 3
SIPROTEC 5
Introduction
1.1
Innovation Highlights
1.2
SIPROTEC 5 Devices and Fields of Application

Device Types
2.1
Relay Selection Guide
2.2
Application Examples
2.3
Feeder and Overcurrent Protection
2.4
Line Protection
2.5
Distance Protection
2.6
Line Differential Protection
2.7
Differential and Distance Protection
2.8
Circuit-Breaker Management
2.9
Overcurrent Protection as Backup Protection for Line Protection
2.10
Transformer Differential Protection
2.11
Motor Protection
2.12
Generator Protection
2.13
Busbar Protection
2.14
Bay Controllers
2.15
Fault Recorder
2.16
SIPROTEC 5 System
The products and systems described in this catalog are

manufactured and sold according to a certified management system (acc. to ISO 9001, ISO 14001 and BS
OHSAS 18001).
Functional Integration
3.1
Protection
3.2
Control
3.3
Automation
3.4
Monitoring
3.5
Data Acquisition and Recording
3.6
Communication
3.7
Safety and Security Concept
3.8
SIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Catalog SIPROTEC 5.01 - Edition 4 3
Content
3.9
Test
3.10
Engineering
3.11
Hardware
Appendix
4.1
DIGSI 5 Variants and system requirements
4.2
Spare parts and accessories
4.3
Connection diagrams
4.4
Dimension drawings
4.5
Grouping of measured values
4.6
Technical data
4 SIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Siemens SIPROTEC 5.01 - Edition 4
Content
Editorial
Editorial
SIPROTEC has been a recognized brand leader in digital protection and bay units on the energy market for decades The
Siemens high-performance SIPROTEC devices cover the entire
power spectrum and can be implemented in a wide range of
fields from power generation to extra-high voltage transmission and distribution network applications.
"Smart automation for grids" is the Siemens response to the
present and future challenges to achieve a reliable and efficient
energy supply. SIPROTEC 5 is an active component of the
energy-efficient smart grid and an important building block in
the complex distributed energy supply systems and networks
solutions.
[E_CC_SIP5_GD_SS_LED, 1, --_--]
The next generation of SIPROTEC devices, SIPROTEC 5, is based

on the proven properties of SIPROTEC 4 to provide you with a
new, modern platform of hardware and software. This platform
offers an excellent solution to the challenges associated with
evolving grid structures and workflows. The quality, reliability
and proven functions of the former system have been
preserved. Innovative approaches including holistic workflow,
safety and security, and network stability monitoring (PMU functionality) have been added.
The pioneering system architecture puts you in full control of
switchgear communications. A powerful, reliable communication infrastructure, combined with the flexible engineering
capabilities serves as the basis for handling distributed, decentralized system structures. For you, "Designed to communicate"
in SIPROTEC 5 means: Communication is the central component
of the system architecture to provide the flexibility, safety and
security needed now and in future, automated distributed
network solutions.
With SIPROTEC 5, you are using a new generation of intelligent,
digital multifunction bay units. The new operating tool DIGSI 5
gives you the individual support you want it handles your
specific workflow requirements, from system design to device
selection and testing, covering the entire device lifecycle. The
new tool offers cost savings over the entire lifecycle without
compromising safety or system availability.
[E_CC_SIP5_PAS_Gruppe, 1, --_--]
With the new SIPROTEC 5 generation, you are well equipped to

meet the growing economic and availability demands imposed
on your networks. The philosophy of SIPROTEC 5 is reflected in
the modularity and flexibility of its hardware and software
components. Perfectly tailored fit the custom fit for your
switchgear and requirements for the application and standardization of power automation.
Ingo Erkens
General Manager
Energy Management
Digital Grid
Automation Products
[E_CC_Close_up_Laptop_USB_ISO2, 1, --_--]
SIPROTEC 5
Introduction Solutions for the power systems of today and the future
1.1
Solutions for the power systems of today and the future
How can you benefit from this experience?
SIPROTEC has been established on the energy market for

decades as a powerful and complete system family of digital
protection relays and bay units from Siemens. SIPROTEC protection devices from Siemens can be used consistently throughout
all applications in medium and high voltage. With SIPROTEC,
operators have their plants firmly and safely under control, and
have the basis to implement cost-effective solutions for all tasks
in modern, intelligent and "smart" power systems. Users can
combine the units of the individual SIPROTEC device series at
will for solving a variety of tasks SIPROTEC stands for
continuity, openness and future-proof design.
Proven and complete applications

Optimum cooperation of the components in the system
Highest quality of hardware and functionality
Excellent operator friendliness of devices and tools
Easy data exchange between applications
Excellent consistency of product and system
Reduced complexity due to simple operation
Siemens as a reliable, worldwide operating party.
As the innovation driver and trendsetter in the field of power

system protection for 100 years, Siemens helps you to design
your power systems in an intelligent, ecological, reliable and
efficient way, and to operate them economically. As a pioneer,
Siemens has decisively influenced the development of digital
power system protection (Figure 1.1/2). The first application
went into operation in Wrzburg, Germany, in 1977. Consistent
integration of protection and control functions for all SIPROTEC
devices was the innovation step in the 90s. After the release of
the IEC 61850 communication standard in 2004, Siemens was
the first manufacturer worldwide to put a system with this
communication standard into operation. More than 500,000
Siemens devices with IEC 61850 are in operation throughout
the world.
Information about the SIPROTEC 4 and SIPROTEC Compact

product families can be found in the related catalogs or at:
www.siemens.com/siprotec
Many users have approved SIPROTEC protection devices for use

in their power systems. The devices have also been certified by
independent test institutes and universities (KEMA, EPRI, LOYD,
UR Laboratories).
[SIP_Schutz_Gruppe, 1, --_--]
Figure 1.1/1 SIPROTEC family
1.1/1 SIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Siemens SIPROTEC 5.01 - Edition 4
SIPROTEC 5
Introduction Solutions for the power systems of today and the future
1.1
[SIPROTEC5 Historie_dt, 1, en_US]
Figure 1.1/2 SIPROTEC pioneer for generations
SIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Catalog SIPROTEC 5.01 - Edition 4 1.1/2
SIPROTEC 5
Introduction The new benchmark for protection, automation and monitoring
The new benchmark for protection, automation and
monitoring
1.1
The SIPROTEC 5 series is based on long-term field experience of

the SIPROTEC device series and has specifically been designed
for the new requirements of modern power systems. For this
purpose, SIPROTEC 5 is equipped with extensive functionalities
and device types. With the integrated and consistent engineering tool DIGSI 5, a solution has also been provided for the
increasingly complex processes, from design through engineering up to test and operation.
Thanks to the high degree of modularity of hardware and software, the functionality of the device types can be tailored to the
requested application and adjusted to the ever changing
requirements throughout the entire lifecycle.
In addition to the reliable and selective protection and the
complete automation function, SIPROTEC 5 offers an extensive
database for operating and monitoring modern power systems.
Synchrophasors (PMU), network quality data and extensive
equipment data are included in the increments of the functionality.
Powerful protection functions ensure the safety of equipment

and staff
[SIP5_Gruppe, 1, --_--]
Figure 1.1/3 SIPROTEC 5 Modular hardware
Individually configurable devices save money on the initial
investment and on spare parts storage, maintenance, expansion and adaptation of your plant
Arc protection, detection of transient ground faults, and

process bus can easily be integrated and retrofitted
Purposeful and easy handling of devices and software thanks

to a user-friendly design
Increased reliability and quality of the engineering process

Consistent implementation of high safety and security mechanisms
Powerful communication components ensure safe and effective solutions
Full compatibility between IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2

Integrated switch for low-cost and redundant optical and electrical Ethernet rings
Redundancy protocols RSTP, PRP and HSR for maximum availability
Efficient operating concepts due to flexible engineering of
[E_CC_SIP5_19Zoll_KomMod, 1, --_--]
Figure 1.1/4 SIPROTEC 5 - Modular process connection
IEC 61850 Edition 2
Comprehensive database to monitor modern power systems

Optimal smart automation platform for your power systems
based on integrated synchrophasor measurement units (PMU)

and Power Quality functions.
SIPROTEC 5
Innovation Highlights Holistic workflow
With SIPROTEC 5, Siemens is writing another chapter in the
successful history of protection technology, representing the
5th digital generation and over 100 years of experience in
protection. SIPROTEC 5 represents the next logical step in this
development. With SIPROTEC 5, we have combined a functionality that has been proven and refined over years with a highperformance and flexible new platform, extended with trendsetting innovations for present and future demands.
Holistic workflow
Perfectly tailored fit

Individually configurable devices provide you with cost-effective
solutions that match your needs precisely throughout the entire
lifecycle. SIPROTEC 5 sets new standards in cost savings and
availability with its innovative modular and flexible hardware,
software and communication. SIPROTEC 5 provides a perfectly
tailored fit for your switchgear and applications that is
unequaled by any other system.
1.2
Perfectly tailored fit in SIPROTEC 5 means:
End-to-end engineering from system design to operation makes

your work easier throughout the entire process.
Modular system design in hardware, functionality and
The highlight of SIPROTEC 5 is the greater-than-ever emphasis

on daily ease of operation. SIPROTEC 5 provides holistic support
along all the steps in the workflow, allowing for system view
management and configuration down to the details of individual devices, saving time and cost without compromising
quality (Figure 1.2/1).
Functional integration of a wide range of applications, such as
Holistic workflow in SIPROTEC 5 means:
Integrated, consistent system and device engineering from
the single line of the plant all the way to device parameterization
Simple, intuitive graphical linking of primary and secondary

equipment
Supplied application templates for the most frequently used

applications
Manufacturer-independent tool for easy system engineering

Open interfaces for seamless integration into your process
environment
Integrated tools for testing during engineering, commis-
sioning, and for simulating operational scenarios, such as

system incidents or switching operations.
communication ensures the perfect fit to your needs
protection, control, measurement, power quality or fault

recording
The same expansion and communication modules for all

devices in the family
Innovative terminal technology ensures easy assembly and

interchangeability at the highest possible degree of safety
Identical functions throughout the entire system family mean
fewer training requirements and increased safety. Example:
Identical automatic reclosing (AREC) for the line protection
devices 7SD8, 7SA8, 7SL8
Functions can be edited to be customized individually for your

specific requirements
Innovations are made available to all devices at the same time

and can easily be retrofitted as needed via libraries
Perfectly tailored fit in SIPROTEC 5 means for you: Individually
configurable devices save money on initial investment, spare
parts storage, maintenance, extension and adaptation of your
system.
[Innovationsschwerpunkte, 1, --_--]
Figure 1.2/2 SIPROTEC 5 - innovation highlights
Designed to communicate
[Holistic workflow, 1, en_US]
Figure 1.2/1 End-to-end tools from design to operation
Holistic workflow in SIPROTEC 5 means for you:

An end-to-end tool from system design to operation even
across department boundaries saves time, assures data
security and transparency throughout the entire lifecycle of your
plant
The trendsetting system architecture places communication

firmly under your control. Powerful, flexible, and above all reliable communication is the prerequisite for distributed and
decentralized system topologies, such as Smart Grids. In the
system architecture of SIPROTEC 5, we have attached immense
importance to communication, and we have gone to exceptional lengths to ensure that you are ideally equipped for the
communication demands of today and the future.
Designed to communicate in SIPROTEC 5 means:
Adaptation to the topology of your communication structure

using parameters (ring, star, network, etc.)
Scalable redundancy in hardware and software (protocols to

match your requirements)
SIPROTEC 5
Innovation Highlights Safety and security inside
Multiple communication channels to various higher-level
Encryption along the entire communication route between
Pluggable and upgradeable communication modules

Hardware modules decoupled from the currently used
Automatic logging of access attempts and safety-critical oper-
systems
1.2
communication protocol
2 independent Ethernet protocols in one module

Extensive routines for test connections, functions and oper-
DIGSI 5 and device, in accordance with the recommendations

of industry standards and best practices
ations on the devices and systems.
Smart Automation for Grids
Expansion module for process-bus communication
Climate change and dwindling fossil fuels are forcing a total reevaluation of the energy supply industry, from generation to
distribution and consumption. This is having fundamental
effects on the structure and operation of the power systems.
Designed to communicate in SIPROTEC 5 means for you:

Communication as an integral component of the system architecture provides you with the flexibility and safeguards you
need in densely networked systems today and in the future.
Smart automation, the intelligent power automation system, is

a major real-time component designed to preserve the stability
of these power systems and at the same time conserve energy
and reduce costs.
ating workflows
With SIPROTEC 5 and the unique spectrum of integrated functionality, you have the optimum smart automation platform for
your smart power systems.
Smart Automation for Grids in SIPROTEC 5 means:
Open, scalable architecture for IT integration and new functions
"Smart functions", for example for network operation, analysis

of faults or power quality (power system monitoring, power
control unit, fault location)
Integrated automation with optimized logic blocks based on

the IEC 61131-3 standard
High-precision acquisition and processing of process values

and transmission to other components in Smart Grid
[SIP5_Kommunikationsschnittst, 1, --_--]
Figure 1.2/3 SIPROTEC 5 device with extensive communication interfaces
Safety and security inside

Multilayer safety mechanisms in all links of the system safety
chain provide you with the highest possible level of safety and
availability. Safety for humans and the plant, and maximum
availability, are the top priorities. As the plant systems become
more open and complex, conventional safety mechanisms are
no longer adequate. For this reason, a safety concept has been
integrated in the SIPROTEC 5 device architecture that is
designed to address and implement these multilayer aspects in a
holistic approach.
Protection, automation and monitoring in Smart Grid.

SIPROTEC 5 devices have specifically been designed to meet the
requirements of the modern grid, secure the future and offer
the necessary automation platform.
The elements that connect the five mentioned innovation highlights are IEC 61850 Edition 2 and its thoroughly designed, useroriented implementation in SIPROTEC 5.
Safety and security inside in SIPROTEC 5 means:
Proven functions to protect plants and personnel, continuously developed over five generations.
Long-lasting, rugged hardware (housings, modules, plugs)
and a sophisticated layout of the entire electronics for highest

resilience against voltage, EMC, climate and mechanical stress
Sophisticated self-monitoring routines identify and report

device faults immediately and reliably
Conformity with the stringent Cyber Security requirements in
accordance with the industry standards and regulations, such

as the BDEW Whitepaper and NERC CIP
[Systemkomponente, 1, --_--]
Figure 1.2/4 SIPROTEC 5 as a system component of the smart grid
IEC 61850 Simply usable

Siemens, the pioneer of IEC 61850, makes the full potential of
this global standard easily usable for you.
1.2/2
SIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Siemens SIPROTEC 5.01 - Edition 4
SIPROTEC 5
Innovation Highlights IEC 61850 Simply usable
The IEC 61850 standard is more than just a substation automation protocol. It comprehensively defines data types, functions
and communication in station networks. In Edition 2, the influence of the standard is extended to more domains and applications of the energy supply industry.
Siemens was actively involved in the process of standardization
from Edition 1 to Edition 2, and with the largest number of
completed installations in the world, our experience as a manufacturer in the field is unsurpassed. Jointly with key customers,
we designed its implementation in SIPROTEC 5, paying close
attention to interoperability, flexibility and compatibility
between Editions 1 and 2.
Besides the standard protocol IEC 61850, SIPROTEC 5 also
supports other protocols, such as IEC 60870-5-103, IEC
60870-5-104, DNP 3 (serial or TCP) or Modbus TCP.
"IEC 61850 Simply usable" in SIPROTEC 5 means:
A stand-alone IEC 61850 system configurator allows
IEC 61850 configuration of SIPROTEC 5, SIPROTEC 4 and

devices from other vendors
Full compatibility with Editions 1 and 2

Open interfaces to IEC 61850 guarantee manufacturer-inde-
1.2
pendent system configuration and interoperability
Conversion of the complexity of the IEC 61850 data model

into your familiar user language
Flexible object modeling, degrees of freedom in object
addressing and flexible communication services ensure the

highest possible degree of interoperability and effective
exchange and expansion concepts
Handling optimization based on many projects and close

cooperation with customers from all fields of application
Protection settings via IEC 61850

Using several communication modules in Edition 2
The implementation of IEC 61850 Edition 2 unleashes the full
potential of this standard by optimally supporting your operational needs and simplifying handling.
[IEC61850 Symbol, 1, --_--]
SIPROTEC 5
Innovation Highlights IEC 61850 Simply usable
1.2
[IEC61850 Edition 2 Certificate Level A, 1, --_--]
Figure 1.2/5 First IEC 61850 certificate Edition 2 worldwide
1.2/4
SIPROTEC 5 Devices and Fields of

Application
Chapter
Device Types
2.1
2.2
Application Examples
2.3
2.4
Line Protection
2.5
Distance Protection
2.6
Line Differential Protection
2.7
Differential and Distance Protection
2.8
Circuit-Breaker Management
2.9
Overcurrent Protection as Backup Protection

for Line Protection
2.10
2.11
Motor Protection
2.12
2.13
Busbar Protection
2.14
Bay Controllers
2.15
Fault Recorder
2.16
2/1 SIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Siemens SIPROTEC 5.01 - Edition 4

Device Types
2.1
[dw_sip5_anwendung, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.1/1 Fields of application of the SIPROTEC 5 devices
The graphic gives an overview of the utilization of SIPROTEC 5

devices in the power system. With renewable energy producers,
in particular, there is power infeed into the grid at all voltage
levels. Protected objects are busbars, overhead lines or cables,
and transformers. These objects have the corresponding protection device allocated.
Device Types
A short five-digit code permits easy identification of the
SIPROTEC 5 devices. The first digit (6 or 7) stands for digital
technology. The two letters describe the functionality, and the
last two digits identify typical properties. Further details can be
found in the catalog section of the related device description.
Definition of the device types by their designation
[dw_device_typ, 1, en_US]

Device Types
Main function
Device types
Overcurrent protection
Overcurrent protection with PMU1) and control
7SJ82, 7SJ85
Line protection
Distance protection with PMU1) and control
2.1
7SA82, 7SA86, 7SA87
Line differential protection with PMU1) and control
7SD82, 7SD86, 7SD87
Combined line differential and distance protection with PMU1) and control
7SL82, 7SL86, 7SL87
Circuit-breaker management device with PMU1) and control
7VK87
Overcurrent protection for lines with PMU1)
7SJ86
Transformer protection
Transformer protection with PMU1), control and monitoring
7UT82, 7UT85, 7UT86, 7UT87
Motor protection
Motor protection with PMU1) and control
7SK82, 7SK85
Generator protection
Generator protection
7UM85
Busbar protection
Central busbar protection
7SS85
Bay controllers
Bay controllers for control/interlocking tasks with PMU1), monitoring and protec- 6MD85, 6MD86
tion functions1)
Fault recorders
Fault recorders, fault recorders with power quality recordings and fault
recorders with PMU
7KE85
Table 2.1/1 Available device types in the SIPROTEC 5 system
(1)
optional

2.2
1-pole
7SA87
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping
7SA86
3-pole
7SA82
Abbr.
7KE85
Functions
6MD86
ANSI
6MD85
Hardware quantity structure expandable
I/O
Distance protection
Z<, V/(V,I)
21T
Impedance protection for transformers
Z<
87L
Line differential protection for 2 line ends
87L
Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line ends (dependent I

on Significant properties)
21/21N
2.2
14
Locked rotor protection
I> + n<
24
Overexcitation protection
V/f
25
Synchrocheck, synchronizing function
Sync
27
Undervoltage protection: "3-phase" or "pos.seq. V1" or

"universal Vx"
V<
27
32, 37
Undervoltage protection: "3-phase" or "universal Vx"
V<
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection
Q>/V<
Power protection active/reactive power
P<>, Q<>
32R
Reverse power protection
- P<
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
Temperature Supervision
>
40
Underexcitation protection
1/xd
46
Negative sequence overcurrent protection
I2>
46
Unbalanced-load protection (thermal)
I2 t>
46
Negative sequence overcurrent protection with direction
I2>, (V2,I2)
47
Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence system
V2>
47
Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence- / positivesequence system
V2/V1>
47
Overvoltage protection: "neg.-seq. V2" or "neg.-seq. V2 /

pos.-seq.V1"
V2>; V2/V1>
48
Starting-time supervision for motors
Istart
49
Thermal overload protection
, It
49
Thermal overload protection for RLC filter elements of a

capacitor bank
, It
h, It
49H
Hot spot calculation
49R
Thermal overload protection, rotor
50/51 TD
Overcurrent protection, phases
I>
50N/ 51N TD
Overcurrent protection, ground
IN>
50HS
High speed instantaneous overcurrent protection
I>>>
Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
Overcurrent protection, 1-phase
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns
Sensitive ground-current protection for systems with reso- INs>

nant or isolated neutral
Intermittent ground fault protection
Iie>
50/51 TD
Overcurrent protection for RLC filter elements of a capacitor bank
I>
INs>
50GN
Shaft current protection
50/27
Inadvertent energization protection
I>, V<reset
50BF
Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole
CBFP
50BF
Circuit-breaker failure protection, 1-/3-pole
CBFP
50RS
Circuit-breaker restrike protection
CBRS
50EF
End fault protection
50L
Load-jam protection
I>L
51V
Voltage dependent overcurrent protection
t=f(I,V)
7VK87
7UT87
7UT86
7SL86
7UT85
7SL82
7UT82
7SK85
7UM85
7SK82
7SS85
7SJ86
7SL87
7SJ85
7SJ82
7SD86
7SD87
7SD82
2.2
2.2
Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "zero seq. V0" or

"pos.seq. V1" or "universal Vx"
V>
59
Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "pos.seq. V1" or

"universal Vx"
V>
59N, 67Ns
Stator ground fault protection (undirectional, directional)
7SA87
59, 59N
7SA86
V> cap.
7SA82
Abbr.
Peak overvoltage protection, 3-phase, for capacitors
7KE85
Functions
6MD86
ANSI
6MD85
V0>, (V0,I0)
27TH, 59TH, 59THD Stator ground fault protection with 3rd harmonics
V03.H<, V03.H>;
V03.H
Iunbal>
60C
Current-unbalance protection for capacitor banks
64S
Stator ground fault protection 100% (20-Hz)
RSG<
64F, frated
Rotor ground fault protection (IRG>, fn)
IRG>
RRG<
64F, frated
Rotor ground fault protection (RRG>, fn)
66
Restart inhibit for motors
It
67
Directional overcurrent protection, phases
I>, (V,I)
67N
Directional overcurrent protection for ground faults in

grounded systems
IN>, (V,I)
IN>, (V,I)
67N
Directional overcurrent protection, ground
67Ns
Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with resonant or isolated neutral incl. a) 3I0>, b) V0>, c) Cos-/
SinPhi, d) Transient fct., e) Phi(V,I), f) admittance
Directional intermittent ground fault protection
Iie dir>
68
Power-swing blocking
Z/t
74TC
Trip circuit supervision
TCS
78
Out-of-step protection
Z/t
79
Automatic reclosing, 3-pole
AR
79
Automatic reclosing, 1-/3-pole
AR
81
Frequency protection: "f>" or "f<" or "df/dt"
f>,<; df/dt>,<
85/21
Teleprotection for distance protection
85/27
Weak or no infeed: Echo and Tripping
85/67N
Teleprotection for directional ground fault protection
86
Lockout
87B
Busbar differential protection
WI
Cross stabilization
Bay
87T
Transformer differential protection
87T
Transformer differential protection for phase angle regula- I

ting transformer (single core)
87T
Transformer differential protection for phase angle regula- I

ting transformer (two core)
87T
Transformer differential protection for special transformers
87T Node
Differential protection (Node protection for Autotransformer)
I Node
87N T
Restricted ground-fault protection
IN
87M
Motor differential protection
87G
Generator differential protection
87C
Differential protection, capacitor bank
87V
Voltage differential protection, capacitor bank
87L/ 87T
Option for line differential protection: including power

transformer
Option for line differential protection:charging-current

compensation
Broken-wire detection for differential protection
7VK87
7UT87
7UT86
7UM85
7UT85
7SS85
7UT82
7SL87
7SL86
7SL82
7SK85
7SJ82
7SK82
7SD87
7SJ86
7SD86
7SJ85
7SD82
2.2
7SA87
STUB Differential protection (for one-and-half circuitbreaker applications)
90V
Automatic voltage control for 2 winding transformer
90V
90V
Automatic voltage control for grid coupling transformer
FL
Fault locator, single-ended measurement
PMU
Synchrophasor measurement (1 PMU can be used for max. PMU

8 voltages and 8 currents)
AFD
Arc-protection (only with plug-in module ARC-CD-3FO)
Measured values, standard
FL-one
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, Avg
Switching statistic counters
Circuit breaker wear monitoring
7KE85
Functions
87 STUB
Ix, It, 2P
7SA82
6MD86
ANSI
CFC (Standard, Control)
CFC arithmetic
Switching sequences function
Inrush current detection
External trip initiation
Control
Fault recording of analog and binary signals
Monitoring and supervision
Protection interface, serial
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
Region France: Overload protection for lines and cables

'PSL-PSC'
Region France: Overcurrent protection 'MAXI-L'
Region France: Net decoupling protection 'PDA'
Region France: Overload protection for transformers
FSR
Fast-scan recorder
FSR
SSR
Slow-scan recorder
SSR
CR
Continuous recorder
CR
TR
Trend recorder
TR
PQR
Power Quality recordings (functionalities)
PQR
Sequence of events recorder
SOE
ExTrFct
Extended trigger functions
ExTrFct
Transformer Side 7UT85

2.2/6
7SA86
2.2
Abbr.
6MD85
7UT86
7UT87
7SL87
7SS85
7SL82
7SJ86
7SJ85
7SJ82
7SL86
7SK85
7SK82
7VK87
7UT85
7UT82
7UM85
7SD87
7SD86
7SD82
2.2

2.2
2.2/8

Application Examples Medium voltage
Medium-voltage applications for all system grounding types
Fast fault clearance in double-feed lines (closed) rings
2.3
[dw_Mittelspg-02, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/3 Fast fault clearance in double-feed lines (closed) rings
Properties
[dw_Mittelspg-01_Var3, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/1 Medium-voltage applications for all system grounding

types
Properties
Reliable detection of transients and static ground faults

Cost saving due to integrated transient function
Directional and non-directional protection and control functions
Directional DMT/IDMTL protection without grading times

Fast fault clearance
Low-cost due to integrated protection interface
Monitored data exchange
Adaptable to different communication infrastructures.
Central control of multiple feeders and dedicated protection
Acquisition and transmission of PMU variables possible

Protection and control of several feeders with one device
[dw_zentrale-Steuerung, 2, en_US]
[dw_Mittelspg-03, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/2 Protection and control of several feeders with one device
Figure 2.3/4 Central control of multiple feeders and dedicated protection
Properties
Properties
Reduced investment with one device for several feeders

Easy parameterization
Shorter commissioning times
Protecting up to 7 feeders with a single device reduces costs
Protection for each bay

Central control for multiple feeders
High availability because backup protection functions can be
activated in the controllers.

Application Examples Motor protection
Induction motor: protection and control
Motor protection and easier differential protection
2.3
[dw_Motor-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/5 Induction motor: protection and control

Properties
Figure 2.3/7 Protection and control of several feeders with one device
Reduced investment due to protection and control in one

device
Properties
Thermal motor protection functions for reliable motor moni-
Differential protection function provides high responsivity and
Thermal motor protection functions with direct connection of
Integration of the differential protection function in a sepa-
Motor protection with differential protection
Differential motor protection with Korndorfer starter
toring
temperature sensors.
short tripping time
rate function group reduces costs.
Figure 2.3/6 Motor protection with differential protection
Properties
Autonomous differential protection functions

High sensitivity and short tripping times due to differential
[dw_Motordiff-mit-starter, 3, en_US]
Figure 2.3/8 Differential motor protection with Korndorfer starter
protection function.
Separate acquisition and monitoring of the current transformers.
2.3/2

Application Examples Motor protection
Properties
Capturing, monitoring and controlling all circuit breakers

Differential protection function also available during startup.
2.3

Application Examples Transformer protection
Two-winding transformer
Autotransformer bank
2.3
[dw_Trafo1, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/9 Two-winding transformer

Properties
Clear assignment of the functions to the primary element

Reduced investment.
Simple parameterization
Reduced wiring and faster commissioning.
Two-winding transformer with 2 incoming feeders (e.g.
double circuit-breaker switchgear) protection
Figure 2.3/11 Autotransformer bank
Reduced investment due to integration of the differential and

node protection function in one unit (87 and 87 Node)
High sensitivity with single line to ground faults.

Protection and backup protection solution for 3-winding
transformers
Figure 2.3/10 Two-winding transformer with 2 incoming feeders (e.g.

double circuit-breaker switchgear) protection
Properties
Separate acquisition, monitoring and control of all circuit

breakers
High sensitivity with single line to ground-fault differential

protection
Cost savings due to 87T and 87T N in one unit.
Figure 2.3/12 Protection and backup protection solution for 3-winding

transformers
2.3/4

Application Examples Transformer protection
Properties
Free design of the protection and backup protection concept

Inclusion of line protection devices
Increased availability.
Three-winding transformer with differential protection 87T
and distance protection 21
2.3
[dw_kat-three-wind_7ut86, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/13 Three-winding transformer with differential protection

87T and distance protection 21
Properties
Integrated backup protection function for the power system

Easy engineering
Increased flexibility for different plant versions

Application Examples Generator protection
Unit connection of a small-power generator
Unit connection of a medium-power generator
2.3
[dw_appl-01_simplified, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/14 Unit connection of a small-power generator
Properties
All functions in one device keep investments low

Basic hardware (1/3 x 19")
Preconfigured with the "Generator basis" application template
[dw_simplified_appl-03, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/15 Unit connection of a medium-power generator
Properties

Preconfigured with the "Generator unit connection basis"
application template
Stator ground-fault protection protects 100% of the stator

winding by evaluating the residual voltage via the fundamental component and the 3rd harmonic (59N, 27TH)
Differential protection via generator transformer with function 87T
2.3/6

Unit connection of a generator of medium to high power
Unit connection of a generator with auxiliary transformer
2.3
[dw_simplified_appl-04, 1, en_US]
[dw_simplified_appl-04_2, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/16 Unit connection of a generator of medium to high power
Figure 2.3/17 Unit connection of a generator with auxiliary transformer
Properties
Properties

Minimum hardware (2/3 x 19")
Preconfigured with the "Generator unit connection enhanced"
Stand-alone differential protection for generator (87G) and

generator transformer (87T)

Modification of the "Generator unit connection enhanced"
Stand-alone differential protection via generator (87G) and

generator transformer (87T)
Real 100% stator ground-fault protection by coupled 20-Hz

voltage
Implementation of the transformer differential protection as
Stator ground-fault protection possible at plant standstill

Synchrocheck release by the device during manual synchroni-
Real 100% stator ground-fault protection for coupling a 20-Hz
zation
Redundancy by device doubling
teed feeder differential protection

voltage
Stator ground-fault protection possible at standstill

Synchrocheck release by the device during manual synchronization

Busbar connection of a generator
High-power generator with protection as sub-packet
Figure 2.3/18 Busbar connection of a generator
Figure 2.3/19 High-power generator with protection as sub-packet
Properties
Properties

Preconfigured with the "Generator busbar connection" appli-
The delivery includes generator, excitation and generator
2.3
cation template
Stand-alone differential protection for the generator (87G)

Directional stator ground-fault protection (67Ns)
protection of a plant in unit connection for a steam turbine

Modification of the "Generator unit connection enhanced"
Sensitive reverse-power protection by connection to a separate instrument transformer
Separate protection for the excitation transformer

Synchrocheck release by the device during manual synchronization
2.3/8

Application Examples Line protection
Protection and control separate
Distance protection of two parallel lines with one device
[dw_LS-parallel, 2, en_US]
2.3
Figure 2.3/22 Distance protection of two parallel lines with one device
Properties
Low-cost due to protection of both lines in one device

Stable due to consideration of the influences of the parallel
line for the distance protection function.
[dw_LS-getrennt, 1, en_US]
Self-restoring multi-end configurations
Figure 2.3/20 Protection and control separate
Properties
Clear assignment of protection and control in separate devices

Less external components by detection and selection of
busbar voltage in the device
High reliability due to backup protection functions in the

6MD8 bay controller
High availability due to emergency control in the 7SL8 protection device.

Low-cost protection and device redundancy
[dw_Diff-Schutz-Ringschaltung, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/23 Self-restoring multi-end configurations
Properties
High availability because differential protection is also active

when a communication link fails
[dw_LS-guenstige-variante, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/21 Low-cost protection and device redundancy
Self-restoring due to automatic switchover from ring to chain
Properties
High ease of maintenance because single line ends can be
High availability due to protection and device redundancy

Low-cost because only 2 devices required for 2 lines
Reliable because of parallel processing of the protection func-
topology
taken out of the differential protection configuration for

commissioning and servicing.
tions in the devices.

Application Examples Line protection
Impedance protection for the low-voltage side of a
transformer
2.3
[dw_z-prot-transf-lv-side_7sa86_090115, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/24 Impedance protection
Properties
The impedance protection for transformers (ANSI 21T)
permits effective backup protection with zones that reach in

the transformer
A second impedance protection device can be used in the
same function group to protect the busbar at the low-voltage

side with reverse interlocking (85-21 RI)
The impedance protection also provides the imperative
backup protection for the medium voltage feeders with highly

sensitive defect detection and stability under a heavy load.
Dual breaker applications
[dw_dual-breaker-applications_7sa86_090115, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/25 Dual Breaker Applications
Properties
With separate measurement of the CT current from both

breakers a stub protection is possible
Separate measurement of CT currents improves stability
during heavy through fault current flowing from one bus to

the other when both breakers are closed.

Application Examples Breaker-and-a-half layout
Modular and distributed protection and control solution
Low-cost device and protective redundancy in breaker-anda-half arrangements
2.3
[dw_kostenguenstige-geraete, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/27 Low-cost device and protective redundancy in breakerand-a-half arrangements

[dw_ein-einhalb-LS, 1, en_US]
Properties
Figure 2.3/26 Modular and distributed protection and control solution
Unambiguous allocation of the main protection function (line
Properties
The distance-protection function (21) is implemented in the

protection device of the other line by a second "line" function
group
differential protection 87) to one line in one device (Main 1)
Clarity due to clear assignment of protection and control

High availability due to protection redundancy (Main 1 and
Main 2)
Simple reliable central control of the entire diameter

Reliable due to emergency control in every line in the protec-
High availability and safety by device and protection redundancy
Low costs due to protecting and controlling a complete diameter with only two devices.
tion device
Reduced wiring due to integrated voltage selection

System-wide diameter bus based on IEC 61850
electrically isolated data exchange
reduced wiring
easy expansion.

Application Examples Capacitor banks
Protection of a capacitor bank in an H connection
Properties
Optimum protection of complex banks and filter circuits with

flexible hardware and a flexible function design
Low costs due to the integration of all necessary functions in

one device for up to seven 3-phase measuring points
Generation of current sum and current difference at the
current interface of the protection function group "3-phase

V/I"
Detection of current and voltage signals up to the 50th
harmonic with a high accuracy for protection and operational

measured values.
2.3
[dw_CapBank_SLE_vereinfacht, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/28 Protection of a capacitor bank in an H connection
Properties
Precisely adapted due to dedicated function group and appli-
cation-specific protection function, such as peak overvoltage

protection (ANSI 59C) and sensitive currentunbalance protection (ANSI 60C)
Low cost due to integration of all required functions into one

device.
Protection of an MSCDN capacitor bank(MSCDN = Mechanically Switched Circuit breaker with Damping Network)
[dw_mscdn-app-temp_7sj85_090115, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/29 Protection of an MSCDN capacitor bank

Application Examples Busbar protection
Double busbar feeder with busbar coupler
2.3
[dw_Verbindungen-Feld-Koppl, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/30 Double busbar feeder with busbar coupler
Properties
Central busbar protection

Summary of all primary components of a bay in the "Bay
Proxy"
One device for up to 20 measuring points

Flexible adaptation to the topology (up to 4 busbar sections
and 4 busbar couplers configurable)
Integrated disconnector image

Comfortable graphical project engineering with DIGSI 5.

Application Examples Power system monitoring and PMU
Grid monitoring and PMU
2.3
[dw_netzmonitor-mit-pmu, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/31 Principle of distributed phasor measurement
Properties
Each SIPROTEC 5 device can be equipped or retrofi tted with

the PMU function
Online and offline evaluation of the PMU data in the monitoring system, SIGUARD PDP.

Feeder and Overcurrent Protection SIPROTEC 7SJ82, 7SJ85
2.4
[dw_7SJ_anwendung, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7SJ82, 7SJ85
Essential differentiating characteristics
The main protection functions of the SIPROTEC 5 overcurrent

protection devices are based on the overcurrent protection principle. Although they primarily protect feeders and lines in the
distribution system, they can also be used in a high-voltage
power system without any problems. The hardware quantity
structure, which can flexibly be extended, permits several
feeders to be protected with one device. Due to the large
number of available functions and the great flexibility, the
device is suitable for a multitude of additional protection and
monitoring applications. Specifically for utilization as backup
and emergency protection for line protection, we recommend
using the SIPROTEC 7SJ86. The large number of automatic functions permits the device to be used in all fields of energy supply.
7SJ82
Different hardware quantity structures for binary inputs and

outputs are available in the 1/3 base module
7SJ85
Flexible configuration of the hardware quantity structure for

analog inputs, binary inputs and outputs, measuring transducers and communication due to expandability with 1/6
expansion modules
The devices contain all important auxiliary functions that are

necessary today for safe network operation. This includes functions for protection, control, measurement and monitoring. The
large number of communication interfaces and communication
protocols satisfies the requirements of communication-based
selective protection, as well as automated operation.
Commissioning and maintenance work can be completed safely,
quickly and thus cost-effectively with high-performance test
functions. Their modular structure permits SIPROTEC 5 devices
always to be adapted flexibly to the individual requirements.
Features
The difference between the two device models SIPROTEC 7SJ82
and SIPROTEC 7SJ85 is in the configurability of their hardware
quantity structure.
2.4/1

Feeder and Overcurrent Protection SIPROTEC 7SJ82
Description
The SIPROTEC 7SJ82 overcurrent protection has specifically been
designed for a cost-effective and compact protection of feeders
and lines in medium-voltage and high-voltage systems. With its
flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC
7SJ82 offers future-oriented system solutions with high investment security and low operating costs.
Main function
Feeder and overcurrent protection for all

voltage levels
Inputs and outputs
4 current transformers, 4 voltage transformers

(optional), 11 or 23 binary inputs, 9 or
16 binary outputs, or
8 current transformers, 7 binary inputs,
7 binary outputs
Hardware flexibility
Housing width
Different hardware quantity structures for

binary inputs and outputs are available in the
1/3 base module. Adding 1/6 expansion
modules is not possible; available with large or
small display.
2.4
[SIP5_7xx82_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Figure 2.4/2 SIPROTEC 7SJ82
Protection functions for capacitor banks, such as overcurrent,
1/3 19"
overload, current unbalance, peak overvoltage, or differential

protection
Benefits
Compact and low-cost overcurrent protection

Safety due to powerful protection functions
Data security and transparency over the entire lifecycle of the
plant save time and money



High investment security and low operating costs due to
future-oriented system solution.
Reactive power-undervoltage protection (QU protection)

Control, synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection,
circuit-breaker failure protection
Circuit-breaker failure protection

Circuit-breaker reignition monitoring
Graphical logic editor to create powerful automation functions in the device
Recognition of current and voltage signals up to the 50th
harmonic with high accuracy for selected protection functions

(such as peak overvoltage protection for capacitors) and
operational measured values
Single line representation in small or large display

Integrated electrical Ethernet RJ45 for DIGSI 5 and IEC 61850
(reporting and GOOSE)
Two optional pluggable communication modules, usable for
Functions
DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as
required.
Directional and non-directional overcurrent protection with

additional functions
Optimized tripping times due to directional comparison and

protection data communication
Detection of static, intermittent and transient ground faults
(fleeting contact function) in arc-suppression-coil-ground and

isolated power systems
Arc protection
different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850,

IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus TCP, DNP3 (serial
and TCP))
Serial protection data communication via optical fibers, two-
wire connections and communication networks (IEEE C37.94,

and others), including automatic switchover between ring
and chain topology.
Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR

Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE Whitepaper requirements
Whitepaper Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) for synchro-
Overvoltage and undervoltage protection

Frequency protection and frequency change protection for
load shedding applications
Power protection, configurable as active or reactive power

protection
phasor measured values and IEEE C37.118 protocol
Time synchronization with IEEE 1588

Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s
at 8 kHz or 320 s at 2 kHz)
Auxiliary functions for easy tests and commissioning.

Applications
Directional overcurrent protection grounded system
Detection and selective 3-pole tripping of short circuits in

electrical equipment of star networks, lines with infeed at one
or two ends, parallel lines and open or closed ring systems of
all voltage levels
Overcurrent protection (directional and non-directional) for
Detection of ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coilground power systems in star, ring, or meshed arrangement
Backup protection for differential protection devices of all

kind for lines, transformers, generators, motors, and busbars
2.4
Protection and monitoring of simple capacitor banks

Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
Reverse-power protection
Load shedding applications
Automatic switchover
Application templates
Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for standard applications. They comprise all basic configurations and default
settings.
The following application templates are available:
Non-directional overcurrent protection
Overcurrent protection (non-directional) for phases and

ground
Transformer inrush current detection
phases and ground

Measuring voltage failure supervision.
Directional overcurrent protection resonant-grounded /
isolated system

phases
Sensitive directional ground fault detection for static ground

faults
Sensitive directional ground fault detection for transient and

static ground faults (transient function)

Capacitor bank: H connection
Overcurrent protection for phase and ground

Peak overvoltage protection
Overload protection
Undercurrent protection.
[dw_DwDOCP07, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.4/3 Application example: Principle of directional comparison protection for power line runs with infeed at two ends
Application examples
Directional comparison protection via protection interface
for power line runs with infeed at two ends
Using the direction determination of the directional overcurrent
protection, you can implement directional comparison protection for power line runs with infeed at two ends. Directional
comparison protection is used for the selective isolation of a
faulty line section (subsections of closed rings, for example).
Sections are isolated in fast time, that is, they do not suffer the
disadvantage of long grading times. This technique requires that
directional information can be exchanged between the individual protection stations. This information exchange can, for
example, be implemented via a protection interface. Alterna-
2.4/3
tives of the protection interface are IEC 61850 GOOSE or, via
pilot wires for signal transfer, with an auxiliary voltage loop.
Figure 2.4/4 shows the functional scope and the basic configuration of a SIPROTEC 7SJ82 for this application. The "Directional
V /inverse time-overcurrent protection grounded system"
application template is used as the basis. In addition, the device
must obviously be equipped with a communication module for
protection communication. The protection communication function group is created automatically when the module is configured. The "Communication mapping" editor in DIGSI 5 is used to
determine the information that must be transferred to the opposite end and received from the opposite end. The received information can directly be combined with the binary input signals of

the directional overcurrent protection. Additional logic with a
CFC chart is not necessary.
2.4
[dw_7SJ82_mit WirkKom, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.4/4 Application example: Directional comparison protection for power line runs with infeed at two ends and protection communication

ANSI
24
2.4
2.4/5
Functions
Abbr.
Available
Functions, application templates
3-pole
V/f
25
Sync
27
Undervoltage protection: "3-phase" or "pos.seq.

V1" or "universal Vx"
V<
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
32R
- P<
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46
I2>
46
I2 t>
46
Negative sequence overcurrent protection with

direction
I2>, (V2,I2)
47
Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence

system
V2>
49
, It
49
Thermal overload protection for RLC filter

elements of a capacitor bank
, It
Template
1
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns
Sensitive ground-current protection for systems

with resonant or isolated neutral
INs>
Iie>
50/51 TD
Overcurrent protection for RLC filter elements of a I>

capacitor bank
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
51V
t=f(I,V)
V> cap.
59, 59N
Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "zero seq.

V0" or "pos.seq. V1" or "universal Vx"
V>
60C
Iunbal>
67
I>, (V,I)
67N
IN>, (V,I)
67Ns
Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems

with resonant or isolated neutral incl. a) 3I0>, b)
V0>, c) Cos-/SinPhi, d) Transient fct., e) Phi(V,I), f)
admittance
Iie dir>
74TC
TCS
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
86
Lockout
87N T
IN
87C
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
90V
FL
PMU
Synchrophasor measurement (1 PMU can be used PMU

for max. 8 voltages and 8 currents)
AFD
Arc-protection (only with plug-in module ARCCD-3FO)
Template
1
FL-one
Ix, It, 2P
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
30
50
Function-points class:
2.4
100
The configuration and function points for your application can be ascertained in the SIPROTEC 5 order configurator under: www.siemens.com/siprotec
Table 2.4/1 SIPROTEC 7SJ82 - Functions and application templates
Non-directional OC (4*I)
Non-directional OC (4*I, 4*V)
Directional OC - grounded system
Directional OC - resonant-grounded / isol. system
Capacitor bank: H-bridge

Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SJ82
U1
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I

Housing width 1/3 x 19
11 binary inputs,
9 binary outputs (1 life contact, 8 standard)
4 current transformer inputs
Contains the modules: Base module with PS101 and IO101
U2
1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I

23 binary inputs,
16 binary outputs (1 life contact, 15 standard),
2.4
Contains the modules: Base module with PS101, IO101 and IO110
U3
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V

11 binary inputs,
4 voltage transformer inputs
U4
1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V

23 binary inputs,
4 current transformer inputs,
Contains the modules: Base module with PS101, IO102 and IO110
U5
1/3, 7 BI, 7 BO, 8 I

7 binary inputs,
Table 2.4/2 Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SJ82
The technical data of the devices can be found in the manual

2.4/7

Description
The SIPROTEC 7SJ85 overcurrent protection has been designed
specifically for the protection of feeders and lines. Due to its
modular structure and flexibility and the powerful engineering
tool DIGSI 5, SIPROTEC 7SJ85 offers future-oriented system solutions with high investment security and low operating costs.
Main function
Feeder and overcurrent protection for all

voltage levels
Inputs and outputs
5 predefined standard variants with 4 current

transformers, 4 voltage transformers, 11 to
59 binary inputs, 9 to 33 binary outputs
I/O quantity structure that can flexibly be

adapted and expanded within the scope of the
modular SIPROTEC 5 system. 1/6 expansion
modules can be added, available with large,
small or without display
Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
2.4
[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Functions

required.
Directional and non-directional overcurrent protection with

additional functions
Protection of up to 9 feeders with up to 40 analog inputs

Detection of static and transient ground faults (fleeting
contact function) in arc-suppression-coil-ground and isolated

power systems
Arc protection

and TCP))

and chain topology.

Phasor measurement unit (PMU) for synchrophasor measured

values and IEEE C37.118 protocol

protection

protection


(such as peak overvoltage protection for capacitors) and
operational measured values.
Control, synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection


Applications

all voltage levels
Protection and monitoring of capacitor banks

Load shedding applications
Automatic switchover

Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applications. They comprise all basic configurations and default
settings.

Overload protection
Capacitor bank: MSCDN
Non-directional overcurrent protection
Overcurrent protection for phase and ground

Differential protection for capacitor
Overload protection

ground

Directional overcurrent protection grounded system

phases and ground
2.4

Measuring voltage failure supervision
Directional overcurrent protection resonant-grounded /
isolated system

phases
Sensitive directional ground fault detection for static ground

faults
Sensitive directional ground fault detection for transient and

static ground faults (transient function)

Capacitor bank: H connection + 1 x RLC
Direction comparison protection via protection data interface for lines supplied from two sides
Direction comparison protection can be realized with the help of
direction determination of the directional overcurrent protection
in the case of lines which are supplied from two sides. The direction comparison protection is designed to selectively isolate a
faulty line section (e.g., sections of rings) in high speed, i.e. no
long graded times will slow down the tripping process. The
precondition of this procedure is that direction information can
be exchanged between the individual protective relays. This
information exchange can be realized via an protection data
interface, for instance. Alternatives to the protection data interface are IEC 61850 GOOSE or pilot wires for signal transmission
with an additional voltage loop.
Time-overcurrent protection for phases and ground

Capacitor bank unbalance protection
[dw_DwDOCP07, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.4/6 Application example: Principle of the direction comparison protection of doubly fed line sections
The SIPROTEC 7SJ82 application example(Figure 2.4/4) shows

the functions and the basic configuration for this application.
2.4/9

2.4
[dw_7SJ85_mit DoppelSS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.4/7 Application example: Overcurrent protection 7SJ85 at a double busbar feeder
Protection and control at a double busbar

In the Figure 2.4/7, a double busbar feeder is protected and
additionally controlled by a SIPROTEC 7SJ85. This example is
based on the application template "Directional V/inverse timeovercurrent protection - grounded power system". In addition to
the application template, the functions Circuit-breaker failure
protection, Automatic reclosing and Synchrocheck in the circuitbreaker function group are needed and configured. These functions can easily be added via "drag and drop" from the DIGSI 5
function library. Operational measured values and energy

metered values are calculated in the "Voltage-current 3ph" function group. They are available for output on the display, transfer
to the substation automation technology, and processing in the
CFC. A switching sequence stored in the CFC that is activated via
a function key starts an automatically executing busbar switchover process.

Protection of a capacitor bank
Figure 2.4/8 shows protection of a capacitor bank in an H

connection. For this application, the device has special functions
for the protection of capacitor banks. Thanks to the modularity
and performance of SIPROTEC 5, the complete application can
be protected by one device.
Properties:
Short-circuit protection (ANSI 50, 50N) for phase and ground

faults
Peak voltage protection (ANSI 59C), for protection of the
dielectric of the bank from harmful peak voltages, in particular, caused by harmonics; consideration of harmonics up to
the 50th order, the peak voltage being calculated from the
current by integration
Overload protection (ANSI 49) for protection of the bank from

thermal overload
Very sensitive current-unbalance protection (ANSI 60C) for
detecting the failure of a single capacitor element, as a monitoring and protection function; manual and automatic
comparison in the bay. The automatic comparison permits
consideration of dynamic unbalances, e.g. caused by temperature influences
Undercurrent protection (ANSI 37) for tripping the local circuit

breaker when the incoming feeder is disconnected; and therefore protection from hazardous energization of the nondischarged bank, e.g. in phase opposition
Circuit-breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF).
2.4
[dw_CapBank_SLE_Normal, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.4/8 Protection of a capacitor bank in H connection

2.4
[dw_CapBank_MSCDN, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.4/9 Application example: MSCDN capacitor bank
Protection of an MSCDN capacitor bank (MSCDN = Mechanically Switched Capacitor with Damping Network)
In Figure 2.4/9, the SIPROTEC 7SJ85 protects the capacitor bank
in H connection and additionally the associated damping
network. Thanks to the modular structure and performance of
SIPROTEC 5, the complete application can be protected with one
single device.
Properties:
Capturing up to seven 3-phase measuring points

Short-circuit protection (ANSI 50, 50N) for phase and ground
faults
Peak overvoltage protection (ANSI 59C) to protect the dielec-
tric medium of the bank against dangerous peak overvoltage,

in particular caused by the harmonic components with consideration of up to the 50th harmonic component. The peak
voltage is calculated by integration of the current.

Overload protection (ANSI 49) to protect the bank against

thermal overload
Very sensitive current-unbalance protection (ANSI 60C) to
detect the outage of individual capacitor elements as monitoring and protection function. Manual and automatic adjustment in the bay. Automatic adjustment permits dynamic
unbalances (caused by temperature influence, for example) to
be taken into account
Differential protection (87C) over the entire capacitor bank to

protect against short circuits inside the entire installation
2.4
Overload and overcurrent protection via the two resistors and

a simple differential protection that is to detect an outage of
one of the two resistors. For this purpose, current sum and
current difference are determined with the current measuring
points in the R branches, at the inputs of the V/I 3-phase function groups
Undercurrent protection (ANSI 37) to trip the local circuit
breaker when the infeed is disconnected providing protection

against hazardous voltage at the non-discharged bank, for
example, in phase opposition
Circuit-breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF).

ANSI
24
Functions
Abbr.
Available

Template
1
3-pole
I/O
V/f
25
Sync
27

V<
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
32R
- P<
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46
I2>
46
I2 t>
46

direction
I2>, (V2,I2)
47

system
V2>
49
, It
49
Thermal overload protection for RLC filter

elements of a capacitor bank
, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
Iie>
50/51 TD
Overcurrent protection for RLC filter elements of a I>

capacitor bank
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
51V
t=f(I,V)
V> cap.
59, 59N

V>
60C
Iunbal>
67
I>, (V,I)
67N
IN>, (V,I)
67Ns

admittance
2.4
Iie dir>
74TC
TCS
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
86
Lockout
87N T
IN
87C
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
87V
Voltage differential protection, capacitor bank
90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU

AFD
2.4
FL-one

Template
1
Ix, It, 2P
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
30
50
100
300
Non-directional OC (4*I)
Directional OC - resonant-grounded / isol. system
Capacitor bank: H-bridge + 1*RLC
Capacitor bank: MSCDN

Standard variants
S1
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V

11 binary inputs,
9 binary outputs (1 life contact, 2 standard, 6 fast),
S2
1/2, 17 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V

17 binary inputs,
2.4

Expansion modules IO206
S3
1/2, 27 BI, 17 BO, 4 I, 4 V

27 binary inputs,
S4
2/3, 43 BI, 25 BO, 4 I, 4 V

43 binary inputs,
Expansion modules 2x IO207
S5
5/6, 59 BI, 33 BO, 4 I, 4 V

59 binary inputs,
Expansion modules 3x IO207


2.4
Line Protection

Line Protection SIPROTEC 7SA8, 7SD8, 7SL8, 7VK8, 7SJ86
2.5
[dw_LineProt_anwendung, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7SA8, 7SD8, 7SL8, 7VK8, 7SJ86
SIPROTEC 5 line protection devices protect overhead lines and

cables on all voltage levels with highest selectivity possible. The
large number of protective and automatic functions available
permits their utilization in all areas of line protection. The
devices contain all important auxiliary functions that are necessary today for safe network operation. This includes control,
measurement and monitoring functions. The large number of
communication interfaces and communication protocols satisfies the requirements of communication-based selective protection and of automated operation. Commissioning and maintenance work can be completed safely, quickly and thus costeffectively with high-performance test functions. Their modular
structure permits SIPROTEC 5 line protection devices always to
be adapted flexibly to the individual requirements.
Features
The device types are defined by their main protection functions
and by essential differentiating characteristics. For devices with
flexible configurability of the hardware quantity structure, you
can select various standard variants when ordering. Expandability through supplemental modules allows for individual adaptation to specific applications such as more analog channels for
breaker-and-a-half technology, or more binary contacts (see
"Overview of the standard variants").
XX
YY
Main protection
7
SA
Distance protection
SD
Differential protection
SL
Distance and differential protection
SJ
VK
Circuit-breaker management

7
82
86
87
exclusively 3-pole tripping

two hardware variants available
exclusively 3-pole tripping
hardware quantity structure flexibly configurable
1-pole and 3-pole tripping

hardware quantity structure flexibly configurable
2.5/1

Type identification
7SA82
7SA86
7SA87
7SD82
Distance protection
for lines
7SD86
7SD87
7SL82
7SL86
7SL87
Circuit-breaker management
3-pole trip command
7SJ86
1-pole/3-pole trip
command
Flexibly configurable
hardware
7VK87
Table 2.5/1 Essential differentiating characteristics of the main protection types
2.5

2.5
2.5/3

Distance Protection SIPROTEC 7SA82
Description
The SIPROTEC 7SA82 distance protection has been designed
particularly for the cost-optimized and compact protection of
lines in medium-voltage and high-voltage systems. With its flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC
7SA82 offers future-oriented system solutions with high investment security and low operating costs.
Main function
Distance protection for medium-voltage and

high voltage applications
Tripping
3-pole, minimum tripping time: 19 ms
Inputs and outputs

16 binary outputs

small display.
Housing width
1/3 x 19"
[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Figure 2.6/1 SIPROTEC 7SA82
Benefits
2.6
Compact and low-cost distance protection
protection




future-oriented system solution
Functions
required.
Minimum tripping time: 19 ms

6 independent measuring loops (6-system distance protection)
Several distance-protection functions can be selected: Classic,

reactance method (RMD), impedance protection for transformers
Directional backup protection and various additional functions

Detection of static, intermittent and transient ground faults
Adaptive power-swing blocking

Detection of current-transformer saturation for fast tripping at

harmonic with a high accuracy for selected protection functions (such as thermal overload protection) and operational
measured values


Integrated electrical Ethernet RJ45 for DIGSI and IEC 61850

and TCP))

and chain topology.



high accuracy
Arc protection

Applications

all voltage levels
settings.
Detection of ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
Basic
Distance protections for compensated/isolated systems with
Phasor measurement unit (PMU).
Distance protection with reactance method for overhead line
ground power systems in star, ring, or meshed arrangement
AR
for grounded systems, with AR.
2.6
[dw_7SA82_Ltg, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.6/2 Application example: Distance protection for overhead line
2.6/2

ANSI
21/21N
Functions
Abbr.
Available
Functions and application templates

Template
1
3-pole
Distance protection
Z<, V/

(V,I)
21T
Z<
25
Sync
27

V<
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46

direction
I2>, (V2,I2)
47

system
V2>
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
51V
t=f(I,V)
59, 59N

V>
67
I>, (V,I)
67N
Directional overcurrent protection for ground

faults in grounded systems
IN>, (V,I)
67Ns

admittance
2.6
Iie dir>
68
Z/t
74TC
TCS
78
Z/t
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
85/21
85/27
85/67N
WI
86
Lockout
87N T
90V
90V
IN
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
90V
FL
PMU

AFD
2.6
FL-one

Template
Ix, It, 2P
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
Region France: Overload protection for lines and

cables 'PSL-PSC'
100
200
Table 2.6/1 SIPROTEC 7SA82 - Functions and application templates
2.6/4
DIS Basic
DIS, comp./isol. neutral point, with AR
DIS RMD overhead line, solid grounded neutral point

Description
The SIPROTEC 7SA86 distance protection has specifically been
designed for the protection of lines. Due to its modular structure
and flexibility and the powerful engineering tool DIGSI 5,
SIPROTEC 7SA86 offers future-oriented system solutions with
high investment security and low operating costs.
Main function
Distance protection
Tripping
Inputs and outputs
12 predefined standard variants with 4/4 or

8/8 current/voltage transformers, 5 to
Hardware quantity
structure
Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure within

the scope of the SIPROTEC 5 modular system
Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
Functions
required.

6 independent measuring loops (6-system distance protection)


Recognition of static, intermittent and transient ground faults
Adaptive power-swing blocking, out-of-step protection

Detection of current-transformer saturation for fast tripping
with high accuracy
Arc protection
protection


(such as thermal overload protection) and operational measured values
3-pole automatic reclosing function


Up to 4 optional pluggable communication modules, usable
for different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850,

and TCP))
[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
2.6

and chain topology


Time synchronization using IEEE 1588

Auxiliary functions for simple tests and commissioning

Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure within the scope of
the SIPROTEC 5 modular system
Applications

all voltage levels
Protection data communication over different distances and

physical media, such as optical fiber, two-wire connections,
and communication networks

settings.

Basis
Distance protection for overhead line for grounded systems
with AR
Distance protection with MHO distance zone characteristics
Distance protection for overhead line for grounded systems,

with AR for applications with breaker-and-a-half scheme
Distance protection with MHO distance zone characteristics
for overhead line for grounded systems, with AR for applications with breaker-and-a-half schemes.
for overhead line for grounded systems, with AR
2.6
2.6/6

2.6
[dw_7SA86_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.6/5 Application example: Distance protection for overhead line with breaker-and-a-half scheme

ANSI
21/21N
Abbr.
Template
1
3-pole
I/O
Distance protection
Z<, V/

(V,I)
21T
Z<
25
Sync
27

V<
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46

direction
I2>, (V2,I2)
47

system
V2>
2.6
2.6/8
Functions
Available
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
51V
t=f(I,V)
59, 59N

V>
67
I>, (V,I)
67N

IN>, (V,I)
67Ns

admittance
Iie dir>
68
Z/t
74TC
TCS
78
Z/t
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
85/21
85/27
WI
85/67N
86
Lockout
87N T
87 STUB
STUB Differential protection (for one-and-half

circuit-breaker applications)
IN
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU

AFD
FL-one
Ix, It, 2P
Template
1
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector

cables 'PSL-PSC'
350
350
100
200
2.6
DIS Basic
DIS, comp./isol. neutral point, with AR
DIS RMD overhead line, solid grounded neutral point, 1.5 CB
DIS Mho overhead line, solid grounded neutral point, 1.5 CB

Description
The SIPROTEC 7SA87 distance protection has specifically been
designed for the protection of lines. Due to its modular structure
and flexibility and the powerful engineering tool DIGSI 5,
SIPROTEC 7SA87 offers future-oriented system solutions with
Main function
Distance protection
Tripping
1-pole and 3-pole, minimum tripping time:

9 ms
Inputs and outputs


Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
Functions
2.6

required.
[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]

6 independent measuring loops (6-system distance protec-

Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White-
tion)


with high accuracy
Arc protection
protection





and TCP))

and chain topology
paper requirements



Applications
Detection and selective 1-pole and 3-pole tripping of short
circuits in electrical equipment of star networks, lines with

infeed at one or two ends, parallel lines and open or closed
ring systems of all voltage levels


settings.

Basic distance protection

Distance protection ractance method (RMD) for overhead line
for grounded systems, with AR
Distance protection ractance method (RMD) for overhead line

for grounded systems, with AR for applications with breakerand-a-half schemes
2.6

2.6
[dw_7SA87_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.6/8 Application example: Distance protection for overhead line with breaker-and-a-half scheme

ANSI
21/21N
Functions
Abbr.
Available

Template
1
3-pole
1-pole
I/O
Distance protection
Z<, V/

(V,I)
21T
Z<
25
Sync
27

V<
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46

direction
I2>, (V2,I2)
47

system
V2>
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
51V
t=f(I,V)
59, 59N

V>
67
I>, (V,I)
67N

IN>, (V,I)
67Ns

admittance
Iie dir>
68
Z/t
74TC
TCS
78
Z/t
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
85/21
85/27
85/67N
WI
86
Lockout
87N T
87 STUB

2.6
IN
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU

AFD
FL-one

2.6
Ix, It, 2P
Template
1
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector

cables 'PSL-PSC'
225
400
DIS Basic
DIS RMD overhead line, solid grounded neutral point, 1.5 CB

Line Differential Protection SIPROTEC 7SD82
Description
The SIPROTEC 7SD82 line differential protection has been
designed particularly for the cost-optimized and compact
protection of lines in medium-voltage and high-voltage systems.
With its flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool,
SIPROTEC 7SD82 offers future-oriented system solutions with
Main function
Differential protection for medium-voltage and

high voltage applications
Tripping
Inputs and outputs

16 binary outputs
Two different quantity structures for binary

inputs and outputs are available in the 1/3 base
module. Adding 1/6 expansion modules is not
possible; housing width available with large or
small display.
Housing width
[SIP5_7xx82_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Figure 2.7/1 Line differential protection device SIPROTEC 7SD82
1/3 19"
Benefits
Compact and low-cost line differential protection


Purposeful and simple operation of the devices and software

Graphical logic editor to create powerful automation func-

Consistent implementation of high safety and security mecha-

Powerful communication components ensure safe and effec-

thanks to user-friendly design
nisms
tive solutions
Functions
required.

Main protection function is differential protection with adap-
tive algorithm for maximum sensitivity and stability even with

the most different transformer errors, current-transformer
saturation and capacitive charging currents

Detection of current-transformer saturation

Arc protection
protection
2.7

tions in the device

and TCP))

and chain topology.




Applications
Line protection for all voltage levels with 3-pole tripping

Phase-selective protection of overhead lines and cables with
single-ended and multi-ended infeed of all lengths with up to

6 line ends

Transformers and compensating coils in the protection zone

Serial protection data communication over different distances

and media, such as optical fiber, two-wire connections, and
communication networks
settings.
Basic differential protection

Differential protection for overhead line.
2.7
[dw_7SD82_Ltg, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.7/2 Application example: Line differential protection for overhead line
2.7/2

ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available

Template
1
3-pole
87L
87L
Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line ends

(dependent on Significant properties)
25
Sync
27

V<
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46

direction
I2>, (V2,I2)
47

system
V2>
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
51V
t=f(I,V)
59, 59N

V>
67
I>, (V,I)
67N

IN>, (V,I)
67Ns

admittance
2.7
Iie dir>
74TC
TCS
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
86
Lockout
87N T
IN
87L/ 87T
Option for line differential protection: including

power transformer
Option for line differential protection:chargingcurrent compensation
90V
90V
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
90V
FL
PMU

AFD
2.7
FL-one

Template
Ix, It, 2P
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector

cables 'PSL-PSC'
150
Table 2.7/1 SIPROTEC 7SD82 - Functions and application templates
2.7/4
DIFF Basic
DIFF overhead line

Description
The SIPROTEC 7SD86 line differential protection has specifically
been designed for the protection of lines. With its modular
structure, flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool,
SIPROTEC 7SD86 offers future-oriented system solutions with
Main function
Tripping
Inputs and outputs


Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
Functions
required.



[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Figure 2.7/3 SIPROTEC 7SD86




Arc protection
Applications


protection




and TCP))

and chain topology
2.7

Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure

6 line ends
Also used in switchgear with breaker-and-a-half configuration



settings.

Differential protection for overhead line

Differential protection for overhead line with transformer in

the protection range
Differential protection for overhead line, for applications with

breaker-and-a-half schemes.
2.7
2.7/6

2.7
[dw_7SD86_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.7/5 Application example: Line differential protection for overhead line with breaker-and-a-half scheme

ANSI
Abbr.
Template
1
3-pole
I/O
87L
87L

25
Sync
27

V<
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46

direction
I2>, (V2,I2)
47

system
V2>
2.7
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
51V
t=f(I,V)
59, 59N

V>
67
I>, (V,I)
67N

IN>, (V,I)
67Ns

admittance
74TC
2.7/8
Functions
Available
Iie dir>
TCS
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
86
Lockout
87N T
IN
87L/ 87T

power transformer
87 STUB

90V
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
90V
90V
FL
PMU

FL-one
AFD
Ix, It, 2P
Template
1
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector

cables 'PSL-PSC'
2.7
150
250
300
DIFF Basic
DIFF overhead line
DIFF overhead line with transformer
DIFF overhead line, 1.5 CB

Description
The SIPROTEC 7SD87 differential protection is suitable for the
selective protection of overhead lines and cables with singleended and multi-ended infeed of all lengths with up to 6 ends.
Transformers and compensating coils in the protection range
are also possible. With its modular structure, flexibility and the
powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7SD87 offers
future-oriented system solutions with high investment security
and low operating costs.
Main function
Tripping
1-pole and 3-pole, minimum tripping time:

9 ms
Inputs and outputs


Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Figure 2.7/6 SIPROTEC 7SD87
Functions
2.7

required.




Arc protection
protection



and chain topology




Applications
Line protection for all voltage levels with 1-pole and 3-pole
tripping

6 line ends
1-/3-pole automatic reclosing function


Transformers and compensating coils in the protection range

ground power systems in star, ring, or meshed arrangement
tions in the device

and TCP))
are possible
Detection of ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coilphysical media, such as optical fiber, two-wire connections,

Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applications. They comprise all basic confi gurations and default
settings.

Differential protection for overhead line
Differential protection for overhead line, for applications with
2.7

2.7
[dw_7SD87_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.7/8 Application example: Line differential protection for overhead line with breaker-and-a-half scheme

ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available

Template
1
3-pole
1-pole
I/O
87L
87L

25
Sync
27

V<
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46

direction
I2>, (V2,I2)
47

system
V2>
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
51V
t=f(I,V)
59, 59N

V>
67
I>, (V,I)
67N

IN>, (V,I)
67Ns

admittance
Iie dir>
74TC
TCS
2.7
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
86
Lockout
87N T
IN
87L/ 87T

power transformer
87 STUB

90V
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
90V
90V
FL
PMU

AFD
FL-one

2.7
Ix, It, 2P
Template
1
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector

cables 'PSL-PSC'
150
325
DIFF Basic
DIFF overhead line
DIFF overhead line, 1.5 CB

Differential and Distance Protection SIPROTEC 7SL82
Description
The combined SIPROTEC 7SL82 line differential and distance
protection has been designed particularly for the cost-optimized
and compact protection of lines in medium-voltage and highvoltage systems. With its flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5
engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7SL82 offers future-oriented system
solutions with high investment security and low operating costs.
Main function
Differential protection and distance protection

for medium-voltage and high voltage applications
Tripping
Inputs and outputs

16 binary outputs

small display.
Housing width
1/3 19"
Benefits
Compact and low-cost line differential and distance protection


[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Figure 2.8/1 SIPROTEC 7SL82
Adaptive power-swing blocking

Arc protection


Consistent implementation of high safety and security mecha-

Powerful communication components ensure safe and effec-

nisms
tive solutions

Functions
required.


Several distance-protection functions as backup protection or

2nd main protection for selection: Classic, reactance method
(RMD), impedance protection for transformers

2.8
tions in the device

and TCP))

and chain topology




with high accuracy

Applications
settings.

6 line ends

Basic differential and distance protection

Differential and distance protection for overhead line in
grounded systems.

2.8
2.8/2

2.8
[dw_7SL82_Ltg, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.8/2 Application example: Combined line differential and distance protection for overhead line

ANSI
2.8
2.8/4
Functions
Abbr.
Available

Template
1
3-pole
21/21N
Distance protection
Z<, V/

(V,I)
21T
Z<
87L
87L

25
Sync
27

V<
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46
I2>
46

direction
I2>, (V2,I2)
47

system
V2>
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
51V
t=f(I,V)
59, 59N

V>
67
I>, (V,I)
67N

IN>, (V,I)
67Ns

admittance
Iie dir>
68
Z/t
74TC
TCS
78
Z/t
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
85/21
85/27
85/67N
86
Lockout
WI
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
87N T
IN
87L/ 87T

power transformer
90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU

AFD
FL-one
Ix, It, 2P
Template
1
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector

cables 'PSL-PSC'
200
2.8
Table 2.8/1 SIPROTEC 7SL82 - Functions and application templates
DIFF/DIS Basic
DIFF/DIS RMD overhead line, solid grounded neutral point

Description
protection has specifically been designed for the protection of
lines. With its modular structure, flexibility and the powerful
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7SL86 offers future-oriented
system solutions with high investment security and low operating costs.
Main function
Differential and distance protection
Tripping
Inputs and outputs


Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
Functions
2.8
[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]

required.





with high accuracy
Arc protection




and TCP))
paper requirements



Applications


6 line ends



settings.

and chain topology
2.8/6

Basic
Differential and distance protection with RMD for overhead
line in grounded systems

line in grounded systems, with AR for applications with
2.8

2.8
[dw_7SL86_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.8/5 Application example: Combined line differential and distance protection for overhead line with breaker-and-a-half scheme
2.8/8

ANSI
21/21N
Functions
Abbr.
Available

Template
1
3-pole
I/O
Distance protection
Z<, V/

(V,I)
21T
Z<
87L
87L

25
Sync
27

V<
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46
I2>
46

direction
I2>, (V2,I2)
47

system
V2>
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
2.8
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
51V
t=f(I,V)
59, 59N

V>
67
I>, (V,I)
67N

IN>, (V,I)
67Ns

admittance
Iie dir>
68
Z/t
74TC
TCS
78
Z/t
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
85/21
85/27
85/67N
WI
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
86
Lockout
87N T
IN
87L/ 87T

power transformer

90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU

AFD
FL-one

87 STUB
2.8
Template
Ix, It, 2P
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector

cables 'PSL-PSC'
200
350
DIFF/DIS Basic
DIFF/DIS RMD overhead line, 1.5 CB

Description
protection has specifically been designed for the protection of
lines. With its modular structure, flexibility and the powerful
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7SL87 offers future-oriented
Main function
Differential and distance protection
Tripping
1-pole and 3-pole, minimum tripping time: 9

ms
Inputs and outputs


Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"

[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Functions
required.




with high accuracy
Arc protection

1-/3-pole automatic reclosing function


and chain topology




Applications
Line protection for all voltage levels with 1-pole and 3-pole
tripping

6 line ends



and TCP))
2.8

settings.

Basic differential and distance protection

line in grounded systems
line in grounded systems for applications with breaker-andahalf schemes.
2.8

2.8
[dw_7SL87_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.8/8 Application example: Combined line differential and distance protection for overhead line with breaker-and-a-half scheme

ANSI
21/21N
Functions
Abbr.
Available

Template
1
3-pole
1-pole
I/O
Distance protection
Z<, V/

(V,I)
21T
Z<
87L
87L

25
Sync
27

V<
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46

direction
I2>, (V2,I2)
47

system
V2>
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
2.8
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
51V
t=f(I,V)
59, 59N

V>
67
I>, (V,I)
67N

IN>, (V,I)
67Ns

admittance
Iie dir>
68
Z/t
74TC
TCS
78
Z/t
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
85/21
85/27
85/67N
86
Lockout
WI
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
87N T
IN
87L/ 87T

power transformer
87 STUB

90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU

AFD
FL-one
Ix, It, 2P
Template
1
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector

cables 'PSL-PSC'
2.8
225
400
DIFF/DIS Basic
DIFF/DIS RMD overhead line, 1.5 CB

2.8

Circuit-Breaker Management SIPROTEC 7VK87
Description
The SIPROTEC 7VK87 circuit-breaker management device has
specifically been designed for circuit-breaker management. With
its modular structure, flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7VK87 offers future-oriented system
Main function
Automatic reclosing, synchrocheck, circuitbreaker failure protection
Tripping
1-pole and 3-pole or 3-pole
Inputs and outputs


Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
Functions
[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]

required.
Figure 2.9/1 Circuit-Breaker management device SIPROTEC 7VK87
Automatic reclosing function and synchrocheck for line
Circuit-breaker failure protection for 1-pole and 3-pole trip-

protection applications with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping

ping

Voltage controller for transformers
Arc protection
Voltage protection


and TCP))

Applications
Automatic reclosing after 1/3-pole tripping

Synchrocheck before reclosing
Backup overcurrent and voltage protection
Serial protection data communication via optical fibers, twowire connections and communication networks (IEEE C37.94,
and chain topology

settings.
paper requirements
2.9

The following application template is available:
Basic circuit-breaker management device
2.9
[dw_7VK87_Ltg, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.9/2 Application example: Circuit-breaker management device
2.9/2

Available

Template
3-pole
1-pole
I/O
25
Sync
27

V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46

direction
I2>, (V2,I2)
47

system
V2>
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50BF
CBFP
59, 59N

V>
67
I>, (V,I)
67N

IN>, (V,I)
74TC
TCS
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
IN
86
Lockout
87N T
90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU

AFD
2.9
FL-one
Ix, It, 2P
CFC arithmetic
Control
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
Template
1
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector

cables 'PSL-PSC'
Table 2.9/1 SIPROTEC 7VK87 - Functions and application templates
Basic (79 AR, 25 Sync., 50BF Breaker fail. prot.)
2.9
2.9/4

Overcurrent Protection as Backup Protection for Line Protection SIPROTEC 7SJ86
Description
The SIPROTEC 7SJ86 overcurrent protection has specifically been
designed as backup or emergency protection for the line protection devices. With its modular structure, flexibility and the
powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7SJ86 offers
Main function
Overcurrent protection (V/inverse time-overcurrent protection)
Tripping
3-pole
Inputs and outputs
3 predefined standard variants with 4/4 current

transformers/voltage transformers, 11 to
Flexibly adjustable and expandable I/O quantity

structure within the scope of the SIPROTEC 5
modular system
Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"

[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Functions

required.
Overcurrent protection as backup / emergency line protection

for all voltage levels with 3-pole tripping


Arc protection

protection

protection




4 optional pluggable communication modules, usable for

and TCP))

and chain topology

2.10
paper requirements



Applications
Backup and emergency protection for line protection


all voltage levels
Utilization in switchgear with breaker-and-a-half configuration

Protection and monitoring of capacitor banks


settings.
Figure 2.10/2 shows an application example for directional

protection for overhead line. The functional scope is based on
the application template directional overcurrent protection. In
addition the functions fault locator and automatic reclosing
were loaded from the DIGSI 5 library.
SIPROTEC 7SJ86 non-directional overcurrent protection

SIPROTEC 7SJ86 directional overcurrent protection
2.10
[dw_7SJ86_Ltg, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.10/2 Application example: directional overcurrent protection for overhead line
2.10/2

ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available

Template
1
3-pole
I/O
25
Sync
27

V<
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46

direction
I2>, (V2,I2)
47

system
V2>
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
51V
t=f(I,V)
59, 59N

V>
67
I>, (V,I)
67N

IN>, (V,I)
67Ns

admittance
2.10
Iie dir>
74TC
TCS
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
85/67N
86
Lockout
87N T
90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU

IN
FL-one
ANSI
AFD
Functions
Abbr.

2.10
Available
Ix, It, 2P
Template
1
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector

cables 'PSL-PSC'
50
2.10/4

Overcurrent Protection as Backup Protection for Line Protection Line Protection
Standard variants
Standard variant for SIPROTEC 7SA82, 7SD82, 7SL82
Type 1
1/3,11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V

11 binary inputs,
4 current transformers
4 voltage transformers
Contains the modules: Base module with PS101 and IO101.
Type 2
1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V

23 binary inputs,
Contains the modules: Base module with PS101, IO101 and IO110.
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86, 7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87
Type 1
1/3, 7BI, 14BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V

Housing width 1/3 19
7 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
2.10

Type 2
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V

11 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
Type 3
1/2, 13 BI, 21 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V

13 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
Expansion module IO206.

Type 4
1/2, 19 BI, 30 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V

19 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
Type 5
1/2, 21 BI, 17 BO (4 P), 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V

21 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
Type 6
1/2, 15 BI, 18 BO (4 HS), 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V

15 binary inputs,
18 binary outputs (1 life contact, 5 standard, 8 fast, 4 high-speed),
16 LEDs
2.10
Type 7
1/2, 15 BI, 20 BO, 16 LED, 8 I, 8 V

15 binary inputs,
20 binary outputs (1 life contact, 5 standard, 14 fast)
16 LEDs
Type 8
2/3, 31 BI, 46 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V

Housing width 2/3 19,
31 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
Expansion modules IO205, IO205.
2.10/6

Type 9
2/3, 29 BI, 23 BO (4 P), 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V

31 binary inputs,
25 binary outputs (1 life contact, 10 standard, 6 fast, 8 power)
16 LEDs
Type 10
2/3, 27 BI, 34 BO (4 HS), 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V

27 binary inputs,
34 binary outputs (1 life contact, 21 standard, 8 fast, 4 high-speed)
16 LEDs
Type 11
2/3, 27 BI, 36 BO, 16 LED, 8 I, 8 V

27 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
2.10
Contains the modules: Base module with PS201 and IO208, expansion
modules IO202, IO205.
Type 12
5/6, 27 BI, 33 BO (8 HS), 16 LED, 8 I, 8 V

27 binary inputs,
33 binary outputs (1 life contact, 8 standard, 16 fast, 8 high-speed)
16 LEDs
modules IO208, IO209, IO209.

Type 1
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V

11 binary inputs,
16 LEDs

Type 2
1/2, 17 BI, 16 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V

17 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
Expansion modules IO206.
Type 3
1/2, 23 BI, 25 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V

23 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
Expansion modules IO205.
Table 2.10/2 Standard variants for line protection devices

2.10
2.10/8

Transformer Differential Protection SIPROTEC 7UT82, 7UT85, 7UT86, 7UT87
[dw_7UT_anwendung, 2, en_US]
2.11
SIPROTEC 7UT82, 7UT85, 7UT86, 7UT87
SIPROTEC 5 transformer differential protection devices are multifunctional devices whose main protection functions are based
on the differential protection principle. They protect different
types of transformers, such as two-winding, three-winding and
multi-winding transformers with different numbers of measuring points and, besides standard power transformers, also
auto transformers.
The devices can be used in all voltage levels. The large number
of protection and automatic functions permits use in all fields of
electric power supply. The devices contain all important auxiliary
functions that today are necessary for safe network operation.
This includes control, measurement and monitoring functions.
The large number of communication interfaces and communication protocols satisfies the requirements of communicationbased selective protection and of automated operation.
functions. Their modular structure permits SIPROTEC 5 transformer differential protection devices always to be adapted flexibly to the requirements.

7
UT
82
Two-winding transformer (2 sides and

maximum 2 measuring points)
UT
85
Two-winding transformer (2 sides and

maximum 5 measuring points; expandable to
3 sides)
UT
86
Three-winding transformer (3 sides and

maximum 6 measuring points; expandable to
4 sides)
UT
87
Multi-winding transformer (5 sides and

maximum 9 measuring points)
For your order, you can select the devices from various standard
variants. Additional expansion modules permit the device to be
adapted to your specific application (see "Overview of the
Standard Variants").
2.11/1

Transformer Differential Protection SIPROTEC 7UT82
Description
The SIPROTEC 7UT82 transformer differential protection has
been designed specifically for the protection of two-winding
transformers. It is the main protection for the transformer and
contains many other protection and monitoring functions. The
additional protection functions can also be used as backup
protection for protected downstream objects (such as cables,
line). In this process, you are also supported by the modular
expandability of the hardware. With its modular structure, flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC
7UT82 offers future-oriented system solutions with high investment security and low operating costs.
Main function
1 differential protection function (standard or

auto transformer) with additional stabilization;
up to 2 ground fault differential protection
functions
Usable measuring
points
2 x 3-phase current measuring points, 2 x 1phase current measuring points
Inputs and outputs
1 predefined standard variant with 8 current

transformers, 7 binary inputs, 7 binary outputs
The 1/3 base module is available with the

IO103 module, it is not possible to add
1/6 expansion modules, available with large
and small display
[SIP5_7xx82_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Figure 2.11/2 SIPROTEC5 7UT82 transformer differential protection

(1/3 device = standard variant W1)
Increased sensitivity with near-neutral-point ground faults

through a separate ground fault differential protection
Benefits
Flexible adaptation to the transformer vector group

Controlling closing and overexcitation processes
Safe behavior in current-transformer saturation with different
Compact and low-cost transformer differential protection
Adaptive adaptation of the operate curve to the transformer
Housing width
1/3 19"
tap position




Highly available Ethernet communication due to integrated
Ethernet redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
Functions
required.
Transformer differential protection for two-winding transformers with versatile, additional protection functions
Transformer differential protection for phase-angle regulating

transformers of the single core type
Universal usability of the permissible measuring points

Applicable from average up to extra-high voltage
Protection of standard power transformers, auto transformers
and motors
degrees of saturation
Arc protection
2.11
tions in the device


and TCP))

and chain topology



Applications
Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for standard applications. They contain basic configurations and default settings.
These can be used directly or as a template for application-

related adaptation. The available measuring points make varied
applications possible. Prior to ordering a device, please
configure the application with DIGSI 5. Table "Functions and
application templates" shows the scope of functions of the
device. Use the configurator to determine the necessary function points.
The Figure 2.11/3 shows the typical structure of an application

template, the measuring points used, the function groups used,
their internal interconnection, and the predefined functions.
The example shows the two-winding transformer with ground
fault differential protection.
Two-winding transformer basis
Overload protection, backup protection for the downstream
electrical power system
2.11
[dw_two-winding-temp_01, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.11/3 Application example: Protection of a Two-Winding Transformer
2.11/3

2.11
Figure 2.11/4 Application example: Protection of a two-winding transformer with ground fault differential protection
Two-winding transformer with restricted ground-fault protection (REF)
Ground fault differential protection on the star side
Circuit-breaker failure protection.

ANSI
2.11
Functions
Abbr.
Available

Template
1
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46
I2>
46
I2 t>
49
, It
49H
h, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
74TC
TCS
86
Lockout
87T
87T
Transformer differential protection for phase

angle regulating transformer (single core)
87T Node
I Node
87N T
IN
87M
87G
AFD

Ix, It, 2P
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
30
Table 2.11/1 SIPROTEC 7UT82 - Functions and application templates
2.11/5
Two winding transformer basic (87T)
Two winding transformer (87T, 50BF, 87N)
Motor DIFF (87M)

Description
been designed specifically for the protection of two-winding
transformers (2 sides). It is the main protection for the transformer and contains many other protection and monitoring
functions. The additional protection functions can also be used
as backup protection for protected downstream objects (such as
cables, line). In this process, you are also supported by the
modular expandability of the hardware. With its modular structure, flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool,
SIPROTEC 7UT85 offers future-oriented system solutions with
Main function
1 differential protection function (standard or

auto transformer) with additional stabilization;
up to 2 ground fault differential protection
functions
Usable measuring
points
5 x 3-phase current measuring points, 3 x 1phase current measuring points, 3 x 3-phase

voltage measuring points; expandable to
3 sides
Inputs and outputs

transformers 7 to 19 binary inputs, 7 to
23 binary outputs

modular system
Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Figure 2.11/5 SIPROTEC 7UT85 transformer differential protection

(1/3 device = standard variant O1)
Typical properties of a transformer differential protection such

as flexible adaptation to the transformer vector group, control
of inrush and overexcitation processes, safe behavior in the
case of current-transformer saturation with different degrees
of saturation

tap position
Benefits



Arc protection
Voltage controller function ANSI 90V for two-winding trans-
formers, three-winding transformers and grid coupling transformers

Ethernet redundancy protocols PRP and HSR.
Functions
required.
Up to 4 pluggable communication modules, usable for
different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 608705-103, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 (serial and TCP), Modbus TCP)

Transformer differential protection for two-winding trans-
Secure serial protection data communication, also over great
Capturing operational measured variables and protection
formers with versatile, additional protection functions;

expandable to 3 windings
transformers of the single core type and special transformers

and motors
2.11
Additional current and voltage inputs can be supplements for

standard protection functions, such as overcurrent, voltage
frequency, etc.
distances and all available physical media (fiber-optic cable, 2wire connections and communication networks)
function measured values to evaluate the plant state, to
support commissioning, and to analyze faults




Applications
Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applications. They contain basic configurations and default settings.
These can be used directly or as a template for applicationrelated adaptation. The available measuring points make varied
configure the application with DIGSI. Table "Functions and application templates" shows the functional scope of the device. Use
the configurator to determine the necessary function points.
Two-winding transformer basis (Figure 2.11/6)


Two-winding transformer in breaker-and-a-half application
(Figure 2.11/8)
Circuit-breaker failure protection.

The Figure 2.11/6 shows the typical structure of an application
template, the measuring points used, the function groups used,
their internal interconnection, and the predefined functions.
The example shows the two-winding transformer with ground
fault differential protection.
Two-winding transformer with restricted ground-fault differential protection (REF) (Figure 2.11/7)
2.11
Figure 2.11/6 Application example: Protection of a Two-Winding Transformer
2.11/7

2.11
Figure 2.11/7 Application example: Protection of a two-winding transformer with ground fault differential protection

2.11
Figure 2.11/8 Application example: Protection of a two-winding transformer in breaker-and-a-half layout
2.11/9

ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
I/O
Distance protection
Z<, V/

(V,I)
21T
Z<
87L
21/21N
24
V/f
25
Sync
27

V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
32R
- P<
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46
I2>
46
I2 t>
47

system
V2>
47
Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence- /

positive-sequence system
V2/V1>
49
, It
49H
h, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
51V
t=f(I,V)
59, 59N

V>
59
Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "pos.seq. V1" V>

or "universal Vx"
67
I>, (V,I)
67N

IN>, (V,I)
67N
IN>, (V,I)
67Ns

admittance
Template
1
2.11
Iie dir>
68
Z/t
74TC
TCS
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
85/21
85/27
WI
ANSI
2.11
Functions
Abbr.
Available
Template
1
85/67N
86
Lockout
87T
87T

87T
Transformer differential protection for special

transformers
87T Node
I Node
87N T
IN
87M
87G
87 STUB

90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU

AFD
FL-one

Ix, It, 2P
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
30
30
175
50
2.11/11
Two winding transformer 1,5CB (87T, 50BF, 87N)

Two winding transformer (87T, 50BF, 87N, 90V)
Motor DIFF (87M, 50BF, 27, 81, 46, 49)
2.11

Description
been designed specifically for the protection of three-winding
transformers (3 sides). It is the main protection for the transformer and contains many other protection and monitoring
cables, line). In this process, you are also supported by the
modular expandability of the hardware. The device supports all
SIPROTEC 5 system properties. It enables future-oriented system
With its modular structure, flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5
engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7UT86 offers future-oriented system
Main function
2.11
1 differential protection function (standard)

with additional stabilization; up to 3 ground
fault differential protection functions

(1/2 device = standard variant P1)
Usable measuring
points

voltage measuring points; expandable to
4 sides

Inputs and outputs

transformers 4 voltage transformers, 11 to

modular system
Housing width
1/2 19" - 2/1 19"
Benefits



and motors

of saturation

tap position

frequency, etc.
Arc protection

Functions


required.
Transformer differential protection for three-winding transformers with versatile, additional protection functions;
expandable to four-winding transformers

transformers of the single core type and special transformers

2.11/13
[SIP5_GD_LEDSS_W3_, 1, --_--]
For auto transformer applications, two differential protection functions can be processed in
an Auto transformer function group.

IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 (serial and TCP),
Modbus TCP)
paper requirements




Applications
Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for standard applications. They contain basic configurations and default settings.
These can be used directly or as a template for applicationrelated adaptation. The available measuring points make varied
configure the application with DIGSI 5. Table "Functions and
application templates" shows the functional scope of the device.
Use the configurator to determine the necessary function
points.
The application templates of the SIPROTEC 7UT85 are also available for the SIPROTEC 7UT86.
In addition, the following templates are available:
Three-winding transformer in breaker-and-a-half layout
Ground current protection on the neutral side as backup
protection for the electrical power system
Overload protection
Frequency and voltage protection on the neutral side
Figure 2.11/10 shows the template for the protection of a
three-winding transformer in a breaker-and-a-half layout. You
can recognize the 3 required function groups for the transformer side, the integration of the ground fault differential
protection as well as the internal interconnection and selected
functions. In addition, a voltage transformer is available on the
upper-voltage side. Here, for example, voltage and frequency
limits can be monitored. The required protection settings are
made as required by the system.
Three-winding transformer basis
Auto transformer with stabilizing winding
Differential protection for the complete transformer (auto

transformer winding + stabilizing winding)
Ground fault differential protection (neutral point + maximum
2.11
side current)

2.11
[dw_Kat-three-wind, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.11/10 Application example: Protection of a three-winding transformer in breaker-and-a-half layout
2.11/15

ANSI
21/21N
Functions
Abbr.
Available
I/O
Distance protection
Z<, V/

(V,I)
21T
Z<
87L
24
V/f
25
Sync
27

V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
32R
- P<
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46
I2>
46
I2 t>
47

system
V2>
47

V2/V1>
49
, It
49H
h, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
51V
t=f(I,V)
59, 59N

V>
59

or "universal Vx"
67
I>, (V,I)
67N

IN>, (V,I)
67N
IN>, (V,I)
67Ns

admittance
Template
1
10
2.11
Iie dir>
68
Z/t
74TC
TCS
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
85/21
85/27
WI
ANSI
2.11
Functions
Abbr.
Available
Template
1
85/67N
86
Lockout
87T
87T

87T

transformers
87T Node
I Node
87N T
IN
87M
87G
87 STUB

90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU

AFD
FL-one

10
Ix, It, 2P
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
50
150
30
30
30
30
175
50
2.11/17
Three winding transformer basic (87T)
Three winding transformer 1,5CB (87T, 50BF, 87N)
Three winding transformer (87T, 50BF, 87N, 21)
Autotransformer (87T, 87N, 50BF)

Autotransformer 1,5CB (two 87T, 50BF, 59, 27, 81)
10
Motor DIFF (87M, 50BF, 27, 81, 46, 49)
2.11

Description
been designed specifically for the protection of multi-winding
transformers (up to 5 sides). Furthermore, it is to be used where
numerous measuring points (up to 7 3-pole current measuring
points) are required. Another application is simultaneous protection of two parallel transformers (additional fast backup protection). The SIPROTEC 7UT87 is the main protection for the transformer and contains many other protection and monitoring
cables, line). With its modular structure, flexibility and the
powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7UT87 offers
Main function

(2/3 device = standard variant Q1)
For auto transformer applications, two differential protection functions can be processed in
an Auto transformer function group.
Arc protection
Usable measuring
points

voltage measuring points
Inputs and outputs


modular system.
Housing width
2/3 19" - 2/1 19"
2.11
Functions
required. In SIPROTEC 7UT87, two transformer function groups
can be used.
Transformer differential protection for multi-winding trans-
formers with versatile, additional protection functions (multiwinding transformers are typical in power converter applications (such as HVDC))

transformers of the single core and two core types, and
special transformers
Transformer protection applications with up to seven 3-phase

current measuring points
Simultaneous differential protection for two parallel transformers (such as two 2-winding transformers)

and motors

of saturation
2.11/19
[SIP5_GD_SS_LED_W3, 1, --_--]
Up to 3 differential protection functions with

additional stabilization (in different transformer function groups); up to 5 ground fault
differential protection functions.

tap position

frequency, etc.

Modbus TCP)

Capturing operation measured variables and protection function measured values to evaluate the plant state, to support
commissioning, and to analyze faults




All application templates that were described for the
SIPROTEC 7UT85 and SIPROTEC 7UT86 devices can be used in
SIPROTEC 7UT87.
In addition, the following template is available:

Frequency and voltage protection on the upper-voltage side.
Auto transformer with stabilizing winding in breaker-and-a-half

layout
Differential protection for the complete transformer (auto

transformer winding + stabilizing winding)
Intersection protection for the auto winding for recording
ground faults (3-phase recording of the neutral-point current)
2.11

2.11
[dw_autotrans, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.11/12 Application example: Protection of an auto transformer with stabilizing winding in breaker-and-a-half application system
Figure 2.11/12 shows the template for the protection of an auto

transformer that is connected to a breaker-and-a-half arrangement. The special feature of this application is that per phase
the neutral point side current is directly recorded. A separate
node point differential protection via the auto winding reliably
records ground faults and turn-to-turn faults. The classic differential protection is assigned over the entire transformer (auto
and stabilizing winding). Both functions run in the Auto transformer function group. This type of execution gives you a redun2.11/21
dant differential protection with supplementing sensitivity. A

separate ground fault differential protection is not required. In
addition, a voltage transformer is available on the upper-voltage
side. Here, for example, voltage and frequency limits can be
monitored. The required protection settings are made as
required by the system.
Since the SIPROTEC 7UT87 is intended to be used for special
applications, you must create your own application template as

a function of the application. Save this template with the device.
To make your work easier, you can use an available template
and modify it as required. The following examples may help
you:
Example 1:
This example requires a large number of three-phase current
measuring points for a complex application in the power plant
field. Figure 2.11/13 shows a possible configuration.
2.11
[dw_7-messstellen, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.11/13 Possible application of SIPROTEC 7UT87 in a power plant (up to seven 3-phase current measuring points)

Example 2:
Another example is a powerful functional redundancy with
parallel transformers. The differential protection function is
doubled. One protection device is used for each transformer.
Two differential protection functions run in each protection
device. The second differential protection function is the backup

protection for the parallel transformer. For example, start here
with an application template of the two-winding transformer,
and duplicate it. An alternative cost-optimized variant is the use
of one device to protect both transformers.
2.11
[dw_two-transformer, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.11/14 Protection of two parallel transformers with one SIPROTEC 7UT87
2.11/23

Example 3:
The last example shows the protection of a converter transformer. Four sides and six measuring points are required here.
2.11
[dw_umrichter-transf, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.11/15 Protection of a converter transformer

ANSI
Abbr.
I/O
21/21N
Distance protection
Z<, V/

(V,I)
21T
Z<
87L
24
V/f
25
Sync
27

V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
32R
- P<
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46
I2>
46
I2 t>
47

system
V2>
47

V2/V1>
49
, It
49H
h, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
2.11
2.11/25
Functions
Available
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
51V
t=f(I,V)
59, 59N

V>
59

or "universal Vx"
67
I>, (V,I)
67N

IN>, (V,I)
67N
IN>, (V,I)
67Ns

admittance
Template
1
10
Iie dir>
68
Z/t
74TC
TCS
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
85/21
85/27
WI
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
Template
1
85/67N
86
Lockout
87T
87T

87T

angle regulating transformer (two core)
87T

transformers
87T Node
I Node
87N T
IN
87M
87G
87 STUB

90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU

AFD
FL-one
Ix, It, 2P
2.11
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
10
30
30
175
50
150
30
30
50

Three winding transformer basic (87T)
Three winding transformer 1,5CB (87T, 50BF, 87N)
Three winding transformer (87T, 50BF, 87N, 21)
Autotransformer (87T, 87N, 50BF)
Autotransformer 1,5CB (two 87T, 50BF, 59, 27, 81)
10
Motor DIFF (87M, 50BF, 27, 81, 46, 49)
2.11
2.11/27

Transformer Differential Protection Standard variants
Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7UT82
W1
1/3, 7 BI, 7 BO, 8 I

Housing width 1/3 x 19,
7 binary inputs,

O1
1/3, 7 BI, 7 BO, 8 I

7 binary inputs,
O2
1/2, 19 BI, 23 BO, 8 I

Housing width 1/2 19",
19 binary inputs,

P1
1/2, 11 BI, 18 BO, 12 I, 4 U

Housing width 1/2 19",
2.11
11 binary inputs,
module IO208.
P2
2/3, 23 BI, 34 BO, 12 I, 4 U

23 binary inputs,

Q1
2/3, 15 BI, 22 BO, 20 I, 4 U

15 binary inputs,
Expansion modules IO208 and IO203.

Transformer Differential Protection Standard variants
Q2
5/6, 27 BI, 38 BO, 20 I, 4 U

27 binary inputs,
Expansion modules IO208, IO203 and IO205.
Table 2.11/5 Standard variants for transformer differential protection devices

2.11
2.11/29
Motor Protection

Motor Protection SIPROTEC 7SK82, 7SK85
[dw_7SK_anwendung, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7SK82, 7SK85

2.12
SIPROTEC 5 motor protection devices have been designed

specifically for the protection of asynchronous motors of small
and medium power.
The devices contain all important auxiliary functions that today
are necessary for safe network operation. This includes functions for protection, control, measurement and monitoring. The
large number of communication interfaces and communication
protocols satisfies the requirements of communication-based
selective protection, as well as automated operation.
Features
The difference between the two device models SIPROTEC 7SK82
and SIPROTEC 7SK85 is in the configurability of their hardware
quantity structure.
2.12/1
7SK82
Different hardware quantity structures for binary inputs and

outputs are available in the 1/3 base module
7SK85

expansion modules

Motor Protection SIPROTEC 7SK82
Description
The SIPROTEC 7SK82 motor protection has been designed
particularly for a cost-optimized and compact utilization of small
to medium-sized motors. With its flexibility and the powerful
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7SK82 offers future-oriented
Main function
Motor protection for small to medium-sized

motors (100 kW to 2 MW)
Inputs and outputs

(optional), 11 or 23 binary inputs, 9 or 16
binary outputs.

small display.
Housing width
1/3 19"
[SIP5_7xx82_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Figure 2.12/2 SIPROTEC 7SK82 motor protection
Benefits
Compact and low-cost motor protection







different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850, IEC
60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 (serial and TCP),
Modbus TCP)

Functions
required.
Motor protection functions: Startup time monitoring, thermal
overload protection for stator and rotor, restart inhibit, unbalanced-load protection, load-jam protection
Stator and bearing temperature monitoring via temperature

sensors with external RTD unit.
Sensitive ground-fault protection (non-directional, directional)

to detect stator ground faults



Directional and non-directional overcurrent protection (short-
Detection of ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
Applications
circuit protection) with additional functions

ground power systems
Protection against thermal overload of the stator from overcurrent, cooling problems or pollution
Arc protection
protection
2.12
Protection against thermal overload of the rotor during

startup due to frequent startups, excessively long startups or
blocked rotor
Monitoring for voltage unbalance or phase outage

Monitoring the thermal state and the bearing temperatures

with temperature measurement
Detection of idling drives of pumps and compressors, for

example
Detection of ground faults in the motor

Protection against motor short circuits
Protection against instability due to undervoltage.
settings.
Current measurement
Transformer inrush-current detection

Sensitive directional ground-fault detection for systems with
isolated or resonant neutral and for detecting stator ground
faults
Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence system V0

Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence system V1
Fuse-failure monitor
Application Example
Figure 2.12/3 shows the functional scope and the basic configuration of a SIPROTEC 7SK82 for this application. It is based on
the application template "Current and voltage measurement". In
addition, the device must be equipped with a plug-in module for
communication with the RTD unit.
Current and voltage measurement
2.12/3
ground
Thermal overload protection for stator and rotor

Starting-time supervision
Restart inhibit
Temperature supervision
Load-jam protection
ground
2.12

Load-jam protection

Restart inhibit
SIPROTEC 7SK82 protection of a motor of medium power

The motor protection functions and the overcurrent protection
of the SIPROTEC 7SK82 protect an asynchronous motor of
medium power (up to approximately 2 MW) against thermal and
mechanical overload and short circuits. The directional sensitive
ground-fault detection and the overvoltage protection with
zero-sequence voltage V0 detect stator ground faults in the
motor. An external RTD unit captures and monitors the thermal
state of the motor and the bearing temperatures. The RTD unit
connects to the device via Ethernet or serial communication.

2.12
[Motorschutz-7SK82, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.12/3 Application example: Protection of a motor of medium power

ANSI
Abbr.
Template
1
3-pole
14
I> + n<
24
V/f
25
Sync
27

V<
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
32R
- P<
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46
I2>
46
I2 t>
46

direction
I2>, (V2,I2)
47

system
V2>
47
Overvoltage protection: "neg.-seq. V2" or "neg.seq. V2 / pos.-seq.V1"
V2>; V2/V1>
48
Istart
49
, It
49R
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
2.12
2.12/5
Functions
Available
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
50L
Load-jam protection
I>L
51V
t=f(I,V)
59, 59N

V>
66
It
67
I>, (V,I)
67N
IN>, (V,I)
67Ns

admittance
Iie dir>
74TC
TCS
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
86
Lockout
87N T
90V
IN
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
FL-one
Available
FL
PMU

AFD
Template
1
Ix, It, 2P
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
40
Table 2.12/1 SIPROTEC 7SK82 - Functions and application templates
Current measurement

2.12

Description
The SIPROTEC 7SK85 motor protection is designed for the
protection of motors of all sizes. With its modular structure, flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC
7SK85 offers future-oriented system solutions with high investment security and low operating costs.
Main function
Motor protection for motors of all sizes
Inputs and outputs


Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
Benefits
[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.12/4 SIPROTEC 7SK85 motor protection device (1/3 device

with large graphical display and 1/6 expansion module
with key switch front panel)

2.12

Functions
required.
Motor protection functions: Startup time monitoring, thermal
overload protection for stator and rotor, restart inhibit, unbalanced-load protection, load-jam protection
Stator and bearing temperature monitoring via temperature

sensors with external RTD unit.
Differential motor protection as fast short-circuit protection

for motors of high power
Sensitive ground-fault protection (non-directional, directional)

to detect stator ground faults
Directional and non-directional overcurrent protection (shortcircuit protection) with additional functions
Detection of ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coilground power systems

Arc protection




Modbus TCP)


Synchrophasor measured values with IEEE C37.118 protocol

integrated (PMU)


protection
2.12/7

Applications
Protection against thermal overload of the stator from overcurrent, cooling problems or pollution
Protection against thermal overload of the rotor during
startup due to: Frequent startups, excessively long startups or

blocked rotor
Monitoring for voltage unbalance or phase outage

Monitoring the thermal state and the bearing temperatures
with temperature measurement
isolated or resonant neutral and for detecting stator ground

faults
Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence system V0

Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence system V1
Fuse-failure monitor.
Motor differential protection, current and voltage measurement
Detection of idling drives of pumps and compressors, for

example
Detection of ground faults in the motor
Protection against motor short circuits
Protection against instability due to undervoltage.
settings.

Thermal overload protection for stators and rotors
Restart inhibit
Load-jam protection
ground
Current measurement

Restart inhibit
Load-jam protection
ground
Transformer inrush-current detection.

Thermal overload protection for stators and rotors

Restart inhibit
Load-jam protection
ground


isolated or resonant neutral and for detecting of stator ground

faults
Overvoltage protection with phase-sequence system V0

Undervoltage protection with positive sequence system V1
2.12
Application example
SIPROTEC 7SK85 protecting a medium power motor
An asynchronous medium-power motor (up to approx. 2 MW) is
protected against thermal and mechanical overloads as well as
short circuits with the motor protection functions and timeovercurrent protection of the 7SK85. The directional sensitive
ground-fault detection and overvoltage protection with zerosequence voltage V0 detect stator ground faults in the motor. The
thermal state of the motor and bearing temperatures are
acquired and monitored via an external RTD-box. The RTD-box is
connected to the device via Ethernet or serial communication.
Figure 2.12/5 shows the function scope and the basic configuration of a SIPROTEC 7SK85 for this application. The application
template "current and voltage measurement" is used as a basis.
Additionally, the device has to be equipped with a plug-in
module for communication with the RTD-box.

2.12
[Motorschutz-7SK85, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.12/5 Application example: Protection of a medium-power motor
2.12/9

ANSI
14
Functions
Abbr.
Available

Template
1
3-pole
I/O
I> + n<
24
V/f
25
Sync
27

V<
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
32R
- P<
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
46
I2>
46
I2 t>
46

direction
I2>, (V2,I2)
47

system
V2>
47
Overvoltage protection: "neg.-seq. V2" or "neg.seq. V2 / pos.-seq.V1"
V2>; V2/V1>
48
Istart
49
, It
49R
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
50L
Load-jam protection
I>L
51V
t=f(I,V)
59, 59N

V>
66
It
67
I>, (V,I)
67N
IN>, (V,I)
67Ns

admittance
2.12
Iie dir>
74TC
TCS
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
86
Lockout
87N T
IN
87M
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU

AFD
FL-one

Ix, It, 2P
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
40
100
Table 2.12/2 SIPROTEC 7SK85 - Functions and application templates
2.12/11
2.12
Template
Current measurement
Differential prot. + cur. & volt. meas.

Motor Protection Standard variants
Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SK82
T1
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I

11 binary inputs,
Contains the base module with PS101 and IO101 modules.
T2
1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I

23 binary inputs,
Contains the base module with PS101, IO101 and IO110 modules.
T3
In preparation
T4
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V

11 binary inputs,
T5
1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V

23 binary inputs,
2.12
Contains the base module with PS101, IO102 and IO110 modules.
Table 2.12/3 Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SK82 motor protection devices

Motor Protection Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SK85

R1
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V

11 binary inputs,
R2
1/2, 17 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V

17 binary inputs,
Contains the base module with PS201 and IO202 modules, expansion
modules IO206.
R3
1/2, 27 BI, 17 BO, 4 I, 4 V

27 binary inputs,
Contains the base module with PS201 and IO202 modules, expansion
modules IO207.
Table 2.12/4 Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SK85 motor protection devices
2.12
2.12/13


Generator Protection SIPROTEC 7UM85
[dw_7UM8_anwendung, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7UM85
2.13
The main protection functions of SIPROTEC 5 generator protection devices 7UM85 are based on typical generator protection
functions (stator and rotor ground-fault protection, reversepower protection, unbalanced-load protection, differential
protection, underexcitation protection, and many others). They
protect generators and power plant blocks in bus and unit
connection. The protection functions are implemented such that
they satisfy the requirements of different power plant versions.
These can be conventional run-of-river power or pumpedstorage hydropower plants with phase-rotation reversal in pump
operation. Besides standard unit-type power plants (different
raw material sources), comprehensive protection is also possible
for nuclear power plants and for power plants that are started
with a starting converter (gas turbine power plants, for
example). The scalability of the devices with respect to hardware design and functionality opens a wide field of applications.
Selecting hardware and functionality as required, you can thus
cover the entire power spectrum of the machines (starting at
approximately 1 MVA) at low costs. The devices are perfectly
suited for industrial applications, too. The large number of
protection and automatic functions permits the device to be
used in all fields of electrical energy generation.
The devices contain all important auxiliary functions that today
are necessary for safe plant operation. This includes control,
measurement and monitoring functions. The large number of
communication interfaces and communication protocols satisfies the requirements of communication-based selective protection and of automated operation.
2.13/1

Features
Scaling hardware and functionality as required is a special
feature of the SIPROTEC 7UM85 device models. Using the
configurator, you can create the hardware configuration
(number of V, I measuring points, binary inputs and outputs,
communication interfaces, etc.) as required by the application.
Using the DIGSI 5 engineering tool, you can download the
required functions from the library into the 7UM85 device. The
usable functional scope is limited by the ordered function
points. You may order additional points without any problems.
For your order, you can select the devices from various standard
variants. Additional expansion modules permit the device to be
adapted to your specific application (see "Overview of the
standard variants").
7UM85

expansion modules

Description
The SIPROTEC 7UM85 generator protection device has been
designed specifically for the protection of generators and power
plant units. It contains all necessary main protection functions
and a large number of other protection and monitoring functions. With its modular structure, flexibility and the powerful
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7UM85 offers futureoriented system solutions with high investment security and low
operating costs.
Main function
Typical generator protection functions
Inputs and outputs
3 predefined standard variants with up to

8 current transformers and 8 voltage transformers, 7 to 15 binary inputs, 9 to 20 binary
outputs
2 additional standard variants with 4 additional
measuring transducers are in preparation
Housing width

[SIP5_GD_SS_LED_W3, 1, --_--]
Figure 2.13/2 SIPROTEC 7UM85 generator protection (width: 1/3 x 19

to 2 x 19)
Universal overvoltage and undervoltage protection with

different measuring methods
Overfrequency and underfrequency protection and frequency-
1/3 19" to 2 19"
change protection
Benefits
Safe and reliable protection of your plants


Protection functions for network decoupling (voltage and
frequency protection, directional reactive-power undervoltage

protection (QU protection))
Switching protection to detect incorrect activation of the

circuit breaker

Functions

required.
Short-circuit protection (overcurrent protection, impedance

protection, differential protection)
Optional pluggable communication modules, usable for

and TCP))
Stator ground-fault protection (90% non-directional or direc-
Rotor ground-fault protection with different measuring

tional, 100% with 3rd harmonic, real 100% protection with

20-Hz voltage injection)
methods (ground-current or ground-resistance monitoring)
High-precision reverse-power protection and universal power

protection
Underexcitation and overexcitation protection

Unbalanced-Load Protection
Overload protection and temperature monitoring via external
RTD unit (with PT 100, for example)
Out-of-Step Protection
Shaft-current protection (in particular with hydropower applications)
2.13
paper requirements





Applications
Protection of generators in busbar connection of different

power, with directional stator ground-fault protection.
Generator busbar connection basis
Basic protection functions

Underexcitation Protection
Generator unit connection basis
Protection of generators in unit connection of different power

(using the 100% stator ground fault (20 Hz)) with larger
generators

Transformer differential protection as overall protection
Protection of power plant units with one device per protection
100% stator ground-fault protection with 3rd Harmonic
group. In the generator transformer version, the 7UM85

implements both generator and transformer protection.
In more complex power plant units (unit connection with
generator circuit breaker and several auxiliary transformers),

additional SIPROTEC 5 devices are used, such as 7UT8x, 7SJ82
or 7SJ85 and 7SA, SD, SL86, at the upper-voltage side of the
generator transformer.
Using motor and generator protection functions (underexcitation protection, for example) to protect synchronous motors
Application Templates
Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applications. They comprise basic configurations and default settings.
Generator basis
Basic protection functions (overcurrent protection, stator
(transformer + generator)
Generator unit connection advanced

Out-of-Step Protection
100% stator ground-fault protection with 20-Hz coupling
Synchronization function (without adjusting commands)
ground-fault protection, reverse-power protection, overexcitation protection, voltage protection, frequency protection and
unbalanced-load protection),
Rotor ground-fault protection (ground current measurement)

2.13
2.13/3

2.13
[dw_appl-02_legend, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.13/3 Application example: Protection of a generator in a busbar connection (application template: Generator busbar connection basis)
SIPROTEC 7UM85 - protection of generators in busbar connection
This description gives an overview of an application of generators in busbar connection. It is based on the application
template "Generator busbar connection basis. Figure 2.13/3
shows the single line diagram, the connection to the 7UM85,
and the logical structure in the device. The ground current for
the stator ground-fault protection is generated via a neutralpoint transformer. Sensitive ground-fault detection must be
implemented via a difference connection of the ground-current
transformer (same transformation ratio). The rotor ground-fault

protection is implemented as coupling at power system
frequency, and is based on the rotor ground-current measurement. A 7XR61 + 3PP1336 must be provided as accessory. A
base module and an expansion module (such as standard
variant AA2 + IO201) are required as minimum device hardware.
Figure 2.13/3 shows also the internal functional structure of the
device. The measuring points are connected with the function
groups. The function groups are also interconnected. Functions
are allocated to function groups, and interconnected automatically. The FG Generator stator is the main function group. Differential protection requires additional function groups. The rotor

ground-fault protection runs in the V/I, 1-phase FG. The Circuitbreaker function group controls the entire interaction with the
circuit breaker. Additional functions, such as activating quick
stop and actuating de-excitation, are activated via a direct
routing of the tripping signal to the relay contacts. Alternatively,
you may use additional Circuit breaker FGs. All linkages are
preset in the application template. You need 100 function
points for the template. If you want to use additional functions,
you may have to increase the number of function points.
2.13
Figure 2.13/4 Application example: Protecting a generator in unit connection (application template: Generator unit connection basis)
SIPROTEC 7UM85 - protecting a generator in unit connection

The example shows a typical implementation of a plant for small
to medium-sized generators (1 - 50 MVA, for example) in unit
2.13/5
connection. The generator feeds power via the GSU transformer

into the power system. The application is based on the application template "Generator unit connection basis". Figure 2.13/4

shows the single line diagram, the connection to the 7UM85,
and the logic structure in the device. The protection range of the
90% stator ground-fault protection is guaranteed by the neutralpoint transformer with load resistor. The rotor ground-fault
protection is implemented as coupling at power system
frequency, and is based on the rotor ground-current measurement. A 7XR61 + 3PP1336 must be provided as accessory. A
base module and an expansion module (such as standard
variant AA2 + IO201) are required as minimum device hardware.
Figure 2.13/4 shows also the internal functional structure of the
device. It is almost identical to the busbar version. The differential protection was changed. It is to protect the generator and
the transformer. A transformer differential protection must
therefore be used with the associated function groups.
All linkages are preset in the application template. You need
125 function points for the template. If you want to use additional functions, you may have to increase the number of function points.
2.13
Figure 2.13/5 Application example: Protection of a power plant unit (application template: Generator unit connection advanced)

SIPROTEC 7UM85 - protection of a power plant unit
The typical application shows a more complex version of a plant
for medium-sized to large generators (20 - 200 MVA, for
example) in unit connection. The auxiliary system is satisfied via
a separate infeed. This example is intended to show the
performance of the system. An expansion for plants with auxiliary transformer is possible. If necessary, a transformer differential protection may have to be added. The maximum number of
differential protection functions is limited to 3. The described
application is based on the application template "Generator unit
connection advanced". Figure 2.13/5 shows the single line
diagram, the connection to the 7UM85, and the logic structure
in the device.
2.13
2.13/7
The protection range of the 90% stator ground-fault protection

is guaranteed by the neutral-point transformer with load
resistor. To ensure 100% protection range, the 100% stator
ground fault with 20-Hz infeed is provided. This requires the
accessories 7XT33 and 7XT34 and a miniature current transformer. The rotor ground-fault protection is implemented as
coupling at power system frequency, and is based on a resistance test. A 7XR61 + 3PP1336 must be provided as accessory. A
base module and two expansion modules (such as standard
variant AA3 + an additional IO201) are required as minimum
device hardware. Figure 2.13/5 shows also the internal functional structure of the device. To locate the faulty piece of
equipment more rapidly, a stand-alone differential protection is
provided for the generator and for the transformer. This has an
effect on function group size and interconnection. In addition, a
circuit-breaker failure protection and the synchronization function are provided in the Circuit breaker FG. The adjusting
commands are carried out manually (automatic adjusting
commands are being prepared). The synchronization function
can be used to release manual synchronization. All linkages are
preset in the application template. You need 350 function
points for the template. If you want to use additional functions,
you may have to increase the number of function points.

ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
I/O
21T
Z<
24
V/f
25
Sync
27

V<
27
Undervoltage protection: "3-phase" or "universal

Vx"
V<
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
32R
- P<
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
>
40
Underexcitation protection
1/xd
46
I2>
46
I2 t>
46

direction
I2>, (V2,I2)
47

system
V2>
47

V2/V1>
48
Istart
49
, It
49H
h, It
49R
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

INs>
Iie>
50GN
Shaft current protection
INs>
50/27
Inadvertent energization protection
I>, V<reset
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
Template
1
2.13
50L
Load-jam protection
I>L
51V
t=f(I,V)
59, 59N

V>
59

or "universal Vx"
59N, 67Ns
Stator ground fault protection (undirectional,

directional)
27TH, 59TH,
59THD
Stator ground fault protection with 3rd harmonics V03.H<,

V03.H>;
V03.H
V0>, (V0,I0)
64S
Stator ground fault protection 100% (20-Hz)
RSG<
64F, frated
Rotor ground fault protection (IRG>, fn)
IRG>
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
64F, frated
Rotor ground fault protection (RRG>, fn)
RRG<
66
It
67
I>, (V,I)
67N
IN>, (V,I)
74TC
TCS
78
Z/t
f>,<; df/dt>,<
81
86
Lockout
87T
87N T
IN
87M
AFD
2.13

Ix, It, 2P
87G
PMU
Template
CFC arithmetic
Control
10
100
125
350
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
Table 2.13/1 SIPROTEC 7UM85 - Functions and application templates
2.13/9
Generator basic
Generator busbar connection
Generator unit connection basic
Generator unit connection extended

Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7UM85
AA1
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4V, 4I

11 binary inputs
1 sensitive ground-current input
Contains the base module with PS201 and IO202 modules
AA2
1/3, 7 BI, 14 BO, 4V, 4I,

7 binary inputs
1 sensitive ground-current input
AA3
1/2, 15 BI, 20 BO, 8V, 8I,

15 binary inputs
2 sensitive ground-current inputs
Expansion module IO202
AA4 in preparation (V7.10
1/2, 11 BI, 16 BO, 7V, 8I, 4MU
and later)
2.13
11 binary inputs
4 fast measuring transducer inputs (alternatively 20 mA, 10 V)

AA5
2/3, 15 BI, 20 BO, 7V, 16I, 4MU

15 binary inputs
4 fast measuring transducer inputs (alternatively 20 mA, 10 V)
Expansion modules IO210 and IO203

2.13
2.13/11
Busbar Protection

Busbar Protection SIPROTEC 7SS85
[dw_7SS85_anwendung, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7SS85
The SIPROTEC 7SS85 busbar protection has been designed with
the highest selectivity possible for a large variety of different
busbars and all voltage levels. Additional protection and control
functions extend the field of application to a comprehensive
station protection.
2.14
The SIPROTEC 7SS85 is suited for the following system configurations:
Single busbars with/without transfer busbar

Double busbars with/without transfer busbar
Triple busbars
Breaker-and-a-half layout method
Dual circuit-breaker systems and one or two current transformer(s) per feeder
Truck-Type Switchgear
Systems with combined busbars (alternatively main/transfer
busbar).
T circuit arrangements
H connection arrangement with busbar coupler or disconnection
Ring busbars.
Specify "significant properties" to define the maximum scope of
functions of your device. Each significant property is defined by
a short designation.
2.14/1
Short designation
9
Functional scope
1 protection zone
2 protection zones
2 protection zones, disconnector image
4 protection zones
4 protection zones, disconnector image
Only Circuit-breaker failure protection
Table 2.14/1 Maximum functional scope of the "significant properties"
Applications
The central busbar protection SIPROTEC 7SS85 includes the
following maximum quantity structure:
201) (15 with CP200) 3-phase meas. points (current transf.)

41) (2 with CP200) 3-phase meas. points (voltage transf.)
26 (22 with CP200) bays (feeders, bus couplers, bus-section
disconnections)
4 bus sections (protection zones)

4 bus couplers (with 1 or 2 current transformers)
2 auxiliary busbars (bus sections without measuring function)
Optional distributed binary inputs and outputs via protection
interface (PI) or IEC 61850 (GOOSE) open new plant concepts
1) Please consider that the maximum possible number of binary inputs and outputs decreases as
the number of current and voltage measuring points increases. Consequently, a configuration
with 20 current measuring points permits only 43 binary inputs and 43 binary outputs.

SIPROTEC 7SS85
The busbar protection SIPROTEC 7SS85 is a selective, safe and
fast protection against busbar short circuits in medium, high
and extra-high voltage systems with a large variety of busbar
configurations. Selection of the device basis functionalities
(significant properties) and the modular hardware structure
permit optimum adaptation of the SIPROTEC 7SS85 to a large
variety of system configurations and functional requirements up
to a comprehensive station protection.
Selection of the device basis functionalities (significant properties) and the modular hardware structure permit optimum adaptation of the SIPROTEC 7SS85 to a large variety of system configurations and functional requirements.
Benefits
Safety by measuring methods proven and reliable for

25 years.
Simple creation and adaptation of the configuration by the

user over the entire service life
[SIP5_GD_SS_LED_LED_LED_W3, 1, --_--]
Clearly structured by fully graphical engineering and online
Figure 2.14/2 SIPROTEC 7SS85 busbar protection
Protection of up to 20 feeders with a single device
Three interacting methods of measurement allow minimum
plant visualization with DIGSI 5
Functions
tripping times after busbar faults and ensure maximum

stability in case of large short-circuit currents
The table "Functions and templates" shows all functions that are
available in the SIPROTEC 7SS85. All functions can be configured
as required with DIGSI 5. Using some functions requires the
appropriate number of free function points to be available in the
device. The function point calculator in the online configurator
provides support in determining the required number of function points for your device. The necessary function points are
also shown during project engineering with DIGSI 5.
The integrated circuit-breaker failure protection recognizes
Characteristic key values of SIPROTEC 7SS85
Various control possibilities, such as bay out of order, acquisi-
Phase-selective measurement and display

Selective tripping of faulty busbar sections
Disconnector-independent check zone as additional tripping
criterion
Shortest tripping times (<7 ms) to ensure network stability

and minimize damage to the system
circuit-breaker faults in the event of a busbar short circuit and

provides a trip signal for the circuit breaker at the line end.
The adjacent busbar trips if a coupling circuit breaker fails
There is extensive monitoring of current transformer circuits,

measured value acquisition and processing, and trip circuits.
This prevents the protection from functioning too tightly or
too loosely, which reduces the effort for routine checks
tion blocking from disconnectors and circuit breakers,

blocking of protection zones or circuit-breaker failure protection, make the adaptation to operationally caused special
states of your system easier
Optional 1/3-pole or 3-pole circuit-breaker failure protection

using the integrated disconnector image to trip all circuit
breakers of the busbar section affected
Highest stability in case of external faults, also in case of
Optional end-fault protection for the protection of the section
Operate curve with freely adjustable characteristic curve
Direct tripping of protection zones through external signals

Release of the tripping of a protection zone through addi-
transformer saturation, through stabilization with flowing

currents
sections
Additional operate curve with increased sensitivity for lowcurrent faults, for example in resistance-grounded power
systems
Fast recognition of internal and external faults requires only

2 ms of saturation-free time of the current transformer
Using closed iron core or linearized current transformers in a

plant is possible
Adaptation of different current transformer ratios per parameterization
Straight-forward dimensioning of current transformers and

stabilization factor
2.14
between circuit breaker and current transformer for feeders

and bus couplers
tional external signals
Release of tripping through additional, external phase-selective signals
Optional overcurrent protection phase / ground per bay

Optional voltage and frequency protection for up to two 3phase voltage transformers. This may also be used for the
implementation of an integrated undervoltage release.
Optional cross stabilization as additional tripping release in 3pole encapsulated gas-insulated switchgear.
Function library and application templates

The flexibility of the SIPROTEC 7SS85 permits a large number of
possible plant configurations to be protected. In place of application templates, DIGSI 5 makes a comfortable, fully graphical
interface for complete engineering of your busbar protection
available.
Significant Features
Use the Significant properties" to select the basic device functionalities. These properties are oriented to typical plant constellations or applications.
For the SIPROTEC 7SS85 devices, each significant property has a
standard variant allocated (V1, V2, V3). Additional expansion
modules permit the device to be adapted to your specific application (see "Overview of the Standard Variants").
Table 2.14/2 shows the basic scope of bays and the degree of
expansion of the hardware in accordance with the allocated
standard variant. Additional bays require additional function
points.
The significant property E Only Circuit-breaker failure protection" is special. Here, the main protection function is the circuitbreaker failure protection. The device permits independent,
complete backup protection for a circuit-breaker failure in the
station to be implemented.
2.14
2.14/3

Significant features
Brief description
Main protection function
Busbar sections
Disconnector Image
No
Measuring points, 3-phase

(maximum)
20 (15 with
CP200)
Bays (maximum)
E
Only circuitbreaker failure
protection
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
20 (15 with
CP200)
20 (15 with
CP200)
20 (15 with
CP200)
20 (15 with
CP200)
20 (15 with
CP200)
26 (22 with
CP200)
26 (22 with
CP200)
26 (22 with
CP200)
26 (22 with
CP200)
26 (22 with
CP200)
26 (22 with
CP200)
Bays (included in the basic scope)
Related standard variant
V1
V2
V2
V3
V3
V3
Included measuring points, 3-phase
No
Table 2.14/2 Significant properties and standard variants
Configuration and parameterization

The single-line diagram describes the primary topology of your
plant. From the DIGSI 5 library, add a SIPROTEC 7SS85 device
and the necessary function blocks. Connect the primary
elements of the single-line diagram (busbars, current transformers, disconnectors, circuit breakers) to the inputs and
outputs of the device. This establishes a topological reference.
In DIGSI 5 online mode, the information that is important for
commissioning, operation and analysis is shown in the singleline diagram. The switch positions are shown in addition to the
measured values of the feeders and the protection zones.
Additionally, you obtain information about special operational
states, for example in "Bay out or order" or reduced protection of
selectivity, with direct coupling of busbars via disconnectors
(busbar shunt by disconnectors).
Using standardized SIPROTEC 5 hardware ensures flexible adaptation to a large variety of busbar configurations and simple
expandability.
[dw_DwKennIs, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.14/3 Standard Characteristic Curve

2.14
Operate curve with increased sensitivity

In resistance-grounded networks, single-phase short circuits are
in the range of the rated currents. An independent characteristic
curve is available to provide busbar protection with appropriate
sensitivity in these cases, too. This characteristic curve provides
separated parameters for the pickup threshold and for a limitation of the action area. For this case, too, the integrated circuitbreaker failure protection has a corresponding characteristic
curve. The characteristic curve is activated via a binary input.
Detecting a high residual voltage as a characteristic of a singlepole fault is one usual criterion.
[dw_DwEmpKen, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.14/4 Sensitive Characteristic Curve
Disconnector image
With multiple busbars, disconnectors can be used to switch bays
to different busbar sections (protection zones). For a correct
assignment of the bay currents to the appropriate protection

zones, the positions of the disconnectors are needed in busbar
failure protection and in circuit-breaker failure protection. The
disconnector image that is integrated in the device performs the
dynamic administration of the switching states. In the event of a
busbar fault, the necessary trip commands for the individual
circuit breakers are also generated via the disconnector image.
This function is characterized by the following features:
Processing up to 26 bays and 4 busbar sections

Disconnector runtime and position monitoring
Due to the program assignment "Disconnector NOT off =
Disconnector on", adjusted disconnector auxiliary contacts are

not necessary.
Storage of the disconnector setting in the event of an auxiliary-voltage failure
Convenient graphical project engineering with the DIGSI 5

operating program.
Dynamic graphical visualization of the switchgear with

DIGSI 5 in online mode.
Project engineering of a double busbar
The following Figure shows a typical structure of engineering
with DIGSI 5, the measuring points used, the function groups
used, and their interconnections.
2.14
[dw_Anwendbsp_Verbind-Feld-Koppl, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.14/5 Application example: Project engineering of a double busbar
2.14/5

Stub protection
significant feature 9 (differential protection for a protection

zone), a tailored solution is available for you. With 2 such
devices, a so-called H connection can also be protected, if a
circuit breaker and a current transformer exist in the connection.
Protection of a single busbar
Single busbars can be segmented into several sections using
bus-section couplers (circuit breakers and current transformers)
or busbar disconnectors. With the variant with bus-section
coupler, every zone is selectively protectable.
With the variant with bus-section disconnectors, selective
protection is possible only with open disconnectors.
For this, the disconnector position must be recorded in the
device
According to the number of the busbar sections, the significant
feature 9 (differential protection for 1 protection zone), significant feature A (differential protection for 2 protection zones)
and significant feature C (differential protection for 4 protection
zones) are used.
[dw_Dreibein, 1, en_US]
For more than 4 zones and bus-section couplers, two SIPROTEC

7SS85 devices are used.
Figure 2.14/6 Application example: Stub
The differential protection for so-called stubs requires a protection zone and inputs for 3 current measuring points. With the
2.14
[dw_LS_SS_Anlagen_1-teil, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.14/7 Application example: Single busbar with 7 feeders and bus-section coupler
H connections
H connections can be looked at as two single busbars, each with
2 feeders on both sides of the coupling or disconnection.
Accordingly, the significant feature A (differential protection for
2 protection zones) is used. The SIPROTEC 7SS85 must be
configured for 5 bays.
[dw_H-Schaltung, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.14/8 H connection with coupler or disconnector

Protection of a breaker-and-a-half arrangement
Protection of a double busbar
Busbars in a breaker-and-a-half layout permit an uninterrupted

operation of infeed and feeders even during a busbar outage.
They are thus usually coupled during operation.
Double-busbar systems allow the distribution of overall output

and a flexible operations management. Each busbar or each
switchable-busbar section can be selectively protected.
Breaker-and-a-half arrangements are protected like two single

busbars. A system as shown in Figure 2.14/9 requires a
SIPROTEC 7SS85 device with the significant property A (differential protection for 2 protection zones). The SIPROTEC 7SS85
must be designed for 10 bays (corresponds to 5 cross branches
or "diameters").
Since bays can be connected to various busbars (protection

zones), the disconnector positions must be determined in the
busbar protection.
With more than 20 feeders (10 diameters), one SIPROTEC 7SS85

device with the significant property 9 (Differential protection for
1 protection zone) is used for each busbar. The middle circuit
breakers and current transformers are not relevant to the busbar
differential protection. In SIPROTEC 7SS85, however, a systemencompassing circuit-breaker failure protection can be implemented.
For a system in accordance with Figure 2.14/10 a SIPROTEC

7SS85 device of the significant feature D (differential protection
for 4 protection zones and disconnector image) is needed.
In the integrated disconnector image, the dynamic updating of

the switching state of the system occurs in accordance with the
switch positions and the configured topology.
2.14
Figure 2.14/9 1 1/2 circuit-breaker arrangement
[dw_Doppel_SS_Anlagen, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.14/10 Double busbar with bus coupler and bus-section disconnection
2.14/7

Systems with transfer busbars or combined busbars
Transfer busbars are provided in order to continue to operate
feeders in cases of circuit-breaker revision or defect. In this
circuit-breaker substitution mode, the circuit breaker in the
affected coupler assumes the function of the circuit breaker of
the feeder. Mostly a transfer busbar of ones own is available

for this operation state. If one of the main busbars, on the basis
of the disconnector topology, can also be used as transfer
busbar, this is called a combined busbar.
Figure 2.14/11 Double busbar with combined busbar
For a system in accordance with Figure 2.14/11, a SIPROTEC

7SS85 device of the significant feature B (differential protection
for 2 protection zones and disconnector image) is needed.
2.14

ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
3-pole
1-pole
I/O
27

V<
38
>
47

system
V2>
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50BF
CBFP
50BF
CBFP
50EF
End fault protection
59, 59N

V>
74TC
TCS
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
86
Lockout
87B
Cross stabilization
Bay
87 STUB

PMU

CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
2.14
Template
Table 2.14/3 SIPROTEC 7SS85 - Functions and application templates
2.14/9
Busbar standard

Busbar Protection Standard variants
Standard variants
V1
1/2, 15 BI, 13 BO, 12 I

15 binary inputs
V2
1/2, 11 BI, 11 BO, 16 I

11 binary inputs
V3
2/3 15 BI, 15 BO, 24 I

15 binary inputs
2 expansion modules IO203
Table 2.14/4 Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SS85

2.14

Busbar Protection Standard variants
2.14
2.14/11
Bay Controllers

Bay Controllers SIPROTEC 6MD85, 6MD86
[dw_6md_anwendung, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 6MD85, 6MD86

SIPROTEC 5 bay controllers control and monitor plants of all
voltage levels. The large number of automatic functions permits
the device to be used in all fields of energy supply.
2.15
The devices contain all important auxiliary functions that are

necessary for safe grid operation today. This includes functions
for protection, control, measurement and monitoring. The large
number of communication interfaces and communication protocols satisfies the requirements of communication-based selective protection and of automated operation.
functions. Because of a modular structure design, the
SIPROTEC 5 bay controllers can always be flexibly adapted to
specific requirements.
Overview of the SIPROTEC 6MD85 and 6MD86 devices
The SIPROTEC 5 bay controllers are based on the flexible and
powerful SIPROTEC 5 modular system. When ordering, you can
select from among various standard variants. Expandability
through supplemental modules allows for individual adaptation
to specific applications.
Sets of devices
The bay controllers are differentiated into SIPROTEC 6MD85 and
SIPROTEC 6MD86 product groups.
The SIPROTEC 6MD86 devices are designed for applications in

the power transmission system. They can be used with a
maximum variety of auxiliary functions. Both device types can
be flexibly configured in your hardware implementation.
Type
6MD86
Optional
Automatic reclosing
Optional
Switching Sequences
Optional
CFC arithmetic
Optional
Measured-value Processing
Optional
Number of switching devices

greater than 4
Optional
Synchrocheck
Optional
Table 2.15/1 Essential differentiating characteristics
Common points:
Configuration of a large number of protection functions

Modular expansion of the quantity structure
Optionally usable as phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Powerful automation with CFC.
Although the SIPROTEC 6MD85 devices are tailored for applications in distribution systems, they can also be used in highvoltage and extra-high voltage applications.
2.15/1
6MD85

Bay Controllers SIPROTEC 6MD85
Description
The SIPROTEC 6MD85 bay controller is a general-purpose control
and automation device with protection function. It has been
designed for utilization on all voltage levels, from distribution to
transmission. As a part of the SIPROTEC 5 family, it allows the
use of a large number of protection functions from the
SIPROTEC library. The modular hardware permits action-related
IOs to be integrated. Adapt the hardware exactly to your
requirements and rely on future-oriented system solutions with
Main function
Bay controller for medium voltage and high to

extra-high voltage switchgear with integrated
operation and extensive protection functions.
Powerful automation, simple configuration
with DIGSI 5
Inputs and outputs

Housing width

modular system. For great requirements placed
on the quantity structure, the device can be
extended in the second row. For example, this
permits an additional 240 binary inputs (and
more) to be used with the IO230 (see chapter
"Hardware")
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 1, --_--]
Figure 2.15/2 SIPROTEC 6MD85 bay controller (1/3 device with

1/6 expansion module with key switch operation panel)

Functions
required.
Integrated bay controller with versatile protection function

from medium to extra-high voltage
Control of switching devices

Synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection

Modbus TCP)
Arc protection
Optional overcurrent protection for all voltage levels with 3pole tripping

Selective protection of overhead lines and cables with single-
Synchrophasor measured values integrated with IEEE C37.118

protocol (PMU)


Applications
The SIPROTEC 6MD85 bay controller is a general-purpose control
and automation device with protection function on the basis of
the SIPROTEC 5 system. The standard variants of the SIPROTEC
6MD85 are delivered with instrument transformers. Furthermore, protection-class current transformers are also possible in
SIPROTEC 6MD85 so that protection functions can be used. Due
to its high flexibility, it is suitable as selective protection equipment for overhead lines and cables with single-ended and multiended infeed with two ends when protection communication is
used. The device supports all SIPROTEC 5 system properties. It
enables future-oriented system solutions with high investment
security and low operating costs.
2.15
Application example
settings.
ended and multi-ended feeders using protection communication
Overcurrent protection also configurable as emergency function

SIPROTEC 6MD85 standard
Double-busbar feeder with switchgear interlocking.

SIPROTEC 6MD85 extended control
Additionally to 6MD85 standard, this includes the CFC blocks

for switching sequences and arithmetic
Switching sequence for automatic busbar transfer preconfigured (started by function key).
contains the synchrocheck. The disconnectors are also

controlled by one function group each. Operational measured
values and energy measured values are calculated in the function group VI_3-phase, and are available for output on the
display, transmission to the station automation system and
processing in the CFC. A switching sequence stored in the CFC
which is triggered via a function key causes an automatic busbar
transfer.
Application example with switching sequence
Figure 2.15/3 shows a simple application example with a

6MD85 on a double busbar. The circuit-breaker function group
2.15
[dw_6MD8-Bsp-Application-1, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.15/3 Application example: Bay controller 6MD85 for double busbar with switching sequence for busbar transfer
2.15/3

ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available

Template
1
3-pole
I/O
25
Sync
27

Vx"
V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
38
>
46
I2>
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
51V
t=f(I,V)
59

or "universal Vx"
74TC
TCS
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
86
Lockout
90V
90V
90V
PMU

AFD
Ix, It, 2P
2.15
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
20
Table 2.15/2 SIPROTEC 6MD85 - Functions and application templates
Standard
Not Configured
Extended Control

Description
The SIPROTEC 6MD86 bay controller is a universal control and
automation device with a protection function. It is designed for
use in all voltage levels from distribution to transmission. As a
part of the SIPROTEC 5 family, it allows the use of a large
number of protection functions from the SIPROTEC library.
Adapt the hardware and the IO quantity structure exactly to
your requirements and enable future-oriented system solutions
with high investment security and low operating costs.
Main function
Bay controller for medium voltage and high to

extra-high voltage switchgear with integrated
operation and comprehensive protection functions. Powerful automation, simple configuration with DIGSI 5.
Inputs and outputs

Flexible adjustable and expandable I/O quantity

modular system. For great requirements placed
on the quantity structure, the device can be
extended in the second row. For example,
240 (and more) binary inputs are possible with
the IO230 (see Section Hardware).
Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
Functions
Figure 2.15/4 SIPROTEC 6MD86 (1/3 device with 1/6 expansion module
with key switch operation panel)

Synchrophasor measured values with IEEE C37.118 protocol

integrated (PMU)

required.
Integrated bay controller with versatile protection function

from medium to extra-high voltage
Control of switching devices

Synchrocheck, switchgear interlocking protection and switchrelated protection functions, such as circuit-breaker failure
protection and automatic reclosing

2.15
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 1, --_--]
Up to 4 pluggable communication modules usable for
different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850, IEC

60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 (serial+TCP), Modbus
TCP)

Arc protection
Optional overcurrent protection with 3-pole tripping

Overcurrent protection also configurable as emergency function
Applications
The SIPROTEC 6MD86 bay controller is a universal control and
automation device with a protection function based on the
SIPROTEC 5 system. The standard variants of the SIPROTEC
6MD86 are delivered with instrument transformers. Furthermore, protection-class current transformers are also possible in
SIPROTEC 6MD86 so that protection functions can be used. Due
to its high flexibility, it is suitable as selective protection equipment for overhead lines and cables with single-ended and multiended infeeds when protection communication is used. The
device supports all SIPROTEC 5 system properties. It enables
SIPROTEC 6MD86 standard double busbar
Double busbar feeder with switchgear interlocking protection

Synchrocheck for circuit breaker
Switching sequence for automatic busbar switchover preconfigured (triggered by function key)

2.15/5

SIPROTEC 6MD86 breaker-and-a-half type 1
Double busbar with protection functions
Control of a breaker-and-a-half diameter (3 circuit breakers,

14 disconnectors)
In Figure 2.15/5 the double busbar feeder is controlled and also

protected by a 6MD86. For this purpose, circuit-breaker failure
protection and automatic reclosing are activated in the Circuit
breaker function group. The function group VI_3-phase includes
the protection functions overvoltage protection, frequency
protection and power protection. In contrast to Figure 2.15/3, it
is therefore connected to the circuit breaker so that the resulting
trip signals have a destination. Such linkages can be quickly and
flexibly created in the DIGSI editor Function-group connections
(Figure 2.15/6).
Synchrocheck for the three circuit breakers with dynamic

measuring point switchover.
SIPROTEC 6MD86 breaker-and-a-half type 2
Control of part of a 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout bay

Supports concepts with multiple bay controllers per bay
Circuit-breaker failure protection and automatic reclosing.
2.15
Figure 2.15/5 Application example: Bay controller 6MD86 for double busbar with protection functions

Breaker-and-a-half diameter with protection and control
systems
[Schutzobjekt, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.15/7 zshows a breaker-and-a-half diameter with

protection and control system. Protection is ensured by two line
protection devices SIPROTEC 7SL87 which also include circuitbreaker failure protection and automatic reclosing of the three
circuit breakers. All swi tching devices and the synchrocheck of
the circuit-breakers are controlled by the bay controller
SIPROTEC 6MD86.Figure 2.15/8 shows the functions of
SIPROTEC 6MD86.
Figure 2.15/6 Assignment of the function group with protection functions to the switch (protected object)
2.15
2.15/7

2.15
[dw_1-5_CB-Feldleit-, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.15/7 Application example: Breaker-and-a-half layout with one bay controller and two line protection devices (overview)
Figure 2.15/8 shows the principle of dynamic changeover of

measured voltage values for the synchrocheck functions of the
three circuit-breakers in the bay controller SIPROTEC 6MD86.
Every synchrocheck function (ANSI number 25) requires the two
voltages Vsync1 and Vsync2 (feeder voltage and reference
voltage). For the central circuit-breaker QA2 there are two possi-
bilities each for both voltages, depending on the position of the

disconnectors and the circuit-breakers. For the two exterior
circuit-breakers QA1 and QA3, there is only one possibility for
one voltage (that is, the adjacent busbar), whereas the other
voltage is connected with one of three possibilities (also
depending on the position of the switching device).

2.15
Figure 2.15/8 Application example: Breaker-and-a-half layout with one bay controller and two line protection devices (detail for bay controller)
2.15/9

[Spannungskanle, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.15/9 Mapping of the possible voltage channels to the three circuit-breaker function groups
Figure 2.15/9 shows the mapping in the editor Function Group

Connections. All voltages that are possible as feeder or reference voltage for the synchrocheck are assigned to the inputs
Vsync1 or Vsync2.
The ID number of the measured values is used to select the presently applied operational voltages in a CFC (Figure 2.15/10).
2.15
[CFC, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.15/10 CFC for selection of the synchrocheck reference voltages

Phasor Measurement Unit
PMUs measure current and voltage by amount and phase at
selected stations of the transmission system. The high-precision
time synchronization (via GPS) allows comparing measured
values from different substations far apart and drawing conclusions as to the system state and dynamic events such as power
swing conditions.
When selecting the option Phasor Measurement Unit, the

devices determine current and voltage phasors, provide them
with highly accurate time stamps and transmit them for analysis
together with other measured values (frequency, speed of
frequency change) using the IEEE C37.118 communication
protocol, see Figure 2.15/12. Using synchrophasors and a suitable analysis program (for example SIGUARD PDP) it is possible
to automatically detect power swings and trigger alarms, which
are sent to the control center, for example.
[Zeigermessung (PMU), 1, --_--]
2.15
2.15/11

[dw_struct_WAM, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.15/12 Connection of 3 Phasor Mesurement Units with two Phasor Data Concentrators (PDCs) SIGUARD PDP
When using the PMU function, a function group FG PMU is

created in the device. This function group calculates the phasors
and analog values, conducts the time stamping and sends the
data to the selected Ethernet interface using the IEEE C37.118
protocol. There, the data can be received, stored and processed

by one or more clients. Up to three client IP addresses can be
assigned in the device.
2.15

Figure 2.15/13 Application example: Double busbar with 6MD86, used as bay controller and Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
2.15
2.15/13

ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available

Template
1
3-pole
I/O
25
Sync
27

Vx"
V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
38
>
46
I2>
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50BF
CBFP
51V
t=f(I,V)
59

or "universal Vx"
74TC
TCS
79
AR
81
f>,<; df/dt>,<
86
Lockout
90V
90V
90V
PMU

AFD
Ix, It, 2P
2.15
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
75
Table 2.15/3 SIPROTEC 6MD86 - Functions and application templates

Not Configured
1.5 CB type1
Standard Double Busbar
1.5 CB type2
2.15
2.15/15

Bay Controllers Standard variants
Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 6MD85
J1
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V

11 binary inputs
4 sensitive current transformer inputs,
Includes the base module with PS201 and IO202 modules
J2
1/2, 27 BI, 17 BO, 4 I, 4 V

27 binary inputs
J4
2/3, 43 BI, 25 BO, 4 I, 4 V

43 binary inputs
Expansion modules 2 x IO207
J5
5/6, 59 BI, 33 BO, 4 I, 4 V

59 binary inputs
2.15

J7
1/1, 75 BI, 41 BO, 4 I, 4 V

75 binary inputs
Table 2.15/4 Standard variants for bay controllers SIPROTEC 6MD85

Standard variants for SIPROTEC 6MD86

The standard variants of the 6MD86 also include an Ethernet communication module, a large display and key switch (starting with type K2)
K1
1/3, 11 BI, 9BO, 4 I, 4 V

1 electrical Ethernet module ETH-L1-2EL
11 binary inputs
K2
1/2, 27 BI, 17 BO, 4 I, 4 V

27 binary inputs
K4
2/3, 43 BI, 25 BO, 4 I, 4 V

43 binary inputs
K5
5/6, 59 BI, 33 BO, 4 I, 4 V

59 binary inputs
2.15

K7
1/1, 75 BI, 41 BO, 4 I, 4 V

75 binary inputs
2.15/17

K8
1/1, 67 BI, 39 BO, 8 I, 8 V

67 binary inputs
Expansion modules IO202, 3 x IO207
Table 2.15/5 Standard variants for bay controllers SIPROTEC 6MD86

2.15

2.15
2.15/19
Fault Recorder

Fault Recorder SIPROTEC 7KE85
[dw_7KE85_anwendung, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7KE85
SIPROTEC Fault Recorders are a component part of the
SIPROTEC 5 modular system and support all SIPROTEC 5 system
properties. They can be used individually as well as universally
within the scope of system solutions.
The SIPROTEC 7KE85 Fault Recorder is designed to suit present
and future requirements in a changing energy market. Powerful
and reliable monitoring combined with flexible engineering and
communication features provide the basis for maximum supply
reliability.
2.16

functions. Through their modular structure, SIPROTEC 5 fault
recorders can always be flexibly adapted to specific requirements.
The SIPROTEC 7KE85 Fault Recorder has the following additional
functionalities compared to the SIPROTEC 5 protection devices
and bay controllers.
Additional quality information supplements the records

Power Quality recordings
Recording of GOOSE messages in a continuous recorder.
Distinguishing features
The SIPROTEC 7KE85 Fault Recorder can be configured with
different basic functions.
Basic functions
Fault Recorder
Comprehensive flexible, event-triggered and

continuous recording options
PMU
Synchrophasor measurement (PMU) as per

C37.118 (2011)
Power Quality recordings
Continuous measurement of events and failures in the electrical energy supply system
according to IEC 61000-4-30
Sampling configurable from 1 to 16 kHz

Mass storage of 16 GB
All recorders capable of running in parallel
Individually triggered recorders
Continuous recorders
Separate activation of the recorders
Freely configurable memory for each recorder
2.16/1

Description
Powerful fault recorders with integrated measurement of
synchrophasors (PMU) according to IEEE C37.118 and power
quality measurement according to IEC 61000-4-30. Due to the
great flexibility of trigger functions, the SIPROTEC 7KE85 is
ideally suited for monitoring the entire energy value added
chain, from generation to distribution. The powerful automation
and flexible configuration with DIGSI 5 complements the range
of functions.
Main function
Fault Recorder
Inputs and outputs
4 predefined standard variants with up to

40 current transformers and 40 voltage transformers, 43 binary inputs, 33binary outputs

modular system
Housing width
1/3 to 1/1 x 19"
Benefits
[SIP5_GD_SS_LED_LED_LED_W3, 1, --_--]
Clearly organized documentation and focused analysis of
Figure 2.16/2 Fault recorder SIPROTEC 7KE85 (1/3 device with expansion modules)
Lossless data compression

Time synchronization via Precision Time Protocol (PTP)
power system processes and failures



Powerful communication components ensure secure and
effective solutions

Functions
required.
Up to 40 analog channels
Fast-Scan Recorder
Up to 2 slow-scan recorders
Up to 5 continuous recorders and 2 trend recorders
Power Quality recordings according to IEC 61000-4-30
(harmonics, THD, TDD - in preparation)
Sequence-of-events recorder for continuous recording of

binary status changes and IEC 61850 GOOSE messages
Usable as Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) according to

IEEE C37.118 protocol
Transmission of the records and triggering via IEC 61850

GOOSE messages
Variable sampling frequencies parameterizable between 1 kHz

and 16 kHz
Distribution of the mass storage of 16 GB to the various
IEEE 1588 protocol, IRIG-B, DCF77, and SNTP
Routing of the measured values to the individual recorders as

desired
Combination of the measuring groups for the power calculation as desired
Quality attributes for representing the instantaneous signal

quality in the time signal view
Trigger functions of a function block are fundamental component value, RMS value, zero-sequence, positive-sequence,
negative-sequence system power, frequency power, active
power, reactive power and apparent power
Level trigger and gradient trigger for every trigger function

Flexible cross trigger and system trigger, manual trigger
Creation of independent trigger functions with the graphic
2.16
automation editor CFC (continuous function chart)
Trigger functions via a combination of single-point, doublepoint indications, analog values, binary signals, Boolean
signals and GOOSE messages
Consistent monitoring concept

Special test mode for commissioning

recorders by the user as desired
Intelligent monitoring routines of the storage medium ensure

a high level of availability and integrity for archived data

Up to 4 pluggable communication modules usable for
Intelligent terminal technology enable prewiring and a simple
Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applications. They comprise basic configurations and default settings.
different and redundant protocols

device replacement
Applications
The fault recorder is for use in medium, high and extra-high
voltage systems and in power plants with comprehensive trigger
and recording functions. With the fault recorder SIPROTEC
7KE85, you receive a clearly organized and event-related evaluation and documentation of your power system processes. You
are thereby able to analyze failures in a targeted manner and
optimize your power system.
Typical processes to be monitored and documented:
System incidents, such as critical load cases or short circuits

Failures of the quality of supply
Dynamic behavior of generators
Closing and breaking operations of transformers (saturation

Fault Recorder 4 V / 4 I / 11 BI
Application templates related to the monitoring of a total of 8

current/voltage transformers.
Fault Recorder 8 V / 11 BI
Application templates related to the monitoring of a total of 8

voltage transformers.
Application templates related to the monitoring of a total of

16 current/voltage transformers.
Application templates related to the monitoring of a total of

40 current/voltage transformers.
response)
Power fluctuations and power-swing cycles

Test runs during commissioning.
2.16
[dw_7KE85_Applicationsbsp-1, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.16/3 Application example: Fault Recorder SIPROTEC 7KE85 for monitoring a feeder
Fault recorder for monitoring feeders
Figure 2.16/3 and Figure 2.16/4 show simple application examples with a SIPROTEC 7KE85, which is connected for monitoring
2.16/3
feeders. In these examples, the various triggers are provided via

function group FG VI_3-phase and are available to the function
group FG Recorder and, thus, to the event-triggered recorders.
In parallel, individually generated trigger functions (combination

of GOOSE messages, single-point/double-point indications,
binary signals, etc.) can start a recorder via the CFC and thus
generate a fault record.
[dw_7KE85_Applicationsbsp-2, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.16/4 Application example: Fault Recorder SIPROTEC 7KE85 for monitoring two feeders
2.16

[dw_7KE85_Applicationsbsp-PMU, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.16/5 Application example: Double busbar with SIPROTEC 7KE85 used as a Fault Recorder and Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
Fault Recorder with PMU

2.16
When the PMU function is used, a FG PMU function group is

created in the device, see Figure 2.16/5. This function group
calculates the phasor and analog values, performs the time
stamping and transmits the data with the protocol IEEE C37.118
to the selected Ethernet interface. There, they can be received
from one or more clients, saved and processed. Up to three IP
addresses from clients can be assigned in the device.
Phasor Measurement Unit
PMUs measure current and voltage by amount and phase at
selected stations of the transmission system. The high-precision
time synchronization (via GPS) allows comparing measured
values from different substations far apart and drawing conclusions as to the system state and dynamic events such as power
swing conditions.
2.16/5

When selecting the option Phasor Measurement Unit, the
devices determine current and voltage phasors, provide them
with highly accurate time stamps and transmit them for analysis
together with other measured values (frequency, speed of
frequency change) using the IEEE C37.118 communication
protocol, see Figure 2.16/. Using synchrophasors and a suitable
analysis program (for example SIGUARD PDP) it is possible to
automatically detect power swings and trigger alarms, which
are sent to the control center, for example.
[Zeigermessung (PMU), 1, --_--]
2.16
Figure 2.16/7 Connection of 3 Phasor Mesurement Units with two Phasor Data Concentrators (PDCs) SIGUARD PDP
When using the PMU function, a function group FG PMU is

created in the device. This function group calculates the phasors
and analog values, conducts the time stamping and sends the
data to the selected Ethernet interface using the IEEE C37.118
protocol. There, the data can be received, stored and processed

by one or more clients. Up to three client IP addresses can be
assigned in the device.

[dw_7KE85_Applicationsbsp-PMU, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.16/8 Application example: Double busbar with SIPROTEC 7KE85 used as a fault recorder and Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
2.16
2.16/7
Seal-in time (max.)
Sampling/resolution
Posting time
Fast-Scan recorder
3s
90 s
1 kHz to 16 kHz
SPS
3s
90 s
1 ms
MV
90 s
5400 s
MVs every 10
ms
1 - 3000 cycles
SPS
90 s
5400 s
1 ms
MV
MVs every 10
ms
1 s - 900 s
(IEC 61850)
SMV/MV
Common data class
Pre-trigger time (max.)
Slow-Scan recorder
Continuous recorder
SMV = Sample Measured Values / SPS = Single Point Status / MV = Measured Values
Table 2.16/1 Overview of the recorders
Recorder
for this purpose. Furthermore, up to 2 independent instances of

the slow-scan recorder can be created.
Fast-Scan recorder
Transient processes, short circuits or ground faults and also the
behavior of protection devices can be analyzed by using the
fast-scan recorder. Transient processes can be tripped, for
example, by switching operations. The fast-scan recorder can
record the history of the sampled values of all analog inputs,
internally calculated measured values and binary signals when
an error occurs for over 90 seconds with a pre-trigger time of
3 seconds. The sampling rate can be set between 20 and
320 sampled values per cycle. This corresponds to a sampling
frequency of 1 kHz to 16 kHz.
Binary changes are recorded at a resolution of 1 ms. The input
signals are analyzed according to the specified trigger conditions and recorded if the limiting values are violated. This
recorded fault record includes the pre-trigger time, the trigger
point and the fault recording. In addition, the cause that trips
the trigger is saved. The trigger limiting values and record times
can easily be set with DIGSI 5.
Slow-Scan recorder
The function principal resembles that of the fast-scan recorder,
but the values are calculated every 10 ms and communicated
over a configurable interval. The averaging interval can be
configured from a nominal period up to 3000 nominal periods.
The averaged values are stored by the slow-scan recorder as a
recording in mass storage. Binary changes are recorded, similar
to the fast-scan recorder, at a resolution of 1 ms.
Slow-scan recorders are therefore very well-suited for detecting,
for example, the load conditions before, during and after a
failure and, thus, also power-swing cycles.
The slow-scan recorder can record the history of sampled values
from all analog inputs, internally calculated measured values
and binary signals when an error occurs for over 90 minutes
with a pre-trigger time of 90 seconds. Here, too, the input
signals are analyzed according to the specified trigger conditions and recorded if the limiting values are violated. These fault
records include the pre-trigger time, the trigger point and the
fault recording. In addition, the cause that trips the trigger is
saved. The user sets trigger values and record times in DIGSI 5
Continuous recorder
The SIPROTEC 7KE85 has up to 5 continuous recorders that are
used for data acquisition of the analog quantities and internally
recorded measured values over longer time frames. This makes
it possible to perform an exact long-term analysis of the system
behavior.
For each recorded quantity of the continuous recorder, an
average value is formed over an adjustable time period and
stored in memory. Each of these recorders can be separately
activated. The user can set the available memory space in the
ring archive specifically for each recorder.
Trigger functions
The event-triggered recorders (fast-scan and slow-scan) have a
large number of analog and binary triggers that enable the user
to record the particular system problem exactly and avoid
unnecessary recordings. The input signals are thus queried
corresponding to the trigger conditions and start the fault
record recording. In the SIPROTEC 7KE85, all triggers can also be
assigned multiple times to the various recorders.
2.16
Analog trigger
The analog triggers are essentially subdivided into level and
gradient triggers. Level triggers monitor measurands for
conformity to the configured limiting values (min/max). As soon
as the measurand exceed or fall below the respective limiting
value, the trigger is tripped. Gradient triggers respond to the
level change over time.
Each analog trigger can be configured as primary, secondary or
percentage value. A distinction is made here between
frequency, voltage, current and power triggers. With current
and voltage as trigger variables, it is possible to select between
fundamental, RMS or symmetric components.
Binary trigger
A binary trigger starts a recording via the logical status change
of a binary signal. Along with the manual trigger, which can be
tripped via the device keypad, DIGSI 5 or any IEC 61850 client
(for example, SICAM PAS/PQS), the triggering can occur via

binary input (external trigger) or IEC 61850 GOOSE messages
via the communication network. The logic triggers are implemented via the powerful graphical logic editor (CFC). In this
case, the free combination of all available analog values (absolute values or phases), binary signals, Boolean signals, GOOSE
messages, single-point and double-point indications is possible
via Boolean or arithmetic operations.
As a user, you can thus set the trigger conditions appropriate for
your problem and start the recording.
2.16
2.16/9

ANSI
Functions
Abbr.

PMU
FSR
I/O

Available
Template
1
CFC arithmetic
Fast-scan recorder
FSR
SSR
Slow-scan recorder
SSR
CR
Continuous recorder
CR
TR
Trend recorder
TR
PQR
Power Quality recordings (functionalities)
PQR
Sequence of events recorder
SOE
Extended trigger functions
ExTrFct
ExTrFct
Table 2.16/2 SIPROTEC 7KE85 - Functions and application templates
Fault recorder 4V/4C/11BI
Fault recorder 8V/11BI
2.16

Fault Recorder Standard variants
Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7KE85
N1
1/3 x 19, 4 V, 4 I, 11 BI, 9 BO

11 binary inputs
N2
1/3 x 19, 8 V, 11 BI, 3 BO

8 voltage transformer inputs,
11 binary inputs,
N5
1/2 x 19, 8 V, 8 I, 19 BI, 15 BO

19 binary inputs
N6
1 x 19, 20 V, 20 I, 43 BI, 33 BO
43 binary inputs
2.16
2.16/11
The technical data of the device can be found in the device

manual www.siemens.com/siprotec
SIPROTEC 5 System
SIPROTEC 5 System
Chapter
3.1
Protection
3.2
Control
3.3
Automation
3.4
Monitoring
3.5
3.6
Communication
3.7
Safety and Security Concept
3.8
Test
3.9
Engineering
3.10
Hardware
3.11
SIPROTEC 5 System
Due to the modular construction of their hardware and
software, and their functional integration, SIPROTEC 5
devices are well suited for all tasks in the energy sector.
The SIPROTEC 5 devices include:
Protection
Control and automation
Supervision and monitoring
Data acquisition and logging
Communication and cyber security
Test and Diagnosis
cation flexibility, this expands the field of application and opens

up a wide variety of possibilities in meeting requirements for
present and future power systems. With SIPROTEC 5, you are on
the safe side for your application. The following figure shows
the possible functional expansion of a SIPROTEC 5 device.
Due to the modular design of the hardware and software and

the powerful engineering tool DIGSI 5, SIPROTEC 5 is ideally suitable for protection, automation, measurement and monitoring
tasks for the operation and monitoring of modern power
systems.
The devices are not only pure protection and electronic control
units; their performance enables them to assure functional integration of desired depth and scope. For example, they can also
serve to perform monitoring, synchrophasor measurement
(phasor measurement), powerful fault recording, a wide range
of measuring functions and much more, concurrently, and they
have been designed to facilitate future extensions.
SIPROTEC 5 provides extensive, precise data acquisition and bay
level logging for these functions. Combined with its communi-
[dw_funktionale-Integration, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.1/1 Possible functional expansion of SIPROTEC 5 devices
3.1
SIPROTEC 5 System
Functional Integration Instrument and protection-class current transformers
Figure 3.1/2 Protection of a transformer
Faster results with application templates

3.1
A common function library makes available all protection, automation, monitoring and auxiliary functions for the SIPROTEC 5
devices. The same functions are truly the same for all devices.
Once established, configurations can be transferred from device
to device. This results in substantially reduced engineering
effort.
Predefined application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for
every device type. These already contain basic configurations,
required functions and default settings. In addition, you can
save a device as a master template in a user-defined library and
use it again as such for your typical applications. This saves time
and money. The capability of saving user-defined application
templates is in preparation.
Figure 3.1/2 shows an example of a transformer in a system

configuration in which the functions in the application template
are combined into function groups (FGs). The function groups
(FGs) correspond to the primary components (protected object,

transformer side 1, transformer side 2, neutral point, transformer; circuit-breaker switching devices) thereby simplifying
the direct reference to the actual system. For example, if your
switchgear includes 2 circuit breakers, this is also represented by
2 Circuit breaker" function groups
Instrument and protection-class current transformers
The flexibility of the SIPROTEC 5 family enables even greater
functional integration and parallel processing of an extremely
wide range of functions. The modular hardware enables an
application-specific device configuration. If you also want to use
the Synchrophasor measurement (phasor measurement) function, that is, the high-precision acquisition of current and
voltage phasors and the variables derived from them such as
power and frequency, this function can be assigned to the
measuring input. Another possible application is monitoring
power quality characteristics.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Functional Integration Instrument and protection-class current transformers
Figure 3.1/3 shows the connection to an instrument transformer and protection-class current transformer for a feeder.
The necessary protection functions are assigned to the protection-class current transformer and the measuring functions are
assigned to the instrument transformer according to the application.
The high-precision measured values and status information
provided by the SIPROTEC 5 devices can be transmitted over the
high-performance communication system to automation
systems such as a SICAM substation automation technology and
power systems control or central analysis systems (for example,
SIGUARD PDP). In particular, the control and monitoring of intelligent power systems require information from power generators (conventional or renewable energies) and from consumers
(lateral lines). The required information may be measured
values, switching statuses, or messages from protection and
monitoring functions. In addition to performing local protection,
control and monitoring tasks, the SIPROTEC 5 devices are an
excellent data source. The flexible communication among the
devices enables them to be combined in various communication
topologies. In this context, the widely used Ethernet-based
communications standard IEC 61850 offers many advantages.
[dw_Anschl_Feldgeraete, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.1/3 Connection of bay units to instrument transformers and

protection-class current transformers
The modular, flexible structure of the hardware and software ensures perfectly customized solutions for all your
requirements in the network.
3.1
With SIPROTEC 5, you have flexibility throughout the entire

product lifecycle, and your investment is thus protected.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection The distance-protection function (ANSI 21, 21N) classical method
Protection
voltages and the use of a voltage memory make optimal direction determination possible.
Quadrilateral zone characteristics
The quadrilateral operate curve permits separate setting of the
reactance X and the resistance R. The resistance portion R can
be set separately for errors with or without ground involvement.
This characteristic is therefore best suited for detecting highimpedance errors. Applications with ground-fault-dependent
reactance radius per zone can be covered as well by simply
using additional distance zones. Each distance zone can be set
separately to operate for ground faults only, for phase faults
only or for all fault types.
The distance zones can be set forward, backward or non-directional (Figure 3.2/2).
[dw_schutz, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.2/1 SIPROTEC 5 functional integration protection
SIPROTEC 5 provides all the necessary protection functions to

address reliability and security of power systems and their
components. System configurations in multiple busbars and
breaker-and-a-half layouts are both supported. The functions are
based on decades of experience in putting systems into operation, including suggestions from our customers.
The modular, functional structure of SIPROTEC 5 allows exceptional flexibility and perfectly matches the protection functionality to the conditions of the system and is still capable of
further changes in the future.
The available device functions are described in the following
sections.
The distance-protection function (ANSI 21, 21N) classical
method
SIPROTEC 5 provides 6-system distance protection featuring
algorithms that have been proven in previously supplied
SIPROTEC protection devices. This measuring method is referred
to as the classical method.
3.2
By parallel calculation and monitoring of all six impedance

loops, a high degree of sensitivity and selectivity is achieved for
all types of faults. All methods of neutral-point treatment (arcsuppression-coil-ground, isolated, solidly or low-impedance
grounded) are reliably handled. Depending on the respective
device type, one-pole or three-pole tripping is possible. The
distance protection is suitable for cables and overhead lines with
or without series compensation.
[Dw_polygonale-zone, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/2 Quadrilateral zone characteristics with the example of

4 zones
MHO zone characteristics

With the MHO characteristics, the MHO circle expansion guarantees safe and selective operation for all types of faults. The circle
expands to the source impedance but never more than the
selected impedance radius. The Figure 3.2/3 shows the characteristics for a forward fault.
The device offers quadrilateral as well as MHO zone characteristics. The characteristics can be used separately for phase and
ground faults.
Thus, high-impedance ground faults can, for instance, be
covered with the quadrilateral characteristic and phase faults
with the MHO characteristic. The evaluation of quadrature
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) (ANSI 21, 21N)
Arrangements for breaker-and-a-half layout
When the cores of the two current transformers are connected
in parallel, the resultant measured current will be the sum of the
two currents flowing in the current transformers. This summation current corresponds to the current flowing into the feeder
and is therefore used for the power protection functions and
other functions. This method is commonly used. SIPROTEC 5
devices now provide sufficient measuring inputs to connect two
or several sets of current transformers separately to the device.
In this case, the summation is carried out in software internally.
The distance-protection function detects possible saturation of
only one of the current transformers and can thus prevent
unwanted pickup in case of an external error with high current
flowing. Through the separately measured currents, separate
circuit-breaker failure protection functions can be activated for
both switches. Moreover, the separately measured currents
allow a full-fledged differential protection for the end zone
between the current transformers if the feeder is switched off
(see STUB differential protection, ANSI 87-STUB).
Parallel-line compensation
[Dw_MHO-zone, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/3 MHO zone characteristics, for example, with 6 zones
Selectable number of distance zones

The number of distance zones can be freely adapted according
to the application requirements. The functions that use a
dependent zone, such as the permissive overreach transfer trip
scheme, all parameterized zones from the distance protection
are available (the use of the zone in the distance protection
itself is not affected by this). Each distance zone has its own
timer, separately dedicated to 1-phase and multi-phase errors.
The flexibility of the SIPROTEC 5 device family provides optimal
adaptation to each application. The distance protection will
always provide exactly the right number of distance zones.
Load zone
In order to guarantee reliable discrimination between load operation and short circuit especially on long lines under large
loads an adjustable load range is used. Impedances within this
load range do not result in unwanted tripping in the distance
zones.
Four pickup methods
The following pickup methods can be employed optionally:
Overcurrent pickup I>>>
Wrong distance-protection measurements due to the effect of

parallel lines can be compensated by detecting the parallel-line
ground current. Parallel-line compensation can be used for
distance protection as well as for fault location.
Load compensation
The distance protection function provides options to compensate the load influence on the radius measurement.
Elimination of disturbance variables
Digital filters render the device immune to disturbance variables
contained in the measured values. In particular, the influence of
DC components, capacitive voltage transformers and frequency
changes is considerably reduced. A special method of measurement is employed in order to assure selectivity of protection
during current-transformer saturation.
Measuring-voltage failure detection
Tripping the distance protection is blocked automatically in the
event of a measuring voltage outage, thus preventing unwanted
tripping. Distance protection is blocked if one of the voltage
monitoring functions or the auxiliary contact of the voltagetransformer circuit breaker picks up and in this case the EMERGENCY definite time-overcurrent protection can be activated.
Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) (ANSI 21,
21N)
Voltage-dependent overcurrent pickup V/I

Voltage-dependent and phase-angle-dependent overcurrent
Under extreme conditions, load currents and high fault resistances can influence the selectivity. The distance protection
with reactance method (RMD) function reduces the unfavorable
influence of high fault resistances at high loads.
Impedance pickup Z<
Load compensation is a part of the principle
Absolute phase selectivity
If the electrical power system shows inhomogeneities, for

example, different impedance angles of the infeeds, this can
also affect the radius of the distance protection. The reactance
method compensates this influence via adjustable compensation angles.
pickup V/I j
The distance-protection function incorporates a well-proven,

highly sophisticated phase selection algorithm. The pickup of
healthy phases due to the negative effect of the short-circuit
currents and voltages in other phases is reliably eliminated. This
phase selection algorithm makes appropriate tripping decisions
and ensures correct distance measurement in a wide field of
application.
3.2
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Impedance protection for transformers (ANSI 21T)
The distance protection function with reactance method (RMD):
Arrangements for breaker-and-a-half layout
Works in power systems with a grounded neutral point
The function RMD is just as suitable as the classical distanceprotection function for breaker-and-a-half layouts.
Is a selective short-circuit protection for lines and cables
supplied from one or more ends in radial, looped, or meshed

systems,
Is used as a backup protection for busbars, transformers, and
Influences on the distance measurements as a result of parallel

lines can compensate for the RMD function by detection of the
parallel line ground current.
Is suitable for use at all voltage levels.
Elimination of disturbance variables
The distance-protection function with reactance method (RMD)

can, as an alternative or additionally, be used for the distanceprotection function with the classical method.
Digital filters make the RMD function insensitive to disturbance

variables in the measured values. In particular, the influence of
DC components, capacitive voltage transformers and frequency
changes is considerably reduced. A special method of measurement is employed in order to assure selectivity of protection
during current-transformer saturation.
other lines

The quadrilateral operate curve permits separate setting for the
reactance X and the fault resistance RF. Each distance zone can
be configured separately to operate for ground faults only, for
phase faults only or for all fault types. All distance zones can be
set forward, backward or non-directional.
The RMD function calculates up to 7 impedance loops A-gnd, Bgnd, C-gnd, A-B, B-C, C-A, and A-B-C. The pickup method is the
impedance pickup Z<. The evaluation of healthy voltages, the
use of a voltage memory and the evaluation of delta values and
symmetric components make optimal direction determination
possible.
MHO zone characteristics
With the MHO characteristics, the MHO circle expansion guarantees safe and selective protection behavior. The circle expands
to the source impedance but never more than the selected
impedance radius. As an alternative to the quadrilateral zone
characteristics, the RMD function for phase errors with MHO
zone characteristics can be used if there are requirements for
the compatibility with existing distance-protection systems.
Selectable number of distance zones
The number of distance zones can be freely adapted according
to the application requirements.
Load zone
In order to guarantee reliable discrimination between load operation and short circuit especially on long lines under large
loads an adjustable load range is used. Impedances within this
load range do not result in unwanted tripping in the distance
zones.
Absolute phase selectivity
3.2
Parallel-line compensation
The distance-protection function with reactance method (RMD)

includes a highly sophisticated algorithm for the adaptive loop
selection. Different loop-selection criteria are processed in
parallel. The loop-selection criteria work with jump detection,
delta value detection, symmetric components and current,
voltage and impedance comparison methods. The pickup of
healthy phases due to the negative influence of short-circuit
currents and voltages in other phases is thus reliably eliminated.
This adaptive loop-selection algorithm makes appropriate tripping decisions and ensures correct distance measurement in a
wide field of application.

Tripping the distance protection is blocked automatically in the
event of a measuring voltage outage, thus preventing unwanted
tripping. The RMD function is blocked if one of the voltage
monitoring functions or the auxiliary contact of the voltagetransformer circuit breaker picks up and the EMERGENCY definite time-overcurrent protection can be activated.
Impedance protection for transformers (ANSI 21T)
SIPROTEC 5 offers a 6-system impedance protection with up to
4 impedance zones, especially for the use as backup protection
on power transformers.
The function
protects transformers as backup protection for transformer

differential protection
is used as backup protection for the generator transformer

and the generator in power plant units.
functions as backup protection in the event of reverse power
flow to faults in the upstream electrical power system beyond

one transformer
Depending on the application, the loop selection can be

controlled. In active grounded power systems, all 6 measuring
loops work independently of each other. The general release is
performed via the minimum current criterion. In non-active
grounded power systems (for example, generator protection),
the measuring loop selection is controlled by an overcurrent
pickup with undervoltage stability.
By using the frequency-tracking sampled values, the impedance
is measured over a broad frequency range. This is advantageous
for island networks or power plant units, for example, for
startup operations.
The quadrilateral operate curve permits separate setting of the
reactance X and the resistance R for phase-to-ground and phaseto-phase loops. The quadrilateral characteristic is a rectangle in
the impedance plane. Within the function, a maximum of 4
impedance zones can be operated simultaneously They can be
set forward, backward or non-directional. Each impedance zone
has its own timer.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Overexcitation protection (ANSI 24)
Direction determination
The direction is determined with saved prefault voltages or with
negative-sequence system variables.
Tripping the impedance protection is blocked automatically in
the event of a measuring voltage outage, thus preventing
unwanted tripping. Impedance protection is blocked if one of
the voltage monitoring functions or the auxiliary contact of the
voltage-transformer circuit breaker picks up and the EMERGENCY protection can be activated (definite time-overcurrent
protection).
Overexcitation protection (ANSI 24)
Overexcitation protection is used to detect impermissibly high
induction in generators and transformers. This function protects
these equipment from excessive thermal loads.
The induction is detected indirectly by evaluation of the V/f
ratio. An overvoltage results in excessive exciting currents and
underfrequency results in higher magnetic reversal losses.
There is a risk of overexcitation on disconnection from the
power system if the voltage or frequency control in the rest of
the system does not respond quickly enough or the power
unbalance is too great.
Within the function, no more than one stage with an inversetime, user-defined characteristic and two definite-time stages
can be operated at the same time.
conditions of the network always with the right synchronization

parameters.
Adjusting commands for the automatically synchronization
(ANSI 25)*
The synchronization function ensures a synchronous switching
of the generator circuit breaker. Automatic synchronization is
possible via the output of the adjusting commands to the speed
or voltage controller. If the synchronization conditions are not
met, the function automatically outputs adjusting signals.
Depending on the operating state, these are commands (step
up/down) to voltage or speed controllers (frequency controllers). The adjusting signals are proportional to the voltage or
frequency difference. This means that with a greater voltage or
frequency difference, longer adjusting commands are issued.
The gradient is adjustable. Between the adjusting commands,
there is a wait during a set dead time to settle the status
change. A quick adaptation of the generator voltage or
frequency to the target conditions is achieved with this method.
If frequency equality is established during the synchronization
of generators with the power system (stationary synchrophasor), then a kick pulse ensures a status change.
If a voltage adaptation via the transformer tap position changer
is desired, a defined adjusting pulse is output.
Monitoring of the induction (V/f value) ensures that, when the
adjusting commands are output (for example, increase
voltage, reduce speed), the continuously permissible limiting
value of V/f = 1.1 is not exceeded.
Synchrocheck, synchronizing function (ANSI 25)

When two partial networks are closed with a control command
or 3-pole auto-reclosure of the circuit breaker, it must be
ensured that the networks are synchronous with each other. For
this purpose, synchronization functionalities are provided.
The synchronization function can be used for synchronous
networks (electrically connected, no frequency difference) and
asynchronous networks (electrically separated, frequency difference exists).
It has three modes:
Synchrocheck (monitoring of voltage, frequency, and phaseangle difference)
Synchrocheck (monitoring of voltage, frequency, and phaseangle difference)
Switching of asynchronous networks (voltage and frequency
difference, connection at the point of synchronization, taking

the make-time of the circuit breaker into account).
By evaluating the frequency difference, the function automatically switches between the modes for synchronous and asynchronous networks. The synchrocheck function can be used for
pure monitoring without switching.
The relevant variables used for synchronization are sensed via
voltage transformers (positioned to the left and right of the
circuit breaker). Depending on the available number of voltage
transformer inputs, one or two synchronizing locations (circuit
breakers) can be applied.
*In preparation
Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27)

The undervoltage protection monitors the permissible voltage
range or protects equipment (plant parts and electrical
machines) against consequential damage from undervoltage. It
can be used in the network for decoupling or load shedding
tasks.
Various undervoltage protection functions are available. By
default, two stages are preconfi gured. Up to three identical
stages are possible.
The following functions are available:
Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage
Optionally, measurement of phase-to-phase voltages or RMS

value phase-to-ground voltages
Measuring methods: optionally, measurement of the fundamental component or of the effective value (True RMS).
Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage
3.2
2-pole short circuits or ground faults lead to an unbalanced
voltage collapse. In comparison with phase-related measuring

systems, these events influence the positive-sequence voltage
minimally. This makes this function particularly suitable for
the assessment of stability problems.
Method of measurement: calculation of positive-sequence

voltage from the measured phase-to-ground voltages.
Several functions can be used per device for which up to two

parameter sets (stages) can be applied for synchrochecks and up
to six parameter sets (stages) can be applied for the synchronization. Thus, the device can react to different environmentalSIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Catalog SIPROTEC 5.01 - Edition 4 3.2/4
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (QU-Protection)
Undervoltage protection with any voltage
Capture of any 1-phase undervoltage with 3-phase voltage

measurement for special applications
Measuring methods: optionally, measurement of the fundamental component or of the effective value (True RMS).
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (QUProtection)

The undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection protects
the system for mains decoupling purposes. To prevent a voltage
collapse in energy systems, the generating side, e.g. a generator, must be equipped with voltage and frequency protection
devices. An undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection is
required at the supply system connection point. It detects critical power system situations and ensures that the power generation facility is disconnected from the mains. Furthermore, it
ensures that reconnection only takes place under stable power
system conditions. The associated criteria can be parameterized.
Power protection (ANSI 32, 37)
The power protection works 3-phase and detects exceedance or
underrunning of the set effective power or reactive power
thresholds (see Figure 3.2/4). Pre-defined power limits are
monitored and corresponding warning alerts are issued.
The power direction can be determined via angle measurement
of the active power. Thus feeding back in the network or at electric machines can be detected. Idling machines (motors, generators) are detected and can be shut down via an indication.
The power protection can be integrated into any automation
solution, for example, to monitor very specific power limits
(further logical processing in CFC). The power protection function comes with one factory-set stage each for the active and
the reactive power. A maximum of four active power stages and
four reactive power stages can be operated simultaneously in
the function. The tripping stages are structured identically.
Thresholds for exceedance or underrunning of the power lines
can be defined. The combination of the different stages via CFC
result in various applications.
Detection of negative active power. In this case reversepowerprotection can be applied by using the CFC to link power
protection outputs to the Direct trip function.
Detection of capacitive reactive power. In the case of over3.2
voltage being detected due to long lines under no-load conditions it is possible to select the lines where capacitive reactive
power is measured.
[dw_Wirk_Blind_KL, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/4 Active-power and reactive-power characteristics
Reverse-power protection (ANSI 32R)

The reverse-power protection is used in generators and power
plant units. If the mechanical energy (for example, steam
supply at the turbine) fails, the generator obtains the driving
energy from the power system. In this operating state, the
turbine can be damaged, which is prevented by tripping of the
reverse-power protection. In order to react quicker if there is a
steam outage, the position of the quick-stop valve is coupled
additionally via binary input. It is used to switch between two
time delays of the trip command. Furthermore, the function is
used for operational disconnection (sequential circuit) of generators.
For other applications, the universal power protection
(ANSI 32, 37) is recommended.
The reverse-power protection operates on a 3-phase basis and
monitors the absorbed active power (negative threshold value).
By evaluation of the positive-sequence system power as well as
the selection of a long measuring window, the function is insensitive to disturbance variables and very precise (minimum
setting threshold: -0.3 % P/Srated). The measuring accuracy is
substantially affected by the angle error. Because the SIPROTEC
5 devices are compensated, the primary transformers affect the
measuring accuracy. The function can correct the angle error:
The angle error can be found in the test report of the transformer or be measured using the primary system. The problem
3.2/5
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Power plant decoupling (ANSI 32 dP/dt; 27, 50)*
with the angle error is bypassed if high-precision instrument
transformers are used as primary transformers (class 0.2 or 0.1).
For this purpose, the reverse-power protection should be
assigned to an independent measuring module.
Power plant decoupling (ANSI 32 dP/dt; 27, 50)*
Three-phase close-in short circuits result in mechanical stresses
on the turbo-generator unit as well as electrical ones. The determining criterion for the magnitude of the mechanical stress on a
turbo-generator unit to be expected is the negative active power
jump P, because torque and active power are proportional to
each other. The sudden force release results in an acceleration
of the rotor. At the same time, the phase position and amplitude
of the synchronous generated voltage changes. These changes
occur on a delayed basis corresponding to the inertia constant
of the machine and the magnitude of the active power change.
The longer this state persists, the more critical the stress on the
generator becomes when there is a sudden voltage recovery. It
is then possible to compare the effects of the subsequent operation more or less to a missynchronization. If the power system
protection does not cut off the high-current short circuits close
to the power plant within the allotted quick-operating time, the
aforementioned stress can occur.
The power plant decoupling function intervenes in this case and
opens the main switch on the upper-voltage side. After fault
clarification, the block can be re-synchronized with the paralleling device.
The protection function evaluates the negative active power
jump of the positive-sequence system power. This is derived
from the three-phase voltage and current measured values.
After an approved time delay (to be specified by the turbogenerator unit manufacturer), the trip command is issued. Overcurrent and undervoltage pickups act as additional restraining
quantities. Additionally, the generator must be operated beforehand with a minimum active power and fall below an active
power threshold.
*In preparation
Optionally, the auxiliary contacts of the local circuit breaker are

evaluated in order to prevent overfunction.
Temperature supervision (ANSI 38)
The temperatures (e.g. winding or oil temperatures) are
acquired with an external temperature monitoring device.
Typical sensors are Pt 100, Ni 100 and Ni 120. The temperatures
are transmitted to the protection via serial interface or via
Ethernet interface and the temperature monitoring function
monitors whether they exceed set limits. There are two thresholds per temperature measuring point. The function is designed
so that up to 12 temperatures can be processed. The function
also includes integrated broken-wire monitoring which sends
alarms referring to the measuring points.
Underexcitation protection (ANSI 40)
The generator power diagram describes the stability limits. In
the per-unit view it can easily be transformed into an admittance diagram by changing the axis labels. The underexcitation
protection monitors the stability limits and prevents damage in
the generator from pulling out of synchronism (asynchronous
running) as a result of problems with the excitation or voltage
control during underexcited operation.
The protection function offers three characteristics for monitoring the static as well as dynamic stability. A quick protection
reaction is achieved via binary trip initiation if there is an excitation outage and short-time tripping is enabled. Alternatively, the
excitation voltage can be measured by a measuring transducer
and the release signal for falling below the threshold value can
be evaluated. The characteristic curve lines enable an optimal
adaptation of the protection to the generator diagram (see
Figure 3.2/6). The setting values can be read directly from the
per-unit view of the diagram.
The admittance is calculated from the positive-sequence system
quantities of the three-phase currents and voltages. This guarantees correct behavior of the protection function even under
asymmetric power system conditions. If the voltage deviates
from the rated voltage, the admittance calculation provides the
advantage that the characteristics run in the same direction as
the generator power diagram shifts.
[dw_7UM8_kraftwerksentkuppl, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/5 Setup of the function and principal logic

3.2
Undercurrent protection (ANSI 37)

Undercurrent protection detects the falling edge or dropping
current flow. This may be due to switching operations, such as
by a higher level circuit breaker, or by decreasing loads, such as
pumps running empty.
[dw_charac-underexcitation-protection, 1, en_US]
In both situations, it may be necessary to open the local circuit

breaker in order to prevent consequential damage. The undercurrent protection handles this task.
Figure 3.2/6 Characteristic of the underexcitation protection
The function consists of an undercurrent stage with a currentindependent time delay. A maximum of two stages can be operated in parallel.
Asymmetrical current loading of the three windings of a generator result in heat buildup in the rotor because of the developing reverse field. The protection detects an asymmetric
loading of three-phase machines. It operates on the basis of
Unbalanced-load protection (ANSI 46)
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Negative-sequence system overcurrent protection (ANSI 46)
symmetric components. The protection function evaluates the
negative-sequence current and prevents thermal overloading of
the rotor of electric machines (generators, motors). The thermal
behavior is modeled using the integral method.
The following equation forms the basis of the protection function.
Directional negative-sequence protection with definitetime

delay (ANSI 46, 67)
This function serves as the reserve short-circuit protection for
asymmetrical faults. With the negative-sequence system,
various monitoring and protection tasks can be realized:
Detection of 1 or 2-phase short circuits in the network with a

higher sensitivity than in classic overcurrent protection
Detection of phase conductor interruptions in the primary

system and in the current transformer secondary circuits
[fo_Schieflastschutz, 1, en_US]
current transformers
Where
K
Constant of the machine (5 s to 40 s)
I2
Negative sequence current
I N, M
Rated current of the machine
A dependent characteristic results as the operate curve. Small

unbalanced load currents result in longer tripping times. To
prevent overfunction when there are large unbalanced load
currents (for example, with asymmetric short circuits), large
negative-sequence system currents (approx. 10*I permissible)
are limited. In addition, the continuous additional unbalanced
load is monitored, and if the threshold is exceeded, an alarm
indication is issued after a time delay.
Negative-sequence system overcurrent protection (ANSI 46)
The protection function determines the negative sequence
current out of phase currents. The negative sequence current
can be referred to the object nominal current or to the positive
sequence current (convenient for broken wire monitoring).
With the transformer, the negative phase sequence current
protection can be used as sensitive backup protection on the
supply side for detecting low-current single-phase short circuit
and double-phase faults. This application is well suited for
detecting low voltage single-phase faults which do not generate
high voltage zero sequence currents (e.g. vector group Dyn).
With the negative-sequence system, various monitoring and
protection tasks can be realized:
Detection of 1 or 2-phase short circuits in the network with a

higher sensitivity than in classic overcurrent protection
(Setting lower than the object nominal current)
Detection of phase current interruptions in the primary
system and in the current transformer secondary circuits
3.2
Location of short circuits or reversals in the connections to the

Indication of unbalanced conditions in the energy system

Protection of electrical machines following asymmetrical
loads that are caused by asymmetrical voltages or phase
currents (for example through a defective fuse).
The function comes factory-set with 1 stage. A maximum of 6

stages can be operated simultaneously. If the device is equipped
with the inrush-current detection function, the tripping stages
can be stabilized against tripping due to transformer inrush
currents.
3.2/7
Location of short circuits or reversals in the connections to the

Indication of asymmetrical states in the energy system
Protection of electrical machines following asymmetrical
loads that are caused by asymmetrical voltages or conductor

interruptions (for example through a defective fuse).
The function comes factory-set with 1 stage. A maximum of

6 stages can be operated simultaneously. If the device is
equipped with the inrush-current detection function, the tripping stages can be stabilized against tripping due to transformer
inrush currents.
Overvoltage protection functions (ANSI 59, 47, 59N)
Overvoltages occur, for example, in long lines with little or no
load. Another cause can be faults in the voltage regulation
(controller faults, maloperation). The overvoltage protection
monitors the permissible voltage range, protects equipment
from subsequent damage through overvoltages and serves to
decouple systems (e.g. wind energy infeeds).
Various overvoltage protection functions are available. By
default, two stages are preconfigured. Up to three identical
stages are possible.
The following functions are available:
Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 59)
Optionally, measurement of phase-to-phase voltages or

phase-to-ground voltages
Method of measurement: optionally, measurement of the

fundamental component or of the effective value (RMS
value).
Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage
(ANSI 59)
Capturing symmetrical, stationary overvoltages with positive

sequence voltage
Method of measurement: calculation of positive-sequence

Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage and

compounding in line protection devices (ANSI 59)
By means of capacitive line impedances, stationary overvoltages at the opposite end of the line can arise (Ferranti
effect).
Method of measurement: The positive-sequence system of
the voltage is calculated at the other end of the line by means

of the local, measured voltages and current using the equivalent circuit of the line.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Starting-time supervision (ANSI 48)
Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage
(ANSI 47)
IEC 60076-7 and IEEE C57.91 and calculates three relevant variables for the protection function:
Monitoring the power system and electric machines for
Hot spot temperature

Relative aging
Load reserve until warning / alarm indication.
voltage unbalance (negative sequence voltage)
Method of measurement: calculation of negative-sequence

Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage / residual

voltage (ANSI 59N/64)
Detection of ground faults in isolated or resonant-grounded
systems and electric operational equipment (e.g. machines)
Detection of the ground-faulted phase (optional)

Measurement procedure: Measurement of the displacement
voltage directly at the broken-delta winding or calculation of

the zero-sequence voltage from the phase-to-ground voltages
Measuring methods: Optionally, measurement of the funda-
mental component (standard or with especially strong attenuation of harmonics and transients) or of the RMS value.
Overvoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 59)
Capture of any 1-phase overvoltage for special applications

Measuring methods: Optionally, measurement of the fundamental component or of the effective value (RMS value).
Starting-time supervision (ANSI 48)

The starting-time supervision protects the motor against too
long starting processes. In particular, rotor-critical high voltage
motors can quickly be heated above their thermal limits when
multiple start-ups occur in a short period of time. If start-ups are
prolonged, e.g., in the event of excessive voltage drops when
starting the motor, excessive load torques, or a locked rotor, the
protection device initiates a trip signal. Figure 3.2/7 shows the
thermal characteristic of the function. Different maximum
starting times are taken into account depending on the cold or
warm condition of the motor.
These variables can be used to generate an alarm. The hot spot

temperature can also trigger tripping. Calculation of the hot
spot temperature depends on the upper transformer oil temperature, the cooling method, the load factor, the transformer
dimension, the oil and winding time constant and a number of
other factors according to IEC 60076-7 and IEEE C57.91.
The upper oil temperature is sensed via the temperature measuring points. Up to 12 temperature measuring points can be
transferred to the protection relay via an RTD box.One of these
measuring points can be chosen for calculation of the hot spot
temperature in the oil.
The customer can set additionally required factors, such as type
of cooling and dimension of the transformer, in the function.
The relative aging is acquired cyclically and summated to form
the total aging.
Stator overload protection (ANSI 49S)
The function of the thermal stator overload protection protects
the motor against thermal overload by monitoring the thermal
state of the stator.
The thermal stator overload protection calculates the overtemperature from the measured phase currents according to a
thermal single body model. The RMS value is determined per
phase from the highly sampled measured current values (8 kHz).
All quantities which cause heating are taken into account
through the wide frequency operating range.
Stages
A current and thermal alarm stage is provided for the thermal
overload protection to initiate an alarm before tripping. The tripping time characteristics are exponential functions according to
IEC 60255-8. The preload is considered in the tripping times /
operate time for overloads.
Startup overcurrent protection (ANSI 50)*
Gas turbines are powered up via starting converters. The startup
overload protection detects short circuits in the low frequency
range (from about 2-3 Hz) and is designed as a definite timeovercurrent protection. The pickup value is set below the rated
current. The function is only active during startup (blocking by
open circuit breaker of the starting converter). At frequencies
higher than 10 Hz, the sampling-frequency tracking activates
and then the other short-circuit functions are active.
[dwtherms-200712-03.tif, 1, en_US]
3.2
Figure 3.2/7 Thermal characteristic of the starting-time supervision

*In preparation
Hot spot calculation (ANSI 49H)
Circuit-breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
The hot spot calculation function protects the transformer windings from thermal destruction by excessive load currents. Hot
spot calculation takes account of the following standards
The circuit-breaker failure protection is circuit-breaker-related in

the function group circuit breaker. Each circuit breaker has to be
provided with its own circuit-breaker failure protection. The
circuit-breaker failure protection incorporates a two-stage
design. If the fault current has not disappeared after a settable
time, a retrip command or the busbar trip command will be
generated. The correct circuit-breaker operation is monitored via
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection External trip initiation
current measurement and via additional circuit-breaker
contacts. The current detection logic is phase-segregated and
can therefore also be used in 1-pole tripping schemes.
The circuit-breaker failure protection can be initiated by all integrated protection functions as well as by external devices via
binary input signals or by communication with GOOSE message
in IEC 61850 systems. To increase operational reliability, an
external start can be applied with two binary inputs in parallel.
For 1-pole and 3-pole starting separate delay times are available.
For applications with two current transformers per feeder, e.g.
breaker-and-a-half, ring bus or double circuit-breaker applications, the SIPROTEC 5 device can be configured with two independent circuit-breaker failure protection functions.
Any signals from external protection and monitoring devices can
be used for trip initiation. These signals can be included in the
processing of indications and trip commands or for starting a
fault record.
The external trip initiation works like a protection function. This
allows easy integration of mechanical protection devices (e.g.
pressure or oil level monitors or Buchholz relays).
The required number of external trip initiations can be selected
depending on the application
(ANSI 50HS)
When a faulted line is switched on, undelayed tripping is
possible. In the case of high fault currents this overcurrent
protection with instantaneous tripping effects a very rapid tripping when switching on to faults.
The function is factory-set with one stage. Within the function, a
maximum of two stages can be operated at the same time. All
stages are of identical design The actual switch-on detection
takes place in the switching state detection. This is either
directly activated when switching on manually, or automatically
determined from the measured values (current, voltage) or by
means of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
The current stage must be set via the maximum throughflowing short-circuit current or the inrush current if used in the
transformer application.
End-fault protection (ANSI 50EF)
3.2
Without special measures the installation location of the current

transformer deter mines the measuring zone of the differential
protection. If the circuit breaker is open, the zone between the
current transformer and the circuit breaker can be optimally
protected by the end-fault protection. A current detected with
an open circuit breaker indicates a fault in the relevant zone.
The fault can be cleared by tripping the surrounding circuit
breakers.
In conjunction with the busbar protection, the response to a
fault depends on the installation location of the current transformer. In the case of busbar-side current transformers, immediate and selective tripping of the busbar section is performed.
On line-side current transformers, the end-fault protection can
cause tripping of the circuit breaker at the opposite end through
a transmission facility.
3.2/9
Circuit-breaker restrike protection (ANSI 50RS)

The Circuit-breaker restrike protection function monitors circuitbreaker restrikes, e.g. caused by overvoltage at the circuitbreaker poles following a capacitor bank shutdown. The function will generate a backup tripping signal in case of a circuitbreaker restrike.
Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault (SOTF)
This function is available for applications where the overcurrent
protection with rapid tripping (50HS) is insuffi cient or is not
used at all. It also allows rapid tripping in the case of lower fault
currents. The function has no own measuring function. It is
linked at its input side with the pickup (measurement) of
another protection function, e.g. the element of an overcurrent
protection and it will trip if switched on to a short circuit. Typically, such protection levels are confi gured which trip with a
delay themselves. The actual energization detection is made in
the switching state detection.
Any signal from an external or internal protection or supervision
function can be coupled into the trip logic of the device by
means of binary inputs or by serial communication. The trip
command may be delayed. 1-pole tripping is available if device
and circuit breaker are capable of 1-pole operation.
Load-jam protection (ANSI 50L)
The load-jam protection function is used to protect motors
during sudden rotor blocking. Damage to drives, bearings and
other mechanic motor components can be avoided or reduced
by means of quick motor shutdown.
Rotor blocking results in a current jump in the phases. The
current jump is used as a distinguishing criterion by the function.
The thermal overload protection can pickup as soon as the parameterized threshold values of the thermal replica are exceeded.
The load-jam protection, however, is able to detect a locked
rotor quicker and in this way to reduce possible damage to the
motor and driven equipment.
Overcurrent protection, phases and ground
(ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N)
The overcurrent protection functions for phases and ground
detect short circuits on electrical equipment. The non-directional overcurrent protection is suitable as main protection for
single-sided infeed radial power systems or open-circuited ring
systems. As a backup or emergency overcurrent protection, it
can be used alongside the main protection, for example, on
lines or transformers. With transformers, the preferred application is the backup protection for downstream power supply
units.
Two independent overcurrent-protection stages (definite timeovercurrent protection stages) and a dependent overcurrentprotection stage (inverse time-overcurrent protection stage) are
preconfigured. Additional definite time-overcurrent protection
stages, as well as one stage with a user-defined characteristic
curve, can be configured within this function.
All the usual characteristic curves according to IEC and ANSI/IEEE
are available for the inverse time-overcurrent protection stages,
see for example Figure 3.2/8.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Overcurrent protection, single-phase (ANSI 50N/51N)
The stages of the overcurrent protection are, apart from the
characteristic, structured identically.
They can be blocked individually via binary input or by other

functions (for example, inrush-current detection, automatic
reclosing, cold-load pickup detection)
Each stage can be stabilized against over-responding because

of transformer inrush currents
Each stage can be operated as an alarm stage (no operate

indication)
You can select between the measurement of the fundamental

component and the measurement of the RMS value for the
method of measurement
The ground function evaluates the calculated zero-sequence

current (3I0) or the measured ground current
Dropout delays can be set individually.
be used for special applications which require a very sensitive

current measurement. Pickup and trip signals can be stored in
the separate ground fault buffer.
Intermittent ground-fault protection
Intermittent (re-striking) faults occur due to insulation weaknesses in cables or as a result of water penetrating cable joints.
Such faults either simply cease at some stage or develop into
lasting short-circuits. During intermittent activity, however, starpoint resistors in networks that are impedance-grounded may
undergo thermal overloading. The normal ground-fault protection cannot reliably detect and interrupt the current pulses,
some of which can be very brief.
The selectivity required with intermittent ground-faults is
achieved by summating the duration of the individual pulses
and by triggering when a (settable) summed time and a fault
state is reached. The response threshold IIE > evaluates the
r.m.s. value, referred to one systems period.
If the device is used in a transformer feeder, high inrush
currents can be expected when the transformer is switched on.
These can reach many times the rated current and flow for
several tens of milliseconds to several seconds, depending on
the size and design of the transformer. The inrush current detection function detects the transformer energizing and generates
a blocking signal for protection functions that would spuriously
respond to the transformer inrush current. This enables these
protection functions to be sensitive.
To detect transformer energizing reliably, the function uses the
"harmonic analysis" and "CWA methods" (current waveform
analysis) measuring methods. The two methods work in parallel
and combine the results with a logical OR. The result is a "1outof- 2 decision," which increases the availability of the electrical installation.
Switching protection (ANSI 50/27)
[IEC Kennlinien, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/8 IEC characteristic curves of the normal inverse type
Overcurrent protection, single-phase (ANSI 50N/51N)

In the case of transformers, the preferred application is backup
protection for power system components connected to the
grounded neutral winding. The neutral point current of the
transformer is processed directly. Alternately, the function can
also be used for differential high-impedance ground fault
protection.
A further application is tank protection on transformers installed
on insulating mountings.
The structure and scope of the protection function is identical to
the time-overcurrent protection ground function (ANSI 50N/
51N).
Sentitive ground protection (ANSI 50Ns/51Ns)
The sensitive ground-current protection function detects ground
currents in systems with isolated or resonant neutral. It can also
The protection function has the task of limiting harm, due to

accidental switching of the circuit breaker, to generators that
are stationary or already started but not yet excited or synchronized. The voltage prescribed by the power system allows the
generator to start with a great amount of slip as an asynchronous machine. As a consequence, unacceptably high currents
are induced in the rotor. Logic, consisting of sensitive current
measurement for each phase, instrument transformers, time
control and blocking starting at a minimum voltage, causes an
immediate trip command. If the fuse-failure monitor responds,
this function is inactive.
Shaft-current protection (ANSI 50GN)
3.2
The protection function is required in particular for hydro generators. Because of design constraints, hydro generators have relatively long shafts. Due to different causes, such as friction,
magnetic fields of the generators and still others, a voltage can
develop through the shaft, which then acts as a voltage source.
This induced voltage of approximately 10 to 30 V is a function of
load, plant and machine. If the oil film on a bearing of the shaft
is too thin, this can result in electric breakdown. Due to the low
impedance (shaft, bearing and ground), greater currents can
flow that would result in the destruction of the bearing. Experience shows that currents greater than 1 A are critical for the
bearing. Because different bearings can be affected, the current
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection (ANSI 51V)
flowing in the shaft is detected by a special core balance current
transformer (folding transformer).
The shaft-current protection processes this current and trips
when there is a threshold-value violation. In addition to the
fundamental component, the 3rd harmonic as well as the
current mixture (1st and 3rd harmonic) can be evaluated. The
measurand as well as the threshold value are set during
commissioning. A high degree of measuring accuracy (minimum
secondary threshold is 0.3 mA) is achieved by the selected
measurement technology.
Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection (ANSI 51V)
Short-circuit and backup protection are also integrated here. It is
used where power system protection operates with currentdependent protection equipment.
There are 3 different forms of the function (stage types)
Controlled
The current function can be controlled via an evaluation of the

machine voltage. The controlled version triggers the sensitively set current stage. In the voltage-dependent version, the
current pickup value drops in a linear relationship with dropping
voltage. The fuse-failure monitor prevents overfunction.
IEC and ANSI characteristics are supported (Table 3.2/1).
Supported inverse-time characteristic curves
ANSI / IEEE
IEEE / IEC 60255-3
Inverse
Moderately inverse
Very inverse
Extremely inverse
Fully inverse
Table 3.2/1 Supported inverse-time characteristic curves
3.2
Peak overvoltage protection for capacitors (ANSI 59C)

The dielectric of a capacitor is stressed by the applied peak
voltage. Excessive peak voltages can therefore destroy the
dielectric. IEC and IEEE standards defi ne for how long capacitors
can withstand what overvoltages.
The function calculates the peak voltage phase-selectively from
the fundamental and the superimposed harmonics. The peak
voltage is calculated from the phase currents by integration.
The function provides various types of stage with different delay
times:
Stage with an inverse characteristic, according to IEC and IEEE

standards
Stage with a user-defi ned characteristic

Stage with a defi nite-time characteristic
Voltage-dependent
Undervoltage stability.
Characteristic curve
The arc protection function contains a self-monitoring function.

This function monitors the optical arc sensors and the fiber-optic
cables.
For generator protection applications, the function undervoltage stability is frequently used. If the exciting transformer is
connected directly to the generator bus and a short circuit
occurs, the excitation voltage drops. As a result, the synchronous generated voltage and with it the short-circuit current are
reduced and can drop below the pickup value. With the undervoltage stability feature, the pickup is maintained. If an external
error is cleared according to protective grading, the voltage
recovery results in the dropout of the pickup maintenance. If the
voltage fails due to an error in the voltage transformer circuit,
this does not result in an overfunction. A pickup additionally
causes an overcurrent.
Up to four stages of the type with a defi nite-time characteristic

can be set up concurrently.
Interturn fault protection (ANSI 59N (IT))*
The interturn fault protection is used to detect short circuits
between the turns within a winding (phase) of the generator. In
this case, relatively high ring currents flow in the short-circuited
turns and result in damage to the winding and stator. The
protection function is distinguished by high sensitivity. The
residual voltage across the broken-delta winding is detected via
3 two-pole isolated voltage transformers. In order to be insensitive to ground faults, the isolated voltage transformer neutral
point must be connected via a high-voltage cable to the generator neutral point. The neutral point of the voltage transformer
must not be grounded; otherwise, also the generator neutral
point would be grounded and every ground fault would result in
a single-pole ground fault. In the case of an interturn fault, the
result would be a drop in voltage in the affected phase. This ultimately leads to a residual voltage that is detected across the
broken-delta winding. The sensitivity is limited more by the
winding asymmetries and less by the protection device. The
protection function processes the voltage across the brokendelta winding and determines the fundamental component. The
selected filter design suppresses the effect of higher frequency
oscillations and eliminates the disruptive influence of the 3rd .
In this way, the required measuring sensitivity is achieved.
*In preparation
Arc Protection
The arc protection function detects electric arcs in switchgears
through optical sensors. Arcs are detected reliably and quickly as
they develop, and the protective device can trip immediately
and without delay times.
Detection of arcs is either purely optical, or optionally using an
additional current criterion to avoid overfunctioning.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Direct voltage / direct current protection (ANSI 59N (DC), 50N (DC))*
former. The direction of the error is determined from residual
voltage and ground current. The vector can easily be adapted to
the plant conditions. An effective protection of a generator in
bus connection is realized in this way. During startup, the
residual voltage measurement must also be activated because in
some cases the ground current source (connected power system
or loading device on the busbar) is absent. The stator groundfault protection function is therefore realized so that it has
different stage types. These are to be loaded in the devices
depending on the application (block or bus connection).
Stage types:
Residual voltage measurement (evaluation of the zerosequence voltage) V0>
[dw_7um85-Ausf-bsp, 1, en_US]
Directional 3I0 stage with (V0, 3I0) measurement (freely
Figure 3.2/9 Implementation example
adjustable direction straight line)
Direct voltage / direct current protection (ANSI 59N (DC),

50N (DC))*
Hydro generators or gas turbines are started via starting
converters. A ground fault in the intermediate circuit of the
starting converter results in the direct voltage shift and thus a
direct current. Because neutral-point or grounding transformers
have a lower ohmic resistance than the voltage transformers,
the majority of the direct current flows through them. There is
therefore a danger of destruction from thermal overload. The
direct current is detected via a shunt transformer (measuring
transducer or special transformer). Depending on the version of
the measuring transducer, currents or voltages are fed to the
7UM85.
The measuring algorithm filters out the DC component and
makes the threshold value decision. The protection function is
active starting at 0 Hz. If a voltage is transmitted by the measuring transducer for protection, the connection must be
designed in an interference-immune and short manner. Transmission as a 4 to 20 mA signal brings advantages because
applied currents are insensitive to disturbances and at the same
time broken-wire monitoring is possible.
The function can also be used for special applications. Therefore, for the quantity present at the input the RMS value is evaluated over a broad frequency range.
*In preparation
90% stator ground-fault protection (ANSI 59N, 67Ns)

With generators that operate on an isolated basis, a ground fault
is expressed by the occurrence of a residual voltage. In a unit
connection, the residual voltage is a selective protection criterion. If generator and busbar (bus connection) are directly
connected to each other, the direction of the flowing ground
current must also be evaluated for a selective sensitive groundfault detection. The protection function measures the residual
voltage either at the generator neutral point via a voltage transformer or neutral-point transformer or one the outgoing line via
the broken-delta winding of a voltage transformer or grounding
transformer. Alternatively, the residual voltage (zero-sequence
voltage) can also be calculated from the phase-to-ground
voltages. 85 % to 95 % of the stator winding of a generator can
be protected depending on the selected load resistor.
For the ground current measurement, a sensitive current input
is used. It should be connected to a core balance current trans-
Non-directional 3I0 stage

Stator ground-fault protection with 3rd harmonic
(ANSI 27TH/59TH, 59THD)
Due to design constraints, a generator can produce a 3rd
harmonic voltage that forms a zero-sequence system. It is verifiable by a broken-delta winding on the generator bus or by a
voltage transformer or neutral-point transformer on the generator neutral point. The voltage amplitude depends on the
machine and operation.
A ground fault in the vicinity of the neutral point results in the
voltage shift of the 3rd harmonic voltage (drop within the
neutral point and increase on the outgoing line). In combination
with the 90 % stator ground-fault protection (V0>) 100 % of the
stator winding is protectable.
The protection function is designed in such a way that different
measuring methods can be selected for different applications
are possible.
A 3rd harmonic undervoltage protection at the generator

neutral point
A 3rd harmonic overvoltage protection at the generator bus.

A 3rd harmonic differential voltage protection (with measurands of the neutral point and the outgoing line)
A typical application is the 3rd harmonic undervoltage protection at the generator neutral point. The protection function is
only usable with a unit connection.
To prevent overfunctions, a release is issued if a minimum active
power is exceeded and the generator voltage is within the
permissible voltage range.
The final protection setting can only be made through a primary
testing of the generator. If the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic is
too small, the protection function cannot be used.
3.2
100% stator ground-fault protection with 20-Hz coupling

(ANSI 64S)
The coupling of a 20-Hz voltage has proven to be a safe and reliable method for detecting errors in the neutral point or in the
vicinity of the neutral point of generators in unit connection. In
contrast to the 3rd harmonic criterion, it depends on the generator properties and the operating mode. Moreover, a measurement during plant standstill is possible. The protection function
is designed in such a way that it detects ground faults in the
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Current-unbalance protection for capacitor banks (ANSI 60C)
entire generator (true 100 %) as well as in all electrically
connected plant components.
The protection function detects the coupled 20-Hz voltage and
the continuous 20-Hz current. The interfering quantities, such as
the stator capacitances, are eliminated and the ohmic fault
resistance is determined through a mathematical model. This
ensures, on the one hand, a high sensitivity and, on the other
hand, the use of generators having ground capacitances, such
as in hydropower plants.
Angle errors or contact resistances through the grounding transformer or neutral-point transformer are detected during
commissioning and corrected in the algorithm. The protection
function has a warning and tripping stage. In addition, there is
measuring circuit monitoring and the detection of an outage of
the 20-Hz generator. Furthermore, the protection function has
an independent frequency measurement function and in plants
that are started via frequency converter (for example, gas
turbines) can control the function in such a way that an overfunction is prevented
Independent of the ground resistance calculation, the protection function as a backup function additionally evaluates the
magnitude of the current RMS value.
If a parallel load resistor (grounding transformer with load
resistor on the undervoltage side of the power unit) is also
present in plants with generator switches, this is automatically
corrected. The control is via a binary input that receives its signal
from the circuit breaker auxiliary contact.
Current-unbalance protection for capacitor banks (ANSI 60C)
Capacitor banks are often implemented in "H conections" (see
Figure 3.2/10). In such implementations, failure of a single
capacitor element unbalances the capacitor bank and therefore
results in a low unbalance current via the cross-connection.
The function measures the unbalance current in the crossconnection phase-selectively. The overcurrent stage will pick up
after a threshold value is exceeded and will trip after a time
delay. The counter stage causes an alarm or tripping if a specified number of faulty C elements has been determined.
To meet the requirements that even the smallest unbalance
current, resulting from a defective capacitor element, must be
detected, it is necessary to compensate for operational unbalance, which also results in unbalance currents. The function
permits both static and dynamic compensation. The latter must
be used if dynamic environmental influences such as temperature fluctuations are already causing relevant operational unbalances.
3.2
Moreover, the measured unbalance can optionally be normalized with the current of the capacitor bank to ensure constant
sensitivity even at different powers.
[dw_CapBank_SLE_vereinfacht, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/10 Protection of a capacitor bank in H connection
Measuring-voltage failure detection (ANSI 60FL)

This function monitors the voltage transformer secondary
circuits:
Non-connnected transformers
Pickup of the voltage transformer circuit-breaker (in the event
of short circuits in the secondary circuit)
Series faults in one or more measuring loops.

All these events cause a voltage of 0 in the voltage-transformer
secondary circuits, which can lead to failures of the protection
functions.
The following protection functions are automatically blocked in
the case of a measuring-voltage failure:
Distance protection
Directional negative-sequence protection
Ground-fault protection for high-resistance faults in
grounded-neutral systems.
Rotor ground-fault protection (ANSI 64F)

The protection function detects ground faults in the rotor
(including rotor circuit). High-impedance faults are already
signaled by a warning stage. The operational crew can respond
accordingly (for example at the slip rings). When there is a lowimpedance ground fault, tripping occurs and the machine is
stopped. Thus, the critical case of a 2nd Ground fault that is a
turn-to-turn fault of the rotor winding is prevented. The turn-toturn fault can produce magnetic imbalances that result in a
destruction of the machine due to the extreme mechanical
forces
Depending on the application, you can select from 3 different
implementations.
Rotor ground-current measurement I>, fn
In this method, a power-frequency voltage (50 Hz, 60 Hz) is fed
into the rotor circuit via a coupling apparatus (7XR61 +
3PP1336). Through the protection function, the current
threshold is monitored via a sensitive current input. Two current
stages can be set (warning, tripping). In addition, the rotor
circuit is monitored for open circuit by an undercurrent stage.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Restart inhibit (ANSI 66)
Rotor resistance measurement R<, fn
In this method, a power-frequency voltage (50 Hz, 60 Hz) is also
fed into the rotor circuit via a coupling apparatus (7XR61 +
3PP1336). In addition to the current measurement via the sensitive current input, the coupled voltage is also evaluated. The
rotor grounding resistance is calculated using a mathematical
model. This procedure eliminates the interfering influence of
the rotor capacitance to ground and increases the sensitivity. In
the case of interference-free excitation voltage, fault resistances
of up to 30 k can be detected. The function has a two-tier
design (warning and tripping stages). In addition, the rotor
circuit is monitored for open circuit by an undercurrent stage.
Rotor resistance measurement R<, 1-3 Hz *
In this method, a low-frequency, square-wave voltage (typically,
1 3 Hz) is coupled into the rotor circuit through a ballast
(7XT71) and resistor device (7XR6004). Through this method,
the interfering influence of the rotor capacitance to ground is
eliminated and a good signal-to-noise ratio for the harmonic
components (for example, 6th harmonic) of the exciter device is
achieved. A high sensitivity in the measurement is possible.
Fault resistances up to 80 k can be detected. The rotor ground
circuit is monitored for continuity by evaluation of the current
during polarity reversal.
Due to the high sensitivity, this function is recommended for
larger generators.
The function requires a hardware configuration of the 7UM85
with a IO210.
*In preparation
Restart inhibit (ANSI 66)

The restart inhibit prevents the motor from restarting if the
permitted temperature limit would thus be exceeded.
The rotor temperature of a motor is far below the permissible
temperature limit during normal operation and also under
increased load conditions. High starting currents required when
starting the motor increase the risk of the rotor being thermally
damaged rather the stator due to overheating. This is related to
the short thermal constant of the rotor. To avoid tripping of the
circuit breaker due to multiple motor start-up attempts, the
restart of the motor has to be inhibited if it is obvious that the
temperature limit of the rotor has been exceeded during a
startup attempt (siehe Figure 3.2/11).
[Dw_PrReLo_02, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/11 Temperature curve of the rotor and repeated motor startup
Directional overcurrent protection, phases and ground

(ANSI 67, 67N)
The functions directional time-overcurrent protection for phases
and ground sense short circuits in electrical equipment. With
directional time-overcurrent protection, the units can also be
used in power systems in which not only the overcurrent criterion but also the direction of power fl ow to the fault location is
a selectivity criterion, e.g. in single-feed parallel lines, in doublefeed lines, or in looped lines.
Two defi nite time-overcurrent protection stages (DTL stages)
and one inverse time-overcurrent protection stage (IDMTL
stage) are preconfi gured. Further defi nite time-overcurrent
protection stages and one stage with a user-defi ned characteristic can be confi gured within the function.
For the inverse time-overcurrent protection stages, all common
characteristics according to IEC and ANSI/IEEE are available.
The Figure 3.2/12 shows how the direction characteristic of the
ground function can be freely configured. The characteristic can
be rotated for the phase function.
3.2
[dw_DwDirRot, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/12 Direction characteristics of the extended ground function
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Directional ground-fault protection with phase selector (ANSI 67G, 50G, 51G)
Apart from the characteristics, the stages have an identical
structure.
Blocking functions of the stage: on measuring voltage failure,
via binary input signal, or by other functions (automatic reclosure, cold load pickup)
Every stage can be restrained against over-response caused by

transformer inrush currents
The direction can be set for each stage

The stage can optionally be used for directional comparison
protection. Both a release and a blocking method can be
implemented
Each stage can be used as an alarm stage (no trip signal)

For the measuring method, measurement of the fundamental
or the rms value can be selected
The ground function evaluates the calculated zero-sequence

current (3I0) or the measured ground current
The function is equipped with special digital fi lter algorithms,

providing the elimination of higher harmonics. This feature is
particularly important for low zero sequence fault currents
which usually have a high content of 3rd and 5th harmonics.
Dynamic setting change
Dynamic setting change of pickup values and delay time settings
can be activated depending on the status of an auto-reclosure
function. An instantaneous switch-on to fault is applicable for
each stage.
Phase selector
The ground-fault protection is suitable for 3-phase and, optionally, for 1-phase tripping by means of a sophisticated phase
selector. It may be blocked during the dead time of 1-pole autoreclose cycles or during pickup of a main protection function.
Logarithmically inverse characteristics are also available for
Directional sensitive ground-fault detection (ANSI 67Ns,

ANSI 51Ns, 59N)
Directional ground-fault protection with phase selector

(ANSI 67G, 50G, 51G)
The directional sensitive ground-fault detection function detects

ground faults in isolated and arc-suppression-coil-ground power
systems. Various function stages are available for this purpose
that can also be used in parallel. Thus, the working method of
the function can best be adapted to the conditions of the power
system, the user philosophy and different manifestations of the
error:
the ground stages.
In grounded systems, it may happen that the main protection

sensitivity is not sufficient to detect high-resistance ground
faults. The SIPROTEC 5 device therefore has protection functions
for faults of this nature.
Multiple stages
The ground fault overcurrent protection can be used with 6 definite-time stages (DT) and one inverse-time stage (IDMTL).
The following inverse-time characteristics are provided:
Inverse acc. to IEC 60255-3

ANSI/IEEE inverse
Logarithmic inverse
V0-inverse
S0-inverse.
Appropriate direction decision modes
3.2
5 mA to 100 A with a rated current of 1 A and from 5 mA to

500 A with a nominal current of 5 A. Thus the ground-fault overcurrent protection can be applied with extreme sensitivity.
The direction decision can be determined by the residual current

I0 and the zero sequence voltage V0 or by the negative
sequence components V2 and I2. Using negative-sequence
components can be advantageous in cases where the zero
sequence voltage tends to be very low due to unfavorable zero
sequence impedances.
Overvoltage elements with zero-sequence system / residual

voltage
The zero-sequence voltage (residual voltage) is evaluated as to
threshold-value violation. In addition, the faulty phase can be
determined when the phase-ground voltages are connected.
Directional ground-current elements with direction determination using cos and sin measurement
This is the classical wattmetric (cos , in the arc-suppressioncoil-ground power system) or varmetric (sin , in the isolated
power system) method of measurement for the directional
detection of static ground faults. For direction determination,
the current component which is perpendicular to the set direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive (3I0dir.),
see Figure 3.2/13. The stage is adaptable to the power system
conditions by a corresponding setting (position of the directioncharacteristic curve). Therefore, very sensitive and precise measurements are possible.
In addition or as an alternative to the directional determination

with zero sequence voltage, the ground current of a grounded
power transformer may also be used for polarization. Dual polarization applications can therefore be fulfi lled. Alternatively, the
direction can be determined by evaluation of zero sequence
power. Each stage can be set in forward or reverse direction or
both directions (non-directional).
High sensitivity and stability
The SIPROTEC 5 devices can be provided with a sensitive neutral
(residual) current transformer input. This feature provides a
measuring range for the ground current (fault current) from
[dwcosphi-171012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/13 Direction determination with cos measurement
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Power-swing blocking (ANSI 68)
Directional ground-current element with direction determination using (V, I) measurement
This method can be applied as an alternative to the cos or sin
method if this is desired because of user philosophy. The
direction is found by determining the phase angle between the
angle-error compensated ground current and the rotated zerosequence voltage V0. To take different system conditions and
A subsequent network fault is reliably detected and results in

phase-selective reset of the distance protection blocking by the
power-swing detection.
applications into account, the reference voltage can be rotated

via an adjustable angle. This moves the vector of the rotated
reference voltage close to the vector of the ground current
3I0com. Consequently, the result of direction determination is as
reliable as possible (see also Figure 3.2/12).
Transient ground-fault method
This transient method operates only during the first 1 to
2 periods after fault inception. It determines the direction via
the evaluation of the active energy of the transient process. It is
especially appropriate if direction information is required for
errors that expire again very quickly (after 0.5 to a few periods).
Thus, a use parallel to the stage with cos measurement lends
itself.
[power-swing, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/14 Power-swing detection during 1-pole open condition
Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
This method can also be operated in meshed power systems. It

is also especially well-suited for closed rings because circulating
residual currents are eliminated. Due to additional logic, the
function can also optionally clear a static error.
The circuit breaker coil including its feed lines is monitored with
two binary inputs. An alarm will be generated if there is an interruption in the trip circuit.
Non-directional ground-current stage
In electric power transmission systems electrical stability must

be maintained at all times. If system conditions arise that
threaten the stability measures must be taken to avoid an escalation. One such system is the out-of-step protection. The function can be applied as out-of-step protection or can be integrated into more complex systems for supervision and load
control, i.e. system integrity protection systems (SIPS).
If necessary, a simple, non-directional ground-current stage can

be configured.
General information
In particular in arc-suppression-coil-ground power systems, the
result is a high angular accuracy. For this purpose, the measured
ground current is corrected via the stored error characteristic of
the core balance current transformer (angle error as a function
of the current).
A special algorithm is capable of quickly detecting the fault
extinction. With this detection, the directional ground-current
stages, the direction determination of which is based on the
phase angle relationship between zero-sequence current and
zero-sequence voltage, can be blocked. Thus, the stability is
increased during the decay process of the zero-sequence system
in the resonant-grounded power system. Responses of protective devices and trippings can be saved in the separate groundfault log.
Out-of-step protection (ANSI 78)
The out-of-step function constantly evaluates the impedance

trajectory of the positive sequence impedance. The response
characteristic is defined by impedance zones in the R/X plane.
Accumulators are incremented depending on the point at which
the impedance trajectory enters or exits the associated impedance zone. Tripping or signaling occurs when the set accumulator limits are reached. The out-of-step protection provides up
to four independent impedance zones which can be adjusted
and tilted according to the requirements of stability in the
power network (see Figure 3.2/15
Power-swing blocking (ANSI 68)

Dynamic transient incidents, for instance short-circuits, load
fluctuations, auto-reclosures or switching operations can cause
power swings in the transmission network. During power
swings, large currents along with small voltages can cause
unwanted tripping of distance protection devices. The powerswing blocking function avoids uncontrolled tripping of the
distance protection. Power swings can be detected under
symmetrical load conditions as well as during 1-pole autoreclose cycles
3.2
No settings required
The function requires no settings. The optimal computation is
always obtained by automatic adaptation. During a power-swing
blocking situation all swing properties are constantly supervised.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Automatic reclosing (ANSI 79)
modes are provided in addition to the above mentioned
features:
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase short circuits, no reclosing

for multi-phase faults
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and for 2-phase faults

without ground, no reclosing for multi-phase short circuit
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase fault and 3-pole autore-
closing for multi-phase faults

1-polige AWE bei 1-poligen Fehlern, 3-polige AWE bei mehrpoligen Fehlern
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and for 2-phase faults

without ground and 3-pole auto-reclosure for other faults
Appropriate evolving fault response

3-pole coupling (positive 3-pole tripping) in case of circuitbreaker pole discrepancy.
Voltage-dependent supplementary functions

[impedance zones, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/15 Impedance zones for out-of-step protection
Automatic reclosing (ANSI 79)

About 85% of the arc faults on overhead lines are extinguished
automatically after being tripped by the protection. The overhead line can therefore be re-energized. Reclosure is performed
by an automatic-reclosing function (AR). Each protection function can be confi gured to start or block the auto-reclosure function.
Basic features and operating modes
Tripping controlled start with action time or without action

time
Pickup controlled start with action time or without action time

3-pole auto-reclosing for all types of faults; different dead
times are available depending on the type of fault
Multiple-shot auto-reclosure
Cooperation with the internal or an external synchrocheck
Cooperation with external devices via binary inputs and
outputs or via communication with GOOSE message in
IEC 61850 systems
Monitoring of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact

Dynamic setting change of overcurrent protection elements,
depending on the AR status.
3.2
Two auto-reclosure (AR) functions

For applications with two circuit breakers per feeder, e.g.
breaker-and-a-half, ring bus or double circuit-breaker applications the devices can be confi gured to operate with two independent auto-reclosure functions.
1-pole auto-reclosure
In electrical power systems with grounded system neutral-point
and if the circuit-breaker pole can be operated individually, a 1pole auto-reclosure is usually initiated for 1-phase short circuits.
The integration of auto-reclosure in the feeder protection allows

evaluation of the line-side voltages. A number of voltagedependent supplementary functions are thus available:
DLC
By means of a dead-line check, reclosure is effected only

when the line is de-energized (prevention of asynchronous
circuit-breaker closure), if no synchrocheck can be used
ADT
The adaptive dead time is employed only if auto-reclosure at

the opposite end was successful (reduction of stress on equipment)
RDT
Reduced dead time is employed in conjunction with autoreclosure where no teleprotection is used: When faults within
the overreach zone, but external to the protected line, are
switched off for short-time interruption, the RDT function
decides on the basis of measurement of the reverse polarity
voltage from the opposite end, which has not tripped,
whether or not to reduce the dead time.
Frequency protection (ANSI 81O, 81U)

Frequency deviations are caused by an unbalance between
generated and consumed the active power. Causes are, for
example, load shedding, network disconnections, increased
need for active power, generator failures or faulty functioning of
the power and frequency regulation.
The frequency protection detects frequency deviations in the
network or in electric machines. It monitors the frequency band
and outputs failure indications. In case of critical power
frequency entire generation blocks can be isolated or networks
can be decoupled. To ensure network stability, load shedding
can be initiated.
Different frequency measuring elements with high accuracy and
short pickup times are available. Tripping by frequency measuring elements can be effected either at the local circuit breaker
or at the opposite end by remote tripping.
The following measuring elements are available:
1-pole auto-reclosure functionality is available in SIPROTEC 5

devices with 1-pole tripping capability. The following operating
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R)
Unblocking method
Overfrequency protection (ANSI 81O)

Two preconfigured stages, can be increased up to three stages.
All stages are of identical design.
Underfrequency protection (ANSI 81U)
Three preconfigured stages, can be increased up to five stages.
All stages are of identical design.
Each frequency measurement procedures two measurements:
Angle difference method: Angle change of the voltage phasor

over a time interval
Filter method of measurement: Evaluation of immediate

voltage values with special filters.
For all measuring methods the specific protection functions are

provided in the DIGSI 5-library.
Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R)
Frequency changes can be detected quickly with the rate-offrequency- change protection. The function is able to prevent
unsafe states of the system caused by unbalance between
generated and consumed active power. It is therefore used in
power system disconnection and load shedding measures.
The function provides two types of stages:
df/dt rising
df/dt falling
Of each type of stage, up to 5 stages can be set up in the function.
By defining the measurement window length, either the measuring accuracy or the starting time can be optimized for the
specific application.
On undervoltages, the function is automatically blocked to
exclude imprecise or incorrect measurements.
Teleprotection scheme for distance protection (ANSI 85/21)
A teleprotection scheme is available for fast clearance of faults
up to 100% of the line length.
For conventional signal transmission, the required send and
receive signals can be freely distributed to binary inputs and
outputs. The signals can also be transferred via the protection
interface, a system-wide feature of the SIPROTEC 5 product
family. Transmission via GOOSE messages with IEC 61850
system interfaces is provided as well, if the available communication structures in the switchgear fulfill the requirements as
per IEC 61850-90-1.
The following teleprotection schemes are available for the
distance protection:
Distance protection with underreaching (permissive under-
reach transfer trip)

- Grading time reduction with overreaching zone (transfer
tripping via expanded measuring range)
- Grading time reduction with pickup (intertripping via pickup)
- Intertripping scheme (intertripping underreach protection)
Distance protection with underreaching (permissive overreach

transfer trip)
- Overreaching zone (permissive overreach transfer trip
scheme)
- Directional comparison with directional pickup
- Each scheme in permissive mode can be extended with

unblocking logic
Blocking method
Backward Interlocking
Bus section protection
The send and receive signals are available as general signals or
as phase-selective signals. The phase-selective signals are
advantageous as they ensure reliable 1-pole disconnection,
especially if 1-phase faults occur on different lines. The protection schemes with automatic remote tripping are suitable also
for power lines with more than 2-ended lines, for example teedfeeder lines. Up to 6-ended configurations are possible.
Transient blocking (current reversal monitoring) is provided for
all release and blocking methods in order to suppress interference signals during tripping of parallel lines.
Weak or no infeed: Echo and tripping (ANSI 85/27)
To prevent delayed tripping of distance protection permissive
schemes and ground-fault directional comparison scheme
during weak or zero infeed situations, an echo function is
provided. If no fault detector is picked up at the weak-infeed
end of the line, the signal received here is returned as echo to
allow accelerated tripping at the strong infeed end of the line. It
is also possible to initiate phase-selective tripping at the weakinfeed end. A phase-selective 1-pole or 3-pole trip is issued if a
send signal is received and if the measured voltage drops correspondingly. This feature is available for all permissive underreach and overreach schemes. As an option, the weak infeed
logic can be equipped according to a French specification.
Teleprotection for directional ground-fault protection
(ANSI 85/67N)
For fast clearance of faults up to 100% of the line length the
directional ground-fault protection can be expanded with a teleprotection scheme.
The following schemes are available:
Directional comparison
Blocking
Unblocking
The send and receive signals are available as general signals or
as phase-selective signals in combination with the phase
selector of the directional ground-fault protection. For conventional signal transmission the send and receive signals can be
freely assigned to binary inputs and outputs. The signals can
certainly be transferred via the serial protection data interface, a
SIPROTEC 5-wide system feature. The transmission via GOOSE
messages with IEC 61850-system interfaces is provided as well,
if the available communication structures in the substations
fulfill the intra-substation requirements according to
IEC 61850-90-1.
3.2
The transient blocking (current reversal guard) function can be

enabled in order to suppress the interference signals during tripping of parallel lines. Communication of the teleprotection functions for distance protection and ground-fault protection can
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Line differential protection (ANSI 87L, 87T)
use the same signaling channel or separate and redundant
channels.
Line differential protection (ANSI 87L, 87T)
Line differential protection is a selective short-circuit protection
for overhead lines, cables, and busbars with single-side and
multi-side infeed in radial, looped, or meshed power systems. It
can be used at all voltage levels. Line differential protection
works strictly phase-selectively and allows instantaneous tripping of 1-phase or 3-phase errors at up to six line ends.
Depending on the device variant, one-pole/three-pole
(7SD87/7SL87) or only three-pole tripping
(7SD82/7SD86/7SL82/7SL86) is possible. The devices in a differential protection topology communicate with each other via
protection interfaces (protection communication). The flexible
use of available communication media saves investment in
communication infrastructure and guarantees the protection of
lines of all lengths.
Adaptive measurement
An adaptive measurement method ensures a maximum of sensitivity to detect internal faults under all conditions. To guarantee
highest stability, any measurement or communication errors are
taken into account (see Figure 3.2/16). Simple settings and
supervision functions shorten time of engineering and commissioning:
A sensitive measurement stage (IDiff >) detects high-impedance errors. Special algorithms ensure high stability even
with high-level DC-components in the short-circuit current.
The tripping time of this stage is about 30 ms when standard
output contacts are used
A high-current differential stage (IDiff >>) offers high-speed

fault clearance with very short tripping times when highspeed contacts are used.
No external matching transformers are needed by taking

different current-transformer ratios into consideration.
With the setting of current-transformer error data, the differ-
ential protection device automatically calculates the restraint

current and sets its permissible sensitivity. Thus, no protection
characteristic has to be parameterized. Only IDiff > (sensitive
stage) and IDiff >> (high-current differential stage) must be set

according to the charging current of the line/cable
Enhanced communications features guarantee stability and
accuracy even under disturbed or interrupted connections on

all kinds of transmission media, like optical fibers, control
lines, telephone cables or communication networks.
3.2
Monitoring and display of differential and restraint currents

during normal operation
High stability during external short circuits, even with

different current-transformer saturation levels.
When long lines or cables get switched on, large transient
charging current peaks occur. To avoid higher settings and

less sensitivity of the IDiff >> differential current stage, the
response threshold of the IDiff > stage may be increased for a
settable time interval. This offers higher sensitivity under

normal load conditions.
[AuslseChar, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/16 Tripping characteristics
Charging-current compensation
Particularly with long cables and very long extra-high-voltage
lines, ground capacitances can cause considerable, permanently
flowing capacitive load currents. These must be taken into
account by the tripping threshold of the sensitive differential
protection stage because they generate a differential current.
The charging-current compensation serves to improve the
sensitivity so that maximum sensitivity can be protected even

at high charging currents.
The charging-current compensation requires that local

voltage transformers are connected.
The principle of distributed compensation guarantees

maximum availability, since with local outage of measuring
voltages of a device, the remaining devices continue to guarantee their part of the compensation.
Transformer in the protection range
Apart from normal lines, line differential protection can also
protect lines with a transformer in block connection. The current
transformers selectively delimit the protection range.
A separate transformer protection device can therefore be
omitted, since line differential protection acts as transformer

protection with measuring points that may lie far away from
one another
With few additional transformer parameters such as rated
apparent power, primary voltages, connection symbols and

any neutral-point groundings of the respective windings,
there is no need for external matching transformers
The sensitivity of differential protection can be further
increased by capturing the ground currents of grounded

neutral-point windings
The inrush-current detection function stabilizes the differential protection against tripping due to transformer inrush
currents. This can occur phase-selectively or in 3-phase by
means of the crossblock function.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Line differential protection (ANSI 87L, 87T)
Breaker-and-a-half layouts
Differential protection can easily be integrated into breaker-anda-half layouts. With corresponding hardware extension (see
standard variants), two 3-phase current inputs per device are
configurable. Thus, ultimately topologies of up to 12 measuring
points with 6 devices can be configured. The protection of a
STUB-BUS can be assumed by the separate STUB differential
protection.
Enhanced communications features
The line differential protection uses the protection interfaces in
the "Differential protection" configuration (Type 1, see Protection communication). Different communication modules and
external converters allow the interfacing and use of all available
communication media.
Direct fiber-optic data transmission is immune to electromagnetic disturbances and offers the highest transmission speed
to achieve the shortest tripping times
External communication converters enable communication

via existing control cables, telephone lines or communication
networks.
[dw_ring, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.2/17 Differential protection in ring topologies
The data required for the differential calculations are cyclically

exchanged in full-duplex mode in the form of synchronous,
serial telegrams between the protection devices. Comprehensive supervision functions ensure stability in operation in any
communication environment:
Telegrams are secured with CRC checksums to detect trans-
mission errors immediately. Differential protection processes

only valid telegrams.
Supervision of all communication routes between the device

without the need for additional equipment
Unambiguous identification of each device is ensured by the

assignment of settable communication addresses for each
unit within a differential protection topology
Detection of telegrams reflected back to the sending device in

the communication network
Detection of time delay changes in communication networks

Dynamic compensation of runtimes in the differential meas-
urement and supervision of the maximum permissible signaltransit time
Indication of disturbed communication connections. Faultytelegram counters are available as operational measured
values.
Switched communication networks can lead to unbalance in

the runtimes in receive and transmit directions. The resulting
differential current is taken into account by the adaptive
measuring techniques of the differential protection
With a high-precision 1 s pulse from a GPS receiver, the device
can be synchronized with an absolute, exact time at each line

end. In this way, time delays in receive and transmit path can
be measured exactly. Thus, the differential protection can also
be used in communication networks with a maximum of
sensitivity even under massive runtime unbalance conditions.
[dw_Ketten, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.2/18 Differential protection in chain topologies
Phase-selective circuit-breaker intertripping and remote trip/

indications
Normally, the differential current is calculated for each line
end at the same time. This leads to fast and uniform tripping
times. Under weak infeed conditions, especially when the
differential protection function is combined with an overcurrent pickup, a phase-selective breaker intertripping offers a
tripping of all line ends. Therefore high-speed transfer-trip
signals get transmitted to the other line ends. These transfertrip signals can also be initiated by an external device via
binary inputs. Therefore, they can be used to indicate, for
example, a direction decision of the backup distance protection.
3.2
The protection interfaces can exchange freely configurable,

binary inputs and output signals and measured values with
each other (see protection communication).
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection STUB differential protectionANSI 87 STUB)
Communication topologies/modes of function
Differential protection devices may be arranged in a ring or
daisy-chain topology. A test mode offers advantages during
commissioning and service operations.
In a ring topology, the system tolerates the outage of a data
connection. The ring topology is converted within 20 ms into

a daisy-chain topology, so that the differential protection
function continues to work without interruption.
When a daisy-chain topology is specified by the communication infrastructure, cost effective relays with only one protection interface can be used at both daisy-chain ends.
For important two-end lines, a hot standby transmission is
possible by a redundant communication connection to ensure

high availability. When the main connection is interrupted,
the communication switches over from the main path to the
secondary path.
For service or maintenance reasons, individual differential
protection devices within multi-end topologies can be

removed from the differential protection topology using a
binary input. Switch positions and load currents get checked
before a such a logoff takes effect. The remaining devices
can continue to operate in this reduced topology.
The whole configuration can be shifted into a differential
protection test mode. All functions and indications continue

to be available except the breakers will not trip. In this way,
the local relay can be tested with disconnection or intertripping of the other relays.
STUB differential protectionANSI 87 STUB)

STUB differential protection is a full-fledged line differential
protection, but without communication between the line ends.
It is used with a teed feeder or a breaker-and-a-half scheme,
when a feeder of the line section can no longer be selectively
protected by opening the disconnector (example distance
protection).
The activation of the STUB differential protection occurs through
the feedback of the disconnector position. The SIPROTEC 5 line
protection device must be equipped with two 3-phase current
inputs in its hardware for this. The STUB differential protection
corresponds structurally and with regard to the setting parameters to the line differential protection (ANSI 87L) in all regards,
with the exception of protection data communication. It guarantees the selective protection of the remaining line section and
rapid tripping times up to 10 ms.
Transformer differential protection (ANSI 87T)
3.2
The transformer differential protection is a selective short-circuit

protection for power transformers with different types of design
(standard transformers and autotransformers) and different
connection designs. The number of protectable windings (sides)
and the number of usable measuring points depends on the
device type (see above explanations).
The following properties are essential for the protection function:
Restraint tripping characteristic with freely settable characteristic sections in accordance with Figure 3.2/19
Integrated adaptation to the transformer ratio with different

rated currents of the current transformer (primary and secondary) taken into account
Flexible adaptation to the different transformer vector groups
Flexible Anpassung an die unterschiedlichen Transformatorschaltgruppen.
Adaptive adjustment of the trip characteristics by detection of

the transformer tapping
Additional consideration given to neutral point currents with
grounded winding and thus increase of the sensitivity by one

third
Redundant stabilization procedure (2nd harmonic + curve
wave analysis) to detect safely inrush procedures at the transformer
Further stabilization options through the evaluation of the 3rd
or 5th harmonic in the differential current. The 5th harmonic is

suitable for detecting safely a steady-state overexitation of
the transformer and thus for avoiding an overfunction
Additional stabilization procedures against external faults
with current transformer saturation. The first procedure

responds to high-current faults and monitors the differential
current curve (differential current detected outside the addon stabilization characteristic for a limited time, see Figure
3.2/19). Changeover to an internal fault is safely detected.
The second procedure works with low-current faults. Phaseangle shifts can occur in the secondary current due to the DC
component in the short-circuit current and remanence of the
current transformer. If jumps occur in the stabilization current
and if DC components are detected in the differential current
at the same time, the tripping characteristic is increased for a
limited time
If asynchronous motors are connected to transformers, differential currents can occur due to the distorted transmission of
the starting current. The start detection (jump in the stabilization current and DC component evaluation) will raise the tripping characteristic
High-power internal faults are detected safely and quickly
with the high-current stage IDiff-fast (see Figure 3.2/20). In

order to avoid an overfunction due to q-axis currents (e.g. use
in one-and-a-half layout), the instantaneous values of the
differential and stabilization current are evaluated. Internal
and external faults are safely detected within a few milliseconds.
The protection function was adapted to the special conditions of

the autotransformer in order to ensure the protection of autotransformers. The pure node point protection can be used as an
additional sensitive protection of the autotransformer winding.
The node point protection works parallel to the classical differential protection. The autotransformer banks become highly
sensitive to ground faults and interturn faults with it. Figure
3.2/21 shows the basic idea.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Differential Protection for Phase-Shifting Transformers
stability, an even load distribution in parallel transmission lines
and to avoid unbalance currents in the transmission system
loops. The main function of a phase-shifting transformer is to
change the effective phase shift between the input and output
voltage of a transmission line. In doing this, the function
controls the current load that can be transmitted with one line.
Phase-shifting transformers are integrated in series in the
system to influence the active power flow with additionally fed
voltage. This situation occurs, for example, when the increase in
transmission capacity requires building an additional line.
Specific control of the angle between line current and voltage
enables maximum possible utilization of both lines. A further
typical application is the control of the load flow or of the
energy fl ow direction at the coupling point of 2 systems.
[dwdifaus-030912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/19 Restrain tripping characterisitc of the function Idiff
[dw_PST_DIFF_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/22 Power output distribution between 2 lines with different

phase angle values
[dwidfast-300114-01.tif, 1, en_US]
There are 3 function blocks for adapting the differential protection to different types of phase-shifting transformers:
Figure 3.2/20 Characteristics of the function Idiff-fast
Single-core PST are phase-angle transformers with a

maximum phase shift of 60
Two-core PST are transformers with regulation in quadrature

with a maximum phase shift of 90
Special transformers are transformers with fixed wiring of
windings, which result in a non-integer vector group digit

(e.g. SG 0.25 = 7.5). They can be used as converter transformers, for example.
The transformer differential protection automatically considers

the resulting value and angle changes. This means that the
changes do not need to be considered in the settings of the
pickup characteristic of the differential protection. The reversing
switch enables sign inversion between negative and positive
idling phase shift also under full load. In this case, the blocking
settings of the I-DIFF stage of the differential protection are
adjustable.
3.2
Ground fault differential protection (on the transformer)

(ANSI 87N T)
[dw_spartrafobank, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/21 Protection of an autotransformer through two differential

protection in one device
Differential Protection for Phase-Shifting Transformers

The differential protection function for phase-shifting transformers function (PST) adds to the existing transformer differential protection function (ANSI 87T).
Phase-shifting transformers serve for controlling the reactive
and active power in high-voltage systems. Their goal is voltage
The longitudinal differential protection can detect ground faults

close to the neutral point of a grounded star winding only to a
limited extent. The ground fault differential protection assists
you with this. The neutral-point current and the calculated zerosequence current of the phase currents are evaluated according
to Figure 3.2/23 and Figure 3.2/24. Overfunction in response to
external ground faults is prevented by stabilizing measures. In
addition to the differential and restraint currents, based on the
zero-sequence variables, the phase angles of the zero-sequence
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Differential motor protection (ANSI 87M)
currents between each other are monitored. The tripping variable is the zero-sequence current in the neutral point.
[dwgrdpri-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/23 Ground-fault differential protection basic principle
[dw_fault_M1 side, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/25 Measuring point selection for multiple infeeds on the

neutral side
Differential motor protection (ANSI 87M)
Detects ground faults and multiphase short circuits in motors

Detects short circuits during the operation of motors on
power systems with a grounded neutral point
Is stable during startup processes with current-transformer
saturation through intelligent saturation recognition methods
Triggers safely in the case of internal high-current faults

through an additional high-current element
Differential motor protection is based on a comparison of

currents (Kirchhoff node method). The basic principle is that the
currents add up to zero in the protected object when it is in the
undisturbed operating state. If a differential current occurs, this
is a sure sign of a fault within the protected object.
The calculation of the difference is determined through the
current direction definition. The current direction is defined as
positive to the protected object. The current difference results
from the vector addition of the currents.
[dwausken-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/24 Operate Curve
3.2
For use in auto transformers, an additional measure was

adopted in order to prevent a failure in response to external
ground faults. The protection function independently determines the side of the auto winding that is necessary for reliable
operation of the protection function. A measuring point is
selected that results in the greatest restraint current (see also
Figure 3.2/25).
This method is also used if multiple three-phase current measuring points are present on the neutral side, such as in breakerand-a-half layouts (see Figure 3.2/23 and Figure 3.2/24).
In the differential protection devices, other protection functions
are available that can be used as supplemental protection and
monitoring functions as well as backup protection for the
upstream and downstream power system. It is also possible to
monitor limiting values.
In the protection function, the following properties become

important:
Error-current stabilized operate curve with freely adjustable
characteristic curve sections in accordance with Figure 3.2/20
Additional stabilization procedure against external errors with
current-transformer saturation. The first procedure reacts to

high-current errors and monitors the history of the differential
current (time-limited occurrence of a differential current from
the additional stabilization area, see Figure 3.2/20). A shift to
an internal error is reliably detected. The second procedure
works for low-current errors. Due to the DC component in the
short-circuit current and remanence of the current transformer, phase angle rotations in the secondary current can
result. If jumps in the restraint current occur and if DC components are simultaneously detected in the differential current,
an elevation of the operate curve is carried out on a time
limited basis.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Generator differential protection (ANSI 87G)
In the case of asynchronous motors, distorted transmission of

the starting current may result in differential currents. Due to
a startup detection (jump within the restraint current and DC
component evaluation), the operate curve is raised.
High-current internal errors are reliably and quickly detected
by the high-current stage Idiff-fast (see Figure 3.2/19). In

order to prevent an overfunction by quadrature-axis current
components (for example, use in breaker-and-a-half layouts),
the instantaneous values from the differential and restraint
currents are evaluated. In a few milliseconds, interior and
exterior errors are reliably differentiated.
Generator differential protection (ANSI 87G)

Generator differential protection is a selective short-circuit
protection for generators of different designs. It processes the
currents from the three-phase neutral point transformers and
output side current transformers (see Figure 3.2/26).
few milliseconds, interior and exterior errors are reliably

differentiated.
Busbar differential protection (ANSI 87B)
Busbar protection is selective, reliable, and fast protection
against busbar short circuits in medium-voltage, high-voltage,
and extra-high-voltage installations with the most varied busbar
confi gurations.
The protection is suitable for switchgear with closed-core or
linear-characteristic current transformers.
It short tripping time is especially advantageous with high shortcircuit powers or if the power system stability is at risk.
The modular structure of the hardware enables the protection to
be optimally adapted to the configuration of the installation.
The protection function has the following features:
Phase-selective measurement and display

Selective tripping of defective busbar sections
Additional disconnector-independent check zone as a further
tripping criterion
Shortest tripping times (<10ms)

Excellent stability on external faults, even on instrument
transformer saturation, by means of stabilization with
through-fault currents
Tripping characteristic with freely settable characteristic

sections as shown in XXX
[dw_anschaltung, 1, en_US]
Sensitive tripping characteristic for low-current faults can
Figure 3.2/26 Generator differential protection interface
In the protection function, the following properties become

important:
Error-current stabilized operate curve with freely adjustable

characteristic curve sections, in accordance with Figure
3.2/19.
Automatic correction of a current transformer mismatch

Additional stabilization procedure against external errors with
current-transformer saturation. The first procedure reacts to

high-current errors and monitors the history of the differential
current (time-limited occurrence of a differential current from
the additional stabilization area, see Figure 3.2/19). A shift to
an internal error is reliably detected. The second procedure
works for low-current errors. Due to the DC component in the
short-circuit current and remanence of the current transformer, phase angle rotations in the secondary current can
result. If jumps in the restraint current occur and if DC components are simultaneously detected in the differential current,
an elevation of the operate curve is carried out on a time
limited basis.
Jump monitoring in the restraint current (typically during

startup operations for motors) can also be used to prevent
overfunction in response to external errors. If a jump is
detected, the operate curve is raised on a time-limited basis.
High-current internal errors are reliably and quickly detected
by the high-current stage Idiff-fast (see Figure 3.2/20). In

order to prevent an overfunction, the instantaneous values
from the differential and restraint currents are evaluated. In a
additionally be activated, for example, in impedancegrounded systems as shown in
Low requirements of the non-saturated time of the current

transformers due to fast detection of internal or external
faults within 2 ms
Three intermeshing measuring methods permit very short
tripping times on busbar faults or ensure maximum stability

during large through-fault currents
The integrated circuit breaker failure protection detects failure

of circuit breakers during busbar short circuits and provides a
trip signal for the circuit breaker at the opposite end of the line.
On failure of a bus coupling circuit breaker, the adjacent busbar
is tripped.
Capacitor bank differential protection (ANSI 87C)
Acquires ground faults and multiphase short-circuits at capacitor banks
Acquires ground faults during the operation of capacitor
3.2
banks in systems with earthed star point
Features the required stabilization procedures for closing

operations
Secure and very fast tripping in case of internal high-current

faults using an additional high-current stage.
Voltage differential protection for capacitor banks (ANSI

87V)
The voltage differential protection function is used to detect Celement faults within a capacitor bank. It can be used if a
voltage tap occurs within the capacitor installation. The function
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection Fault locator (FL)
calculates the differential voltage based on phase selectivity
between the input voltage multiplied with a scale factor and the
busbar voltage.
Fault locator (FL)
Single-ended fault locator
The integrated fault locator calculates the fault impedance and
the distance-to-fault. The result is specifi ed in ohms, miles, kilometers or in percent of the line length. Parallel line and load
current compensation are also available.
Double-ended fault locator (in preparation)
Due to the load current there is an angular displacement
between the voltages of both line ends. This angle and possible
differences in the source impedance angle cause the angular
displacement between both line end currents. As a result, the
voltage drop across RF (resistance of failure) is affected by this
angle between the currents RF. The single ended measurement
cannot compensate for this.
As an option for a line with two ends, a fault locator function
with measurement at both ends of the line is available. The full
line model is considered. Thanks to this feature, measuring
accuracy on long lines under high load conditions and high fault
resistances is considerably increased.
Phasor Measurement Units (PMUs) make a valuable contribution
to the dynamic monitoring of transient processes in energy
supply systems. The advantage over standard RMS values is for
one thing that the phasor values of current and voltage are
transmitted. Secondly, each measured value includes the exact
time stamp and therefore should be assigned within the transmission path in which it originates independent of the time
delay. The phasors and analog values are transmitted by the
PMU with a configurable repetition rate (reporting rate). Due to
the high-precision time synchronization (via GPS), the measured
values from different substations that are far removed from
each other are compared, and conclusions about the system
state and dynamic events, such as power fluctuations, are
drawn from the phase angles and dynamic curves.
The PMU function transmits its data via an integrated Ethernet
module using a standardized protocol IEEE C37.118. The evaluation can be done with a Wide Area Monitoring System (Figure
3.2/27) for example SIGUARD PDP (Phasor Data Processor).
3.2
Figure 3.2/27 Use of SIPROTEC 5 devices as Phasor Measurement Units on a SIGUARD PDP evaluation system
SIPROTEC 5 System
Control Transformer voltage controller (ANSI 90V)
Control
Transformer voltage controller (ANSI 90V)

The transformer voltage controller functionality (ANSI 90V) is
used to control power transformers (two-winding transformers),
three-winding transformers, interconnecting transformers) and
auto transformers using a motor-operated tap changer. This
function is designed to control the following:
For two-winding transformers: the voltage on the secondary

circuit of the power transformer
For three-winding transformers: the voltage of the secondary

winding 1 or winding 2
For grid coupling transformers: voltage of winding 1 or
winding 2, selectively depending on the power direction
The function offers automatic voltage control, within a preset

voltage band, on the secondary side of the transformers or alternatively at a remote load point (Z compensation or R/X compensation) in the system. To compensate voltage fl uctuations in
the meshed system, use the LDC-Z procedure (Z compensation).
For voltage drops in the line, you can use the LDC-X and R procedure (R/X compensation).
The control principle is based on the fact that an up or down
command to the tap changer causes a rise or fall in voltage,
depending on the voltage change ( V) for each step.
[dw_steuerung, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.3/1 SIPROTEC 5 functional integration control
SIPROTEC 5 includes all bay level control and supervision functions that are required for efficient operation of the switchgear.
The large, freely configurable graphics display for control
diagrams is available for convenient local control. Frequent
operating actions, such as starting switching sequences or
displaying the message list, can be called up via one of the 9
function keys. The required security is guaranteed by the key
switches for local/remote and linterlocked/uninterlocked switchover.
The voltage control functions in each step and compares the

measured actual voltage (Vact) with the defi ned target voltage
(Vtarget). If the difference is greater than the set bandwidth (B),
an up or down command is output to the tap changer after the
defi ned delay (T1) has elapsed.
The voltage control function additionally monitors the current
on the primary and secondary sides to block the controller in
impermissible operating conditions (overcurrent/undercurrent,
overvoltage/undervoltage, reverse power).
The application templates supplied provide the full functionality

that you need for your application. Protection and control functions access the same logical elements. From the perspective of
switching devices, protection and control are treated with equal
priority.
The modular, scalable hardware can be optimized for the system
conditions. You can easily put together the desired hardware
quantity structure. For example, a single SIPROTEC 5 device can
be used to control and monitor an entire breaker-and-a-half
diameter.
A new level of quality in control is achieved with the application
of communication standard IEC 61850. For example, binary
information from the bay can be processed very elegantly and
data (such as for interlocking across multiple fields) can be
exchanged between the devices. Cross communications via
GOOSE enable efficient solutions, since here the wiring is
replaced with data telegrams.
3.3
All devices already have up to 4 switching objects (switches,

disconnectors or grounding switches) via the base control
package. Optionally, additional switching objects and switching
sequence blocks (CFC switching sequences) can be activated.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Automation
Automation
Of course, SIPROTEC 5 provides a substation automation system,

such as SICAM PAS/PQS, with all necessary information, thus
ensuring consistent, integrated and efficient solutions for
further automation.
[dw_automation, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.4/1 SIPROTEC 5 functional integration automation
The integrated CFC (Continuous Function Chart) graphical automation editor enables you to create logic diagrams clearly and
simply. DIGSI 5 supports this with powerful logic blocks based
on the standard IEC 61131-3. All devices already have a
powerful base automation package. This makes it easy to
provide specific functions for automating a switching cell or
switchgear.
Various stages of expansion for the continuous function charts
are available for the realization of your solutions.
Function chart (CFC) basic

Function chart (CFC) arithmetic
With the base package continuous function chart, you can
graphically link all internal digital information, such as internal
protection signals or operation states, directly to the logic blocks
and process them in real time. With the arithmetic function
chart (CFC) package you can also link measured values or
monitor them with respect to limiting values.
Examples of automation applications are:
3.4
Interlocking checks
Switching sequences
Message derivations or the tripping of switching operations
Messages or alarms by linking available information
Load shedding in a feeder
Management of decentralized energy feeds
System transfers depending on the network status
Automatic power system disconnections in the event of
power system stability problems
3.4/1
SIPROTEC 5 System
Monitoring
Monitoring
Power Quality
Besides availability, the ultimate consumers demand that the
electrical energy they receive is also of high quality. The
increasing use of power electronic components can have
loading effects on power quality. Poor power quality can cause
interruptions, production outages, and high follow-up costs.
Accordingly, it is essential to capture and evaluate the powersystem variables reliably according to generally valid quality
criteria as defined in EN 50160.
For this, SIPROTEC 5 provides corresponding Power Quality
recorders, for example SIPROTEC 7KE85. These can be used to
detect weak points early so that corrective measures can be
taken. The large volume of data is archived centrally and
analyzed neatly with a SICAM PQS system.
Equipment
Condition monitoring is an important tool in asset management
and operational support from which both the environment and
the company can benefit. Equipment that typically requires
monitoring includes for example: Circuit breakers, transformers
and gas compartments in gas-insulated switchgear (GIS).
[dw_Monitoring, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.5/1 SIPROTEC 5 functional integration monitoring
The measuring transducer inputs (0 mA to 20 mA) enable

connection to various sensors and monitoring of non-electrical
variables, such as gas pressure, gas density, temperature. Thus,
SIPROTEC 5 enables a wide range of monitoring tasks to be
carried out.
SIPROTEC 5 devices can take on a wide variety of monitoring

tasks.
SIPROTEC 5 provides the process interfaces, logs, recorders and

automation functions necessary for monitoring equipment:
These can be divided into the following groups:
Process values are stored together with a time stamp in the

operational log
Self Monitoring
Monitoring power-system stability
Monitoring Power Quality
Monitoring of equipment (condition monitoring)
The circuit-breaker statistics provide essential data for condition-based maintenance of switchgear
Process variables (for example, pressure, SF6 loss, speed, and
temperature) are monitored for limit violations via measuring

transducers connected to the sensors.
Using external 20 mA or temperature measurement devices
Self-monitoring
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with many monitoring procedures. These detect faults, internal as well as external, in secondary circuits, store them in logs, and report them. This information is used to record the device fault and helps to determine
the cause of the error in order to take appropriate corrective
actions.
that are connected serially or by Ethernet, other measured

values can be captured and processed.
Power-system stability
Grid Monitoring combines all of the monitoring systems that are
necessary to assure power-system stability during normal operation. SIPROTEC 5 provides all necessary functionalities, such as
fault recorders, continuous recorders, fault locators and
synchrophasor measurement (Phasor Measurement Units, PMU)
for Grid Monitoring. This functionality allows you to monitor
power-system limit violations (such as dynamic stability assessment via load angle control) and actively trigger the appropriate
responses. This data in the network control systems can also be
used as input variables for online power-flow calculation and
enable significantly faster response if statuses in the power
system change.
3.5
SIPROTEC 5 System
in the power frequency. They can be transmitted to central analysis systems via the high-performance communication system.
Measured values are displayed per-unit quantity both in primary
and secondary values, and also in reference values. These values
are also made available to other applications, for example,
transferred to the systems control or automation tasks.
Up to 40 analog inputs can supplied to each device. Up to
80 analog inputs are supported in the busbar protection
SIPROTEC 7SS85.
The analog inputs of the SIPROTEC 5 devices can be selected
with a corresponding accuracy class and dynamic range suitable
for connection to both protections and measurement cores. The
innovative current terminal technology enables these to be
simply changed later on-site if needed. All analog inputs are
factory calibrated and thereby ensure maximum accuracy.
The following accuracies are typical:
V, I 0.1% at frated
V, I 0.3% in the expanded frequency range
(frated -10Hz, frated+10Hz)
[dw_data, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.6/1 SIPROTEC 5 functional integration data acquisition and

logging
The recorded and logged bay data is comprehensive. It represents the image and history of the bay. It is also used by the
functions in the SIPROTEC 5 device for monitoring, inter-bay and
substation automation tasks. Thus, they represent the basis both
for the functions available today and for future applications.
Measurement and PMU
A large number of measured values are derived from the analog
input variables, which supply a current image of the process.
Depending on the device type, the following base measured
values are available:
Operational measured values

Fundamental phasor and symmetrical components
Protection-specific measured values, for example differential
and restraint current for differential protection
Mean values
Minimum values and maximum values
Energy measured values
Statistic values
Limiting values
Besides the base measured values, synchrophasor measured
values can also be activated in the devices (application as PMU,
Phase Measurement Unit)
3.6
3.6/1
Synchrophasor measured values support a range of applications

for monitoring grid stability. For this purpose, SIPROTEC 5
devices record the necessary PMU data. These high-precision,
time-stamped phasors indicate power frequency and the change
P 0.3% at frated
P 0.5% in the expanded frequency range
Q 1.0% at frated
Q 1.5% in the expanded frequency range
Separate measuring transducers (analog inputs) are therefore

unnecessary. The high-precision measured data enables
extended energy management and makes commissioning much
easier. SIPROTEC 5 thus provides the following measured values
for analysis and further processing:
The base measured values with high dynamic range and high
accuracy (protection-class current transformer)
The base measured values with very high accuracy (instrument transformer)
Synchrophasor measured values with high-precision time
stamping for subsequent tasks such as grid stability monitoring.

(for example, thermal overload protection, peak overvoltage
protection for capacitors) and operational measured values.
Recorder
In SIPROTEC 5, various data logs and recorders provide recording
large volumes of data. They feature a large number of analog
and binary inputs, and a high sampling frequency. An extremely
wide range of records can be converted. Either continuously or
as determined by various trigger criteria.
Besides storing the data fail-safe on internal storage devices,
SIPROTEC 5 devices can also transfer the data to central analysis
systems. Consequently, you are able to monitor networks with
regard to typical characteristics.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Fault recorder
The time synchronization is optionally realized via:
The fault recording in protection devices and bay controllers

stores analog and binary data during a fault event, for example,
in the event of short circuits or ground faults, and preserves the
records, including high-precision time stamps for subsequent
analysis. Calculated measurands, for example power or
frequency, can also be incorporated into the fault recording
function. Analysis takes place after the data is read out from the
device by DIGSI using SIGRA. Recorded data is archived to
prevent data loss in the event of supply voltage failure. Analog
and binary signal traces for recording are freely configurable,
and pre-trigger record duration and seal-in time can be
programmed within a very wide range. SIPROTEC 5 fault
recording provides long recording times with outstanding accuracy.
DCF77 signal
IRIG-B signal
SNTP protocol
Substation automation protocol (for example,
Recording of all analog channels

Sampling frequencies from 1 kHz to 8 kHz
High recording capacity for individual records of 20 s for
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850)
IEEE 1588 protocol (accuracy: 1s)

Seconds pulse (for special high-precision applications)
DIGSI 5 protocol (not cyclical)
Timing master of a protection interface
Internal time with integrated quartz crystal
Time synchronization in the device has a battery back-up. Thus,
the internal clock continues to run with the quartz accuracy of
the device even in case of outage of the auxiliary voltage.
24 channels at an 8 kHz sampling frequency
Storage capacity for up to 128 fault records

The recording duration for all records is limited by the avail-
able storage capacity of the device, and depends on the

number of configured channels and sampling frequency.
Example
- Line protection with 8 analog channels (4 I, 4 V),
- Sampling frequency 1 kHz, 6 measured value and 20 binary
channels: resulting recording capacity of the device about
890 s!
Up to 100 freely configurable binary and 50 additional measured value tracks
Due to the high number of up to 120 measured values, a

different record duration results for SIPROTEC 7SS85
The SIPROTEC 7KE85 Fault Recorder has yet more properties:
Expanded trigger criteria: Gradient trigger (M/t), binary

trigger, network trigger, etc.
Higher sampling frequency of 16 kHz for up to 40 analog
channels
Substantially longer record duration due to the additionally
installed mass storage.
The descriptions for the fast-scan, slow-scan, and continuous
recorder as well as for the trigger functions are in the
"SIPROTEC 7KE85 Fault Recorder".
Time synchronization
In order to be able to compare the recordings of fault recorders
at different locations to each other, a very exact time synchronization of all devices is necessary. Thus, the time synchronization
is an important property and must be done with a high degree
of accuracy. In particular, the use of the Phasor Measurement
Unit (PMU) function requires a precise time stamping Figure
3.6/2.
The time synchronization can be done using 1 or 2 timers.
Depending on time source, an accuracy from 1 ms to 1 s is
attained. Events are logged with a date and time with 1 ms resolution.
[Time_settings, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.6/2 Time settings in DIGSI 5
GPS time signal receiver for IRIG-B, DCF77

The recommended GPS time signal receiver from Meinberg
(Figure 3.6/3) synchronizes the internal time of all connected
protection devices. The internal clock of the protection devices
are updated using the respective telegram (IRIG-B, DCF77).
Optical fiber can also be used to transmit time signals (telegrams or second intervals) without interference even over larger
distances and in electromagnetically polluted environments.
SIPROTEC 5 devices generally support redundant time synchronization. The time information can be provided by two external
timers. One functions as the primary time source. If it fails,
switchover to the second (secondary) timer is performed.
3.6
SIPROTEC 5 System
Maintainability
Hardware and software are constantly monitored and irregularities are detected immediately. In this way, extremely high levels
of security, reliability and availability are achieved at the same
time. Important information about essential maintenance activities (for example, battery supervision), hardware defects
detected by internal monitoring or compatibility problems are
separately recorded in the diagnostic log. All entries include
specific take-action instructions. The following table provides an
overview of the typical log.
The log entries and fault records are retained even if there is an
outage of the auxiliary and battery voltage.
[dw_7KE85_GPS, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.6/3 SIPROTEC 5 device with IRIG-B or DCF77 time synchronization
Event-log buffer
Operational log
2000 messages
Fault log
1000 messages per Event-driven recording of

fault
faults. A maximum of
128 faults can be stored. A
maximum of 1000 messages
can be recorded for each
fault.
User-specific log
200 messages
Option of cyclical or eventdriven recording of userdefined signals
Sensitive GroundFault Log
100 messages per

ground fault
Event-driven recording of
ground faults. A maximum of
10 ground faults can be
stored. A maximum of
100 messages can be
recorded for each ground
fault.
Parameterization
history log
(cannot be
deleted)
200 messages
Logging of all parameter

changes and configuration
downloads
Communication
Log
500 messages
Logging the status of all

configured communication
connections, such as disturbances that arise, testing and
diagnostic operation and
communication loads
Security log
(cannot be
deleted)
500 messages
Logging the successful and

unsuccessful attempts to
access areas of the device
with conditional access rights.
Diagnostic log
500 messages
Logging and display of

specific take-action instructions in case of necessary
maintenance (for example,
battery supervision), detected
hardware defects or compatibility problems.
Event-log buffers mark important events with a time stamp

(accurate to 1 ms) for subsequent analysis.
The long recording length is achieved with large event-log
buffers and separate logs for different event categories. The
events to be logged are freely configurable and provide
improved manageability. Configuration of user-specific eventlog buffers for cyclical or event-driven recording is also
supported.
3.6
3.6/3
Table 3.6/1 Overview of typical logs
Convenient, thorough analysis

Event-log buffers of different categories enable easier, targeted
analysis. Changes to parameters and configuration data are
recorded.
Cyclical logging of operational

indications (for example,
control processes)
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication Plug-in module positions of the device
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with high-performance
communication interfaces. These interfaces are integrated
or extendable via plug-in modules to offer a high degree of
flexibility. The concept of plug-in modules and loadable
protocols enables exchangeability and retrofitting.
Serial plug-in modules

Serial electrical plug-in modules are used for asynchronous serial
protocols, e.g. IEC 60870-5-103, DNP 3. Optical 820-nm/1300nm and 1550-nm modules can also be configured as protection
interface for the point-to-point connection.
Serial electrical RS485 module
Communication
This module has either 1 (USART-AB-1EL) or 2 (USART-AC-2EL)

RS485 interfaces. The use of RJ45 sockets enables the construction of an economical serial RS485 bus with patch cables, which
are simply looped through. This saves on wiring time and cable
costs. Figure 3.7/2 shows an electrical serial module with 2
interfaces on which 2 independent serial protocol applications
are executed.
[dw_Communication, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/1 SIPROTEC 5 functional integration communication
[E_CC_USART-AC-2EL_sRGB, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.7/2 Serial electrical double module (USART-AC-2EL)
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with high-performance

communication interfaces. These are integrated interfaces or
interfaces that are extendable with plug-in modules to provide a
high level of security and flexibility. There are various communication modules available. At the same time, the module is independent of the protocol used. This can be loaded according to
the application. Particular importance was given to the realization of full communication redundancy:
Several serial and Ethernet-based communication interfaces

A large number of serial and Ethernet-based logs (for
example, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 serial and TCP, Modbus TCP,

IEC 60870-5-104 and IEC 61850 Ed1 and Ed2)
Full availability of the communication ring when the

switching cell is enabled for servicing operations
Serial optical 820-nm module

This module exists with 1 (USART-AD-1FO) or 2 (USART-AE-2FO)
optical 820-nm interfaces (Figure 3.7/3), with which distances
between 1.52 km can be bridged via 62.5-/125-m multimode
optical fibers. The optical connection is made via ST connectors.
Apart from serial protocols, the synchronous serial protection
interface can be operated on the module, and enables optical
direct connections via multimode optical fibers. 2 devices can
thus either exchange data, e.g. of the differential protection via
a short direct connection, or they can be connected through
communication networks via a 7XV5662 converter. Additionally,
the module can be connected directly with an optical multiplexer input in accordance with standard IEEE C37.94.

A large number of plug-in modules having various communication protocols.
Plug-in module positions of the device

The base module can be extended via module slots E and F. All
available modules can be installed there. The expansion module
CB202 is designed for 3 additional plug-in modules if the two
slots in the base module are not suffi cient. Any additional plugin modules can be installed in slots N and P. Analog expansion
modules can be plugged into slot M. This slot does not support
serial or Ethernet modules.
3.7
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication Plug-in modules for Ethernet
[E_CC_USART-AE-2FO_sRGB, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.7/3 Serial optical 820 nm double module (USART-AE-2FO)

[E_CC_ETH-BB-2FO_sRGB, 1, --_--]
Serial optical 1300 nm/1550 nm module

Long distance modules are used for synchronous serial data
exchange of protection communication via multimode optical
fibers or single mode fibers. They are available with 1 or 2 interfaces (Table 3.7/1). The optical connection is made via LC
duplex plugs.
Optical wavelength
Module designation
with 1 or 2 interfaces
Application
1300 nm
USART-AF-1LDFO,
USART-AU-2LDFO
max. 24 km via 2
single mode fibers or
max. 4 km via 2 multimode optical fibers
1300 nm
USART-AG-1LDFO,
USART-AV-2LDFO
max. 60 km via single

mode fibers
1550 nm
USART-AK-1LDFO,
USART-AY-2LDFO
100 km via single

mode fibers
Figure 3.7/4 Serial, optical double module for wide-range connections

via optical fibers ((for module designation see tables "Long
distance modules")
Plug-in modules for Ethernet

Ethernet modules are used for Ethernet-based protocol applications e.g. IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 TCP, time synchronization via SNTP, network management via SNMP, DIGSI 5 via
TCP etc. Several applications can run in parallel, whereby
unused applications can be switched off for security reasons.
Electrical Ethernet module
Electrical Ethernet module The ETH-BA-2EL module has 2 RJ45
interfaces (Figure 3.7/5). It can be configured with or without
an integrated switch. The maximum electrically permitted
distance via CAT 5 patch cables is 20 m.
Table 3.7/1 Long distance modules for different distances for point-topoint connections with 2 fi bers
Use of modules in pairs

Special modules enable bi-directional data exchange via one
optical fiber. This saves one fiber per data connection on optical
fiber lines, without functional limitations in comparison with
connections with two fibers. These modules transmit at 1300
nm or 1550 nm, but must be used in pairs (seeTable 3.7/1 and
Figure 3.7/4). The optical connection is made via LC simplex
plugs.
Optical wavelength
Module designation with Application

1 or 2 interfaces
1300 nm /
USART-AH-1LDFO <->
USART-AJ-1LDFO
1550 nm
USART-AX-2LDFO <->
USART-AY-2LDFO
max. 40 km via a single

mode fiber (with integrated fiber optic multiplexer)
Table 3.7/2 WAN modules for point-to-point connections with one fi

ber
3.7
3.7/2
[E_CC_ETH-BA-2EL_sRGB, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.7/5 Electrical Ethernet module (ETH-BA-2EL)
Optical Ethernet module

The ETH-BB-2FO module has 2 optical LC duplex 1300 nm interfaces (Figure 3.7/6). It can be configured with or without an
integrated switch. The maximum optically permitted distance
via 50/125-m or 62.5/125-m multimode optical fibers is 2 km.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication Plug-in modules for Ethernet
The optical transmission and receiving level is measured in the
module and can be displayed with DIGSI 5.
[E_CC_ETH-BB-2FO_sRGB, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.7/6 Optical Ethernet module (ETH-BB-2FO)
3.7
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication Plug-in modules for the communication
Module Type: ETH-BB-2FO
Module Type: ETH-BA-2EL
Module Type: USART-AE-2FO
Module Type: USART-AC-2EL
Module Type: Plug-In Module USART-AD-1FO
Module Type: USART-AB-1EL
Port J: Integrated Ethernet
Front interface
Port or plug-in modules
Port G: Time Synchronization
Plug-in modules for the communication
Physical Connection
USB-A
9-pin D-sub socket
1 x electrical Ethernet 10/100 Mbps, RJ45
1 x electrical serial RS485, RJ45
2 x electrical serial RS485, RJ45
1 optical serial, 1.5 km, 820 nm, ST connector
2 optical serial, 1.5 km, 820 nm, ST connector
2 x electrical Ethernet 10/100 Mbps, RJ45, 20 m
2 optical Ethernet 100 Mbps, 2 km, 1300 nm, LC duplex plug
Applications
DIGSI 5 protocol
IRIG-B, DCF77, high-precision 1 pps
IEC 61850-8-1 server (including GOOSE, reporting to 6 clients)
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-104
IEC 60870-5-104 + IEC 61850-8-1 server (including GOOSE, reporting

to 2 clients)
DNP3 TCP
DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850-8-1 server (including GOOSE, reporting to

2 clients)
DNP3 serial
Modbus TCP
Modbus TCP + IEC 61850-8-1 server (including GOOSE, reporting to 2

clients)
SNMP V3 (network management protocol)
IEEE 1588 (time synchronization via Ethernet)
Diagnosis: Ethernet module homepage (http)
Synchrophasor (IEEE C37.118-IP)

Protection interface (Sync. HDLC, IEEE C37.94) *
Slave unit protocol (connection to 20 mA box or temp. box)
Additional Ethernet protocols and services

DHCP, DCP (automatic IP configuration)
RSTP, PRP, and HSR (Ethernet redundancy)

SNTP (time synchronization over Ethernet)
Note: The USART and ETH plug-in module types may be used in slots E and F in the base module as well as in slots N and P in the CB202 expansion
module. They are not intended for use in slot M in the CB202 expansion module.
* Additional plug-in modules for protection interface: see next table
3.7
3.7/4
Table 3.7/3 Communication applications and plug-in modules
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication Plug-in modules for the communication
Module Type: USART-AX-2LDFO 4)
Module Type: USART-AW-2LDFO 3)
Module Type: USART-AJ-1LDFO 2)
Module Type: USART-AH-1LDFO 1)
Module Type: USART-AY-2LDFO
Module Type: USART-AK-1LDFO
Module Type: USART-AV-2LDFO
Module Type: USART-AG-1LDFO
Module Type: USART-AU-2LDFO
Plug-in modules for applications with the protection interface
Module Type: USART-AF-1LDFO
Plug-in modules for the communication
Physical Connection
1 optical serial, 1300 nm, LC duplex plug, 24 km (single-mode fiber), 4 km
(multi-mode fiber)
2 optical serial, 1300 nm, LC duplex plug, 24 km (single-mode fiber), 4 km

(multi-mode fiber)
1 optical serial, 1300 nm, LC duplex plug, 60 km (single-mode fiber)
1 optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, 1300 nm / 1550<nm, LC

simplex plug, 40 km (single-mode fiber) 1)
1 optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, 1550 nm / 1300 nm, LC

simplex plug, 40 km (single-mode fiber) 2)
2 optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, 1300 nm / 1550 nm,

2 x LC simplex plug, 40 km (single-mode fiber) 3)
2 optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, 1550 nm / 1300 nm,

2 x LC simplex plug, 40 km (single-mode fiber) 4)
Application
Protection Interface
Notes:
The USART plug-in module types can be used in slots E and F in the base module as well as in slots N and P in the CB202 expansion module. They are not
intended for use in slot M in the CB202 expansion module.
The plug-in modules of types ANAI and ARC can be used in both slots in the base module (ports E and F), as well as in all slots in the expansion module
CB202 (ports M, N and P).
1)
USART-AH-1LDFO only pairs with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO
2)
USART-AJ-1LDFO only pairs with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO
3)
USART-AW-2LDFO only pairs with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO
4)
USART-AX-2LDFO only pairs with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO
Table 3.7/4 Plug-in modules for applications with the protection interface and for other applications
3.7
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication Plug-in modules for additional applications
Plug-in modules for additional applications
Plug-in module for additional applications
Module type: ANAI-CA-4EL
Module type: ARC-CD-3FO
Physical Connection
8-pin screw-type terminal strip
3 x optical (for point sensor)
Applications
Measuring transducer, 4 inputs, DC 20mA
Arc protection
Table 3.7/5 Plug-in modules for additional applications
Logs
Plug-in modules are delivered without a protocol application.
According to the table Communication applications and plug-in
modules, a module can be initialized via DIGSI 5 with a protocol
application. Every interface is assigned the desired application
via DIGSI 5. Assignments can be erased and re-configured. This
enables a high degree of flexibility when configuring the
modules.
DIGSI 5 protocol
The DIGSI 5 protocol works with TCP services, which can be
routed via IP networks. Worldwide remote access to devices via
secure connections is an integral component of the communication concept. Notes on secure access via networks can be found
in the next chapter "Cyber security" of this catalog. The protocol
is available on the USB interface and all Ethernet interfaces.
Optionally, DIGSI 5 can also be operated via its own Ethernet
module if systems control functions and access for operating
and main-tenance are to be kept strictly separate.
IEC 61850 client-server communication
via the integrated Ethernet interface (port J)
This interface can be used in addition to DIGSI 5 as a simple
IEC 61850 systems control interface. It supports a client-server
connection with a reporting function (GOOSE is not supported
on port J). Messages, measured values and fault records can be
read from an IEC 61850 client. Parameters in the device can be
changed via the client and the time of the device can be set via
an SNTP server.
On SIPROTEC 7Sx82 and SIPROTEC 5 with CP300, this interface
also supports GOOSE messages of IEC 61850.
On Ethernet modules
3.7
3.7/6
Messages, measured and metered values can be transferred via

the client-server communication in static and dynamic reports to
a maximum of 6 clients (substation controllers). Dynamic
reports are created and read by the client without resetting the
parameters of the device. The static reports are created via
the IEC 61850 system configurator and are permanently saved
in the device as indication lists. Fault records can also be
retrieved in binary Comtrade format. Extensive control functions
are available from the client, such as for the safe switching of a
circuit breaker. The setting parameters of the device can be read
and also changed via the IEC 61850 protocol. The devices can
be integrated in interoperable, intelligent Smart Grids without
difficulty. Changing the device parameter settings during operation is possible through substation controller equipment in order
to adapt selected setting parameters to the operating condi-
tions. Redundant solutions can be realized with 2 Ethernet

modules.
IEC 61850 GOOSE
Areas of use inside and outside switchgear
GOOSE has been established as a worldwide standard for cross
communication between devices in order to transfer messages
and measured values between devices. In addition to GOOSE
between devices within switchgear, GOOSE is also supported
between devices in different switchgear. The exchanged information is described in data terms via standard-conforming SCL
files, which are defined in Edition 2 of IEC 61850. The exchange
itself occurs via high-performance IP network connections or
Ethernet network connections. This data exchange can also be
realized via an Ethernet module used exclusively for this
purpose.
GOOSE messages can be used to exchange time-critical information that must be transmitted in a few milliseconds. In this case,
GOOSE connections replace transmitted via contacts and binary
inputs; for protection signals, transfer times under 10 ms are
required, and under 20 ms for switch positions and interlockings. Measured and metered values are transmitted in less than
100 ms. GOOSE applications are generated in the system configurator for this purpose. These data are exchanged by the devices
in a high-performance manner via GOOSE messages.
Receivers of GOOSE messages can constantly monitor the
receipt of indications and measured values for an outage of the
connection. The state of missing indications is automatically
updated at the receiver in order to attain a secure state. This
allows a constant, high-quality monitoring of GOOSE communication to be realized. GOOSE messages transmitted during the
test mode of a device are ignored by the receivers if these are in
normal operation. A test of a device can be performed without it
being disconnecting from the communication network.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication Serial IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
way, for example, connection to a DNP 3 via a redundant optical
Ethernet ring can be established. Information about a device,
and the fault records of the device, can be routed and transferred using the DNP 3 protocol. Switching commands can be
executed in the control direction (Figure 3.7/8).
Redundant connection to 2 serial substation controllers can be
established via 2 modules or 1 serial double module. With
Ethernet, 2 Ethernet modules that can work independently of
one another via 1 or 2 networks are to be provided for a redundant connection. Settings values in the device cannot be read or
changed via the protocol.
For DNP 3, the network topologies shown in Figure 3.7/17 to
Figure 3.7/19 can also be used for Ethernet-based or serial
communication.
[dw_SIP5-0046, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/7 Separate client-server and GOOSE communication via

IEC 61850 with another serial connection to an
IEC 60870-5-103 master
Serial IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

The serial protocol is transferred via RS485 or an optical 820 nm
interface. The compatible or Siemens specifi c extended IEC
60870-5-103 protocol is supported. The implementation is
compatible with existing solutions, e.g. with SIPROTEC 4
devices, which will enable a trouble-free exchange and extension of devices even in the very long term. In addition to indications, measured values and fault records, metered values and
customer-specifi cally defi ned indications of control functions
are also available in protocol extensions. Control commands for
switching devices can also be transferred via the protocol.
Setting values in the device can also be read or changed via the
generic services of the protocol. Information about the device
can be routed to the protocol interface by the user with DIGSI 5.
Information types and function numbers can be freely configured here. This enables adaptation to existing solutions and the
interchangeability of devices without changes in the substation
controller. This is an important contribution to investment
security.
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol
The IEC 60870-5-104 substation and power system automation
protocol is supported via the electrical and optical Ethernet
module. Indications (single and double), measured values,
metered values can be transmitted to one or two (redundant)
masters. IEC 104 file transfer is also supported and fault recordings can be read out of the device in Comtrade format. In the
command direction, secured switching of switching objects is
possible via the protocol. Time synchronization can be
supported via the T104 master or via SNTP across the network.
Redundant time servers are supported. All auxiliary services on
Ethernet such as the DIGSI 5 protocol, network redundancy, or
SNMP for network monitoring can be activated concurrently
with T104. Moreover, GOOSE messages of IEC 61850 can be
exchanged between devices.
Serial DNP3 or DNP3 TCP
DNP 3 is supported as a serial protocol via RS485 or an optical
820 nm interface, and as an Ethernet-based TCP variant via the
electrical or optical Ethernet module. In conjunction with
Ethernet, the switch integrated in the module can be used such
that redundant ring structures for DNP 3 can be realized. In this
[dw_SIP5-0057, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/8 DNP3 TCP/IEC 60870-5-104 communication with further

serial connection with an IEC 60870-5-103 master
Protocol Modbus TCP

The Modbus TCP communication protocol is supported by the
electrical or optical Ehternet module. Modbus TCP and Modbus
RTU are very similar, with Modbus TCP using TCP/IP packets for
data transfer.
Modbus TCP can be used to transmit indications (single- and
double-point indications), measured values, metered measureands to one or two (redundant) masters. Switchgear can be
switched in command direction via the protocol.
Time synchronization can be implemented via SNTP or IEEE1588
via the network, supporting redundant time servers. All additional services on Ethernet like the DIGSI 5 protocol, network
redundany or SNMP for network monitoring can be activated at
the same time as Modbus TCP and GOOSE messages of IEC
61850 can be sent over the network between the devices.
Synchrophasors protocol via Ethernet (IEEE C37.118)
SIPROTEC 5 devices optionally calculate synchrophasors and
work as a Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU). These measured
values, which are synchronized across large geographic areas
via a high-precision second pulse, allow for assessment of
power system stability. These values are transferred via an
Ethernet network with the IEEE C37.118 protocol to a data
concentrator. Transfer occurs via an optical or electrical Ethernet
module. SIPROTEC 5 devices also offer these synchrophasors via
the IEC 61850 protocol in special, logical measured-value nodes
(Figure 3.7/9).
3.7
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication SUP Slave Unit Protocol
[dw_central.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.7/9 Central evaluation of fault records and phasors
SUP Slave Unit Protocol

This Siemens-specific protocol is used to read out external
20 mA devices (20 mA Box) or temperature sensing devices
(thermo box) serially or via Ethernet. These devices are available
as accessories to expand SIPROTEC 5 devices with analog interfaces. The measured values of these devices can be further
processed in the SIPROTEC 5 device or are used for protection
functions such as overload protection or hot spot calculation of
transformers.
Further Ethernet-based protocols and services
Besides the actual protocol application, these services can run in
parallel on an Ethernet module, and can be switched on and off
by the user with DIGSI 5.
Ethernet redundancy with RSTP, PRP and HSR
The electrical and optical Ethernet module supports with the
redundancy protocol (RSTP, HSR) the construction of redundant
ring structures. With HSR, uninterruptible ring redundancy is
achieved with up to 50 devices in the ring. PRP enables uninterruptible communication via parallel networks. These methods
can be activated via parameters. They are independent of the
substation automation protocol or the chosen auxiliary services.
Time synchronization with SNTP
3.7
3.7/8
The device can poll the absolute time from 1 or 2 time servers
via an SNTP server, e.g.in the hardened unit 7SC80. In redundant operation, both servers are read and the time of the 1st
server is used for setting the device clock with a precision of
1 ms. If this server fails, time synchronization takes place via the
second server. In addition to Ethernet modules, SNTP can also

be used via the integrated Ethernet interface (port J).
For greater precision of time synchronization via Ethernet, the
IEEE 1588 protocol is available. It can be activated on electrical
or optical Ethernet modules. The precondition is that the
network components, e.g. switches, support the protocol and
special IEEE 1588 time servers are present in the network. With
IEEE 1588, the signal propagation times of the time synchronization telegrams in the Ethernet network are measured so that
the terminal devices, e.g. SIPROTEC 5 receive time information
that is corrected by the signal propagation time, providing more
precise timing than SNTP. The Power Profi le IEEE 1588 C37.238
is supported and the devices function as ordinary clocks (terminals) in the network.
Network monitoring with SNMP
The device can be integrated in network monitoring or network
management systems via the SNMP V3 protocol. Extensive
monitoring variables, e.g. the state of the Ethernet interfaces,
their data throughput etc., can be made known to the monitoring system via MIB (Management Information Base) fi es.
These variables are described in data-specific terms in MIB files
and can be cyclically read out and monitored by the monitoring
system. No values can be changed in the device via SNMP. It
serves exclusively as a diagnosis interface.
Transfer of data via the protection communication
The protection interface and protection topology enable data
exchange between devices via synchronous serial point-to-point
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication Transfer of data via the protection communication
connections from 64 Kbps to 2 Mbps. These connections can be
directly via optical fiber or via other communication media such
as via leased lines in communication networks.
A protection topology consists of 2 to 6 devices, which communicate point-to-point via communication links. It can be structured as a redundant ring or as a chain structure (see Figure
3.7/10), and within a topology the protection interfaces can
have different bandwidths. A certain amount of binary information and measured values can be transmitted bi-directionally
between the devices depending on the bandwidth. The connection with the lowest bandwidth establishes this quantity. The
user can route the information with DIGSI 5.
This information has the following tasks:
[dw_Wirkkom-IEEE-interface-lwl-anschl, 2, en_US]
Topology data and values are exchanged for monitoring and

testing the connection.
Figure 3.7/11 Protection communication via a communication network

with X21 or G703.1 (64 Kbps / G703.6 (2 Mbit)) interface
Protection data, for example, differential protection data or

directional comparison data of the distance protection, is
transferred
The devices can be synchronized in time via the connection,
whereby a device of the protection topology assumes the role

of the timing master.
The link is continuously monitored for data faults and failure,

and the runtime of the data is measured.
[dw_Wirkkom-Kupferverbindung, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/12 Protection communication via a copper connection
[dw_wirkkom-diff-BI, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.7/10 Protection communication of the differential protection

and transmission of binary signals
Protection interfaces integrated in the device have previously

been used for differential protection (Figure 3.7/10) and the
permissive overreach transfer trip scheme for the distance
protection. In addition to these protection applications, you can
configure protection interfaces in all devices for SIPROTEC 5. At
the same time, any binary information and measured values can
be transferred between the devices. Even connections with low
bandwidth, such as 64 Kbps, can be used for this. Protection
interfaces that mainly serve to transfer data for the differential
protection are designated type 1 links and are used in the
SIPROTEC 7SD8 and 7SL8 devices. Connections for transferring
any data that can be configured in the other devices (for
example, SIPROTEC 7SA8, 7SJ8) are type 2. The protection interfaces must be of the same type on both sides.
The figures Figure 3.7/11 to Figure 3.7/16 show possible
communication variants for establishing protection communications.
[dw_Wirkkom-IEEE-interface-lwl-anschl, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/13 Protection communication via an IEEE C37.94 (2 Mbps)

interface direct optical fiber connection to a multiplexer
3.7
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication Ethernet network topologies
standby) and the connection to the switch is monitored. In the
case of an outage of interface 1, a switch is made to interface 2
within just a few milliseconds (Figure 3.7/17).
[dw_Wirkkom-Singlemodefaser-Repeater.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/14 Protection communication via single-mode fiber and

repeater
[dw_SIP5-0031, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/17 Single or redundant connection to external switches
[dw_Wirkkom-direkt-lwl-verb.vsd, 2, en_US]
Electrical or optical rings with a maximum of 40 devices can be

established with an integrated switch (RSTP) (Figure 3.7/18).
Both interfaces of the module transmit and receive simultaneously. Mixed operation with SIPROTEC 4 devices is possible in
the ring with a maximum of 30 devices. A special ring redundancy process, based on RSTP, ensures short recovery times in
the event of the outage of a device, so that the protocol applications continue running nearly interruption-free. This configuration is also independent of the protocol application that runs on
the Ethernet module.
Figure 3.7/15 Protection communication via direct optical fiber connections
[dw_Wirkkom-Singlemodefaser.vsd, 2, en_US]
[dw_SIP5-0032, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/16 Protection communication via a single-mode fiber
Ethernet network topologies

Regardless of the selected protocol (IEC 61850, DNP3 TCP), the
electrical and optical Ethernet module are supported by
different network topologies.
3.7
If the module works without an integrated switch that can be

switched off through DIGSI 5, it is connected to external
switches individually or redundantly. In the case of a double
connection, only one interface processes the protocol applications (for example, IEC 61850). The 2nd interface works in (hot
Figure 3.7/18 Ring operation with integrated switch and ring redundancy
Serial redundancy
Redundant connection to 2 substation controllers, for example,
SICAM PAS, is possible via 2 independent, serial plug-in modules
or a serial double module. For example, the serial protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 or the serial protocol DNP3 can run on the
modules. Also mixed operation is possible. Figure 3.7/19 shows
a serial optical network that connects each of the serial protocol
interfaces of the device to a master. The transfer occurs interfer-
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication Redundancy in communication
ence-free via optical fibers. For the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol,
special redundancy processes are supported in the device. Thus,
a primary master can be set that is preferred over the 2nd
master in the control direction. The current process image is
transferred to both masters.
[dw_SIP5-0046, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/20 Separate client-server and GOOSE communication via

IEC 61850 with another serial connection to an
IEC 60870-5-103 master
Seamless redundancy with PRP and HSR

[dw_SIP5-0033, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/19 Redundant optical connection of devices to

IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 master (for example,
SICAM PAS)
Redundancy in communication
You as the user can implement different levels of redundancy.
The number of independent protocol applications running in
parallel is limited by the 4 plug-in module positions.
A serial protocol can be run 2 times on a double module. But it
can also be implemented on 2 modules. Different serial protocols can be run in the device simultaneously, for example, DNP3
and IEC 103. Communication occurs with one or more masters.
The Ethernet module can be plugged into the device one or
more times. This allows the same or different protocol applications to be executed multiple times. For IEC 61850, several
networks are possible, for example, one for client-server
communication to a system controller and a second for the
GOOSE connections between the devices that could be assigned
to the process bus (Figure 3.7/20). Through the client-server
architecture of IEC 61850, one server (device) can simultaneously send reports to a maximum of 6 clients. The doubling of
the interfaces on the Ethernet module enables the establishment of redundant network structures, for example, optical
rings or the redundant connection to 2 switches.
Protection interfaces can be implemented in double. If one
connection fails, a switch is made to the second connection.
New technologies decisively shorten the time for the reconfiguration of communication networks in the event of interruptions.
These technologies include:
PRP = Parallel Redundancy Protocol

HSR = High Available Seamless Ring Redundancy
Both systems operate according to the same principle and
conform to the standard IEC 62439-3.
The same information (Ethernet telegram) is thus transmitted
via two different information routes. The receiver utilizes the
first telegram to arrive and discards the second. If the first telegram does not arrive, the second one is still available and is
used. This mechanism is based on the Ethernet stack, which
assigns the same MAC address to the two telegrams.
PRP uses two independent Ethernet systems. Although this
doubles the effort for equipping the network along with the
associated costs, the design is simple.
HSR operates according to the same principle, but one of the

Ethernet networks is designed in a ring configuration. The
same information (Ethernet telegram) is transmitted in both
directions of the ring, and the receiver receives it from both
sides of the ring. This means somewhat greater expenditure
on equipment, but saves on the costs for a second Ethernet
network.
The procedures can be activated via a setting parameter and do

not have any other parameters. They are therefore easy to set
up. The number of network users is limited in both procedures
to a maximum of 512.
HSR and PRP can be combined using so-called Redboxes (redundancy boxes). This cost efficient solution according to can be
designed in the following manner:
2 switches in the control center

2 switches in the bay
2 Redboxes (RB) per HSR ring
3.7
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication Process bus IEC 61850-9-2
Up to 50 devices per HSR ring

Easy expansion using two additional PRP switches
[Kom_Communication Mapping_en-US_W, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.7/22 Communication assignment with DIGSI 5 for the

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Process bus IEC 61850-9-2
[dw_stossfreie-n-1-struktur, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/21 Economical seamless n-1 structure
Integrated setting of communication in DIGSI 5

A communication protocol is configured with DIGSI 5. According
to module type, DIGSI 5 offers the user the selection of the
respective, permissible protocols/applications. The protocol
parameters are set (e.g. baud rate, IP address etc.). Then the
module is initialized with the protocol application and, for
example, a serial module with the IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3
protocol and the communication parameters are loaded.
The process bus measures current and voltage in a device

(merging unit). The measured values are digitalized in the
merging unit and transported to the protection devices via
optical Ethernet connections with help of the IEC 61850-9-2
communication protocol. The protection devices no longer work
with analog measured values, but directly use the digitalized
measured values from the sampled values data stream.
The merging units are positioned in close proximity to the transformer to minimize wiring work. The sampled values data
stream generated by the Merging Units can be transmitted to
one or several protection devices.
The PB201 Extension Module for SIPROTEC 5 enables simple
upgrading from SIPROTEC 5 devices to process bus solutions.
For an application template of a device there is an appropriate

communication mapping Figure 3.7/22. In a communication
matrix, the user modifies this mapping and erases and
completes his own information. This mapping file is finally
loaded by DIGSI 5 into the device, and determines the scope of
information that is provided via the protocol. Protocol mappings
can be copied between devices, if they contain the same functions, and can be exported into substation control applications.
3.7
[Sip5_Prozessbusloesung_front, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.7/23 Process bus solution IEC 61850-9-2: SIPROTEC 5 device

with merging units SIPROTEC 7SC805
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication Arrangement relative to parallel operation in the feeder with process bus
Arrangement relative to parallel operation in the feeder
with process bus
To test the process bus, a simple protection can be used for a
feeder. Modern protection devices such as the SIPROTEC 5 series
have a modular expandable design. For instance, an existing
SIPROTEC 7SJ85 overcurrent protection device can be expanded
with process bus inputs. This enables a cost efficient piloting. As
another benefit, state-of-the-art protection devices are capable
of effi ciently protecting more than one object. One SIPROTEC
7SJ85, for example, is sufficient to protect up to seven feeders.
These two features and the fact that overcurrent protection only
requires the currents of a merging unit enable effective parallel
operation. If a system with less than seven feeders is protected
with one device, this device will still have available capacity. This
allows for a parallel arrangement with the process bus. For this
purpose, the device is fi tted with a process bus input module
and the feeder current is simultaneously measured in a merging
unit. The current measured by the merging unit is subsequently
connected to the protection device via the process bus. The
protection device receives the measured current values twice.
Once, it measures the values itself and the second time it
receives the current values via the process bus. The protection
function is instantiated twice. The protection device protects the
same feeder via the conventional setting and via the process
bus. This enables direct comparison of the process bus and the
direct measurement.
[dw_prozessbus_eines_wdl_7sj85_200115, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.7/24 Arrangement relative to parallel operation in the feeder

with process bus
Design to communicate means:
Adaptation to the topology of your communication structure using settings (ring, star or network)
Scalable redundancy in hardware and software (protocols) to match your requirements
Pluggable, upgradeable communication modules

Extensive routines for testing connections, functions and
operating workflows
[dw_Komm-protokoll_Stationsleittechnik, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/25 Communication protocols in the substation automation technology and in network control systems
3.7
SIPROTEC 5 System
Safety and Security Concept Safety
Safety for personnel and equipment are first priority, but
availability is also critically important. And as the plant
landscape becomes more and more open and complex, the
conventional security mechanisms are no longer adequate.
For this reason, a security concept has been implemented
in the SIPROTEC 5 device architecture that is designed to
address the multidimensional aspects of security in a
holistic approach.
Multilayer safety mechanisms in all links of the system
safety chain provide you with the highest possible level of
safety and availability.
Safety and Cyber Security includes:
Security concept in device design

Information security against IT attacks (IT threats from
the outside)
Safety
Multilayer safety mechanisms
Safety comprises all aspects of protection for personnel and
primary equipment installations. The devices and DIGSI 5
support this from the functional standpoint. Cyber security
measures ensure secure operations in networks. The manufacturer can support the user with these measures. The responsibility to implement a comprehensive cyber security concept lies
with the operator of the system. The concept must consider all
system components with regards to all technical aspects of
Cyber security.
load, prolongs service life and enables error-free operation in

a wide ambient temperature range.
High availability is achieved with the auxiliary power supply
concept. Central wide range supply ensures the provision of a

common voltage to all components. Individually required
voltage levels are created in the modules concerned. Thus,
the possible outage of a local voltage level causes only one
module to malfunction, not the entire device. This selective
outage is reported.
Crossover wiring of internal analog/digital converters enables

the devices analog inputs to be monitored effectively and
potentially threatened functions to be blocked early, like
differential protection if a current channel fails.
Storage of calibration data in the analog acquisition module

enables completely safe exchange or extensions within the
module unit.
Fully pluggable terminals and plug-in module mean that a
wiring test is no longer necessary when devices or modules

are replaced.
Now that the current transformer is integrated in the terminal
block (Safety CT-Plug), open secondary current circuits cannot

occur anymore during replacement of a device or a module.
When the terminal is pulled out, the transformer is always
opened on the safe, secondary circuit.
The device does not need to be opened to adjust binary input

thresholds or adapt them to the rated current of the transformer (1 A, 5 A). The device does not need to be opened to
replace the battery or change the plug-in modules.
Safety in the hardware design
The device system consisting of configured hardware building

blocks, each with its own cooling system, reduces thermal
[dw_safety-security, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.8/1 Graphic of distinction between safety and security
3.8
3.8/1
Monitoring functions
Hardware monitoring
Comprehensive monitoring functions ensure secure operation

by fast detection of irregularities and automatic initiation of
appropriate measures to avert incorrect responses. Depending
on the severity of the irregularity detected, a warning may be
issued, the functions concerned be blocked, or the entire device
may be isolated by disconnecting the life contact. In all cases,
the diagnostic buffer outputs the cause and appropriate takeaction instruction.
All hardware in the device is continuously monitored. This

includes for example the CPU, the auxiliary voltage, the battery
status, the internal clock, the storage modules, the analog
inputs, the bus connections, the expansion and communication
modules.
Monitoring of the analog inputs
As a data source for the protection functions, monitoring of the
analog inputs is assured in multiple stages. Some monitoring
SIPROTEC 5 System
Safety and Security Concept Safety
functions are primarily dedicated to the commissioning (incorrect or missing connections) and only generate a warning indication. These include:
Current and voltage balance

Current and voltage sum
Phase-rotation supervision.
Monitoring of protection interfaces
32-bit CRC checksum monitoring compliant with CCITT/ ITU

for detecting corrupted telegrams
Invalid telegrams are fl agged and are not used by the protection system
Sporadic interference is ignored, persistent interference trig-
Other monitoring functions detect outages during operation

and rapidly initiate blocking of the affected functions:
gers blocking of the affected protection (differential protection) and control functions
Propagation times are measured and taken into account for

purposes of differential protection
Fuse failure monitor (loss of voltage)

Fast current sum supervision and broken wire monitoring for
the power circuits.
In addition, the proper working method of all analog-digital

converters is assured by plausibility monitoring at the sampling
level.
The topology of the protected area is monitored. Outages in
the communication connections automatically trigger

switching to other communication paths (ring to chain operation or hot standby), or otherwise to blocking the entire
protected area. The same applies if outage of a device in the
topology is detected.
Tripping circuit monitoring (ANSI 74TC)
Monitoring of IEC 61850 GOOSE messages
The circuit-breaker coil and its feed lines are monitored via two
binary inputs. If the tripping circuit is interrupted, and alarm
indication is generated.
CRC checksum monitoring, sequence number monitoring and
Communication connections
Applications consider the state of GOOSE messages that are
Telegrams are monitored for correct transmission. Faults are

reported via warning messages. Data associated with protection
and control is transmitted via protection interfaces and IEC
61850 GOOSE messages. The transmitted information is also
monitored constantly on the receiving side.
repetition time monitoring for detecting incorrect or missing

telegrams
corrupt or transmitted under test conditions and switch to
safe mode.
[dw_ueberw-analog-eingang-bei-ADU, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.8/2 Monitoring of analog input circuits for malfunctions during analog-to-digital conversion
Load management
The free confi gurability of protection functions and function
charts (CFC) enables them to be adapted to an enormous range
of applications. During engineering with DIGSI 5, the integrated
load model calculates the resulting device load. This ensures
that only viable confi gurations can be loaded into the device.
and guarantee secure operation. This is particularly critical when

protection and control-related data is transmitted via protection
interfaces and IEC 61850 GOOSE messages. But it applies
equally for signal processing in the function charts (CFC).
Standardized management of device modes

Test modes and the health status of information are forwarded
and handled uniformly and consistently throughout the entire
system. Analysis functions take the modes into consideration
3.8
SIPROTEC 5 System
Safety and Security Concept Cyber Security
Cyber Security
transmitted data are ensured. This hinders manipulation and

unauthorized access of the data.
Establishment of connection after password verification
Optionally, a connection password can be set up on the device.
Remote access via the Ethernet cannot take place until the user
enters the password. Only after the connection has been established does the user have read/write access to the device. This
connection password conforms to the cyber security requirements for assigning passwords defined in NERC CIP. It has 8 to
30 characters and must include upper and lower case letters,
digits and special characters. Through this secure transmission
protocol, the integrity and confidentiality of the transmitted
data are ensured. This hinders manipulation and unauthorized
access of the data.
Greater safety via confirmation ID
Safety prompts must be answered for safety-relevant actions,
such as changing parameters, in order to obtain write access to
the device. These safety prompts can be configured by the user,
and may be different for different fields of application.
Secure logging
[dw_cyber-security, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.8/3 SIPROTEC 5 functional integration Cyber security
With the increasing integration of bay devices in Ethernet-based

communication networks, communication must be secured
against internal disturbances and attacks from outside. Standards and directives such as NERC CIP (North American Electric
Reliability Corporation Critical Infrastructure Protection) and
the BDEW white paper (Requirements for Secure Control and
Telecommunications Systems of the Bundesverband der
Energie- und Wasserwirtschaft e.V) contain requirements for the
safe operation of devices in the critical communications infrastructure, and are directed at both manufacturers and operators.
Cyber Security must be incorporated into the design of devices
right from the start. This has been carried out systematically in
the case of SIPROTEC 5. Measures in the hardware ensure that
key material for protecting the communication and datasets of a
device is stored in absolute security. Communication stacks that
are hardened against cyber attacks, a multistage access concept
in operation and permanent logging of all authorized and unauthorized access attempts and of critical cyber security actions
provide the operator with a high degree of cyber security when
the devices are integrated in the operator's network.
By default only the connection of DIGSI 5 is enabled in the
device. All other Ethernet services and their ports are deactivated by default in the device and can be enabled with DIGSI5 .
If, for example, only the ring redundancy protocol RSTP is used,
then as the user you enable this with DIGSI 5 (Figure 3.8/4). The
secure standard configuration provides a potential attacker no
open interfaces and only services that are really in use are activated in a network.
Unsuccessful and unauthorized access attempts are also

recorded and an alarm can be triggered by an independent telecontrol link. The execution of safety-critical actions is logged.
These log entries are safeguarded against deletion. They can be
transmitted to the substation automation unit and archived
there.
Integrity protection for files
All files that can be loaded into the device via DIGSI 5 are digitally signed. In this way, corruption from outside by viruses or
trojans, for example from maliciously manipulated firmware
files, is reliably prevented.
Secure standard configuration
By default only the connection of DIGSI 5 is enabled in the
device. All other Ethernet services and their ports are deactivated by default in the device and can be enabled with DIGSI 5.
If, for example, only the ring redundancy protocol RSTP is used,
then as the user you enable this with DIGSI 5 (Figure 3.8/4). The
secure standard configuration provides a potential attacker no
open interfaces and only services that are really in use are activated in a network.
It is often not desirable to have to enter connection passwords
and confirmation IDs during the configuration and testing
phase. During operation, however, the focus is on the reading
of data. Comprehensive access security can be deactivated in
the device until commissioning has been completed and then
reactivated for operation.
Authentication
3.8
3.8/3
Secure authentication takes place between the device and

DIGSI 5. This precludes another program from accessing the
devices and reading or writing data there. Through this secure
transmission protocol, the integrity and confidentiality of the
SIPROTEC 5 System
Safety and Security Concept Cyber Security
[onlyRSTP_de, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.8/4 Isolatable communication services during access via

Ethernet networks
Product Security Blueprint

The Product Security Blueprint in conjunction with the "Application Note SIP5-APP-009" for SIPROTEC 5 devices provide you
with valuable hints in integrating devices in your network and
operating them securely. An overall security concept should be
drawn up and maintained in a "Spanning Security Blueprint".
This documents typical network configurations, the services
used, and their ports. Measures for updating the components
that are critical for cyber security, password protection and antivirus protection are also described.
Figure 3.8/5 shows a recommendation of this kind for

protecting switchgear. The SIPROTEC 5 devices are integrated in
optical Ethernet rings via switches. In these rings, each Ethernetbased substation automation protocol, for example, IEC 61850
or DNP3 TCP and the systems control run without loss of
performance. Accesses from a non-secure external network are
allowed via a gateway that is responsible for safeguarding the
network. The accessing party is authenticated, for example, by
DIGSI 5, in the gateway, and communication is encrypted via
VPN. This is fully supported by the communication services of
DIGSI 5.
[dw_schaltanlage-mit-remote-zugriff, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.8/5 Secure operation of devices within switchgear with remote

access from an external network
The technical control network and the network for remote

access can also be separated entirely by appropriate selection of
an independent Ethernet port for communication between the
device and DIGSI 5. This falls within the scope of the operator's
philosophy. With their concept of pluggable modules, the
devices also enable solutions with separate networks. An extensive range of cyber security features have been integrated in
SIPROTEC 5 and DIGSI 5, and these are described in the next
section.
Security patch management (security updates) for DIGSI 5
In response to the requirements for protecting power plants,
patch management was introduced for DIGSI 5. This means
that regular security updates for the software components from
third-party vendors integrated into DIGSI 5 or used by DIGSI 5
are tested for compatibility with DIGSI 5. A list of available
security updates and compatibility notes is made available for
downloading in the Internet and is updated at monthly intervals
Safety and Cyber Security means:
Long-lasting, rugged hardware with outstanding EMC

immunity and resistance to weather and mechanical
loads
Sophisticated self-monitoring routines identify and
report device malfunctions immediately and reliably
Conformance with the stringent Cyber Security requirements defined in the BDEW Whitepaper and NERC CIP
Encryption along the entire communication segment

between DIGSI 5 and the device
Automatic recording of access attempts and security-critical operations on the devices and systems
3.8
SIPROTEC 5 System
Test DIGSI 5 Test Suite
3.9
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with extensive test and

diagnostic functions. These are available to users in
SIPROTEC 5 in conjunction with DIGSI 5, and they shorten
the testing and commissioning phase significantly.
The DIGSI 5 Test Suite offers:
Simulation of binary signals and analog sequences by

integrated test equipment
Hardware and wiring test

Testing device functionality and protection functions
Circuit-breaker test and AR test functions
Communication test including loop test
Analysis of logic diagrams
DIGSI 5 Test Suite
The objective of the extensive test and diagnostic functions that
are made available to the user with SIPROTEC 5 together with
DIGSI 5 is to shorten testing and commissioning times. All test
functions are integrated in DIGSI 5. This enables engineering
including the device test to be carried out with one tool. The
most important functions should be listed as examples here.
There are also other specific test functions depending on the
device type.
in a simulation mode. For this, the analog and binary inputs are
decoupled from the process and connected to the integrated
test sequencer.
The tester uses DIGSI 5 to create a test sequence, for example, a
short-circuit sequence, loads it into the device and runs it in
simulation mode. The test sequencer in DIGSI 5 is capable of
combining up to six test steps in one test sequence. When
loaded into the device, this test sequence is run in real time and
simulates the functions of the device like a real process at binary
and analog inputs. Protection functions, control, logic functions,
and communication can thus be tested in real time without
secondary test equipment.
The test sequence is started manually from DIGSI 5 or controlled
via a binary input. This also makes it possible to test the interaction between several devices.
Hardware and wiring test
In the hardware test, the state of the binary inputs can be read
out by DIGSI 5, and contacts and LEDs can be switched or routed
through DIGSI 5 for test purposes.
The parameters measured at voltage and current inputs are
represented in phasor diagrams divided according to magnitude and phase angle (Figure 3.9/2). Thus it is easy to detect
and check if the connections in the measurand wiring are transposed, as well as the vector group or the direction between
current and voltage. In devices that are connected via protection
interfaces, even analog measurement points of remote ends can
be represented as vectors. This makes it easy to check the
stability of a differential protection.
In the wiring test, the wiring connections between devices are
tested. If the devices are connected to a network via Ethernet,
this test can be carried out with unprecedented ease. For this,
the contact on a device is closed with the aid of DIGSI 5. This
contact is connected to a binary input of one or more
SIPROTEC 5 devices via a wire connection. These automatically
send a report to DIGSI 5 to the effect that the binary input has
been picked up by the closing of the contact. The tester can
then log this test and check the wiring between the devices.
[dw_test, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.9/1 SIPROTEC 5 functional integration test
Integrated test sequencer

The integrated test sequencer enables functions to be tested via
the test sequencer integrated in the device. Normally, the device
receives analog and binary signals from the process or from an
external secondary test equipment. Previously, the protection
functions and communication were tested with variables such
as these. With SIPROTEC 5 devices these variables can now be
substituted with values supplied from integrated test equipment
3.9/1
[Analog_Inputs, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.9/2 Display of analog measuring points in phasor diagrams
SIPROTEC 5 System
Test Testing device functionality and protection functions
Testing device functionality and protection functions
The graphical representation of characteristic curves or
diagrams of protection functions not only help the engineer
who parameterizes the test functions, but also the engineer
who tests them (Figure 3.9/3).
In this test, the operating point of a protection function is represented graphically in the diagrams, e.g., the calculated impedance of a distance protection in the zone diagram. Additionally,
messages relating to the protection function are logged, e.g.
pickup or operate.
transmitting side Tx of an interface, and these are measured

again at the receiving interface Rx. The user thus has the capability to insert loops at various points in the communication
network and to test the connection of the loop. The number of
telegrams sent, received and corrupted is displayed continuously in DIGSI 5, so that the quality of the connection can be
monitored.
3.9
This test can be carried out with signals from the process or with
the test equipment integrated in the device.
[dw_loop-test, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.9/4 Loop test for protection interfaces
Online monitoring of communication connections

The data flow at communication interfaces can be constantly
monitored. To do this, the number of telegrams that are sent,
received and corrupted per time unit for serial connections and
Ethernet interfaces during operation is constantly measured and
displayed. If faults occur, an alarm can be issued. A network
management and monitoring system performs detailed monitoring of Ethernet modules via the SNMP protocol.
[Protection_test_curve_Fault_EN, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.9/3 Test of protection function with operating point of the

protection function in response characteristic curve
For protection interfaces the delay time of the signals is also

monitored, and it is calculated during synchronization by means
of a highly precise second pulse in the transmit and receive
directions. Additionally, the communication topology is also
monitored constantly there and displayed in DIGSI 5. GOOSE
connections can be monitored permanently at the receiving site
during operation. This means that an outage is detected within
a few seconds.
Circuit-breakter test and AR test function
Protocol test
Switching sequences can be initiated via DIGSI 5 to test the

automatic reclosing (AR). However, this is only possible if
remote switching via the key switch is permitted. In addition, a
safety prompt (confirmation ID) must be entered for switching
authorization via DIGSI 5.
For the protocol test, specific signal values are set and reset
using DIGSI 5 (Figure 3.9/5). The test mode itself is configurable. The device sends the selected value to the client using the
configured communication protocol, for example IEC 61850. In
this case, a report is generated or a GOOSE message is sent
automatically when this information is switched correspondingly.
There are additional safety prompts for non-interlocked

switching. This provides protection against unauthorized use or
inadvertent actuation during operation. A circuit-breaker test
can also be deactivated and activated without an interlocking
check.
Communication testing
The device can be used to test systems control information for

all protocols (for example, IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103, serial
DNP3, DNP3 TCP) without the going through the process of
generating signal states with test equipment. Signals that that
are transmitted across protection interfaces can also be tested.
Since communication is an integral component of the devices

and they are interconnected either directly or via substation
control system, they must be thoroughly tested at commissioning and monitored continuously during operation. The integrated test tools assist the user in ensuring that the communication routes are tested and monitored efficiently.
Loop test for the communication connections
This test is launched by DIGSI 5 for a communication module
and a selected interface if a protection interface is configured at
a remote line end. It is used to detect disturbances in subsections when inspecting the physical connection of the communication route (Figure 3.9/4). Test telegrams are sent from the
SIPROTEC 5 System
Test Test and display of external timers
tion charts (CFC) can thus be created offline in the office and
tested without using a device.
3.9
[Protokolltest, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.9/5 Protocol test for substation automation technology or for

GOOSE and protection interfaces
Test and display of external timers

If the system time of the device is set externally using 1 or 2
timers, this time can be read out in the device or with DIGSI 5.
When the time protocol returns these values, it indicates which
timer is setting the system time and issues a statement
regarding the quality of the time source. Synchronization via
external clocks can thus be monitored and displayed during
operation (Figure 3.9/6).
[Interlocking, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.9/7 Easy analysis of function charts
Using the DIGSI 5 Test Suite means:
Considerably shorter testing and commissioning time

Having commissioning support personnel in the adjacent
substation is not absolutely necessary
All test routines performed are documented

Testing using secondary test equipment is for the most
part unnecessary
[DIGSI5_TimeSynch, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.9/6 Test of external timers
Analysis of logic diagrams (CFC debugging)

Logic diagrams prepared in the form of function charts (CFCs)
can be tested offline in DIGSI 5. To this end, test sequences can
be generated with the DIGSI 5 sequencer to act on logical inputs
of the function chart or the analog and binary inputs of the
device. This makes it possible to test not only the function chart
but also its interaction with upstream and downstream functions. During this test, the values of variables are displayed and
their changes over time are logged in records that can be
analyzed later, for example, with SIGRA. This enables even
complex temporal dependencies to be analyzed with ease. Func3.9/3
SIPROTEC 5 System
Engineering Product selection via the order configurator
In project engineering with SIPROTEC 5, your workflow is
the central focus from the beginning with the single-line
diagram of the primary system on to ordering, engineering
and parameter setting all the way through to testing and
commissioning. For you, this means: fewer errors, higher
quality and higher efficiency.
3.10
For you, holistic workflow means optimal, integrated

support for all project phases:
Project specification
Device engineering
System engineering
Commissioning
Operation and service
Product selection via the order configurator
The order configurator assists you in the selection of SIPROTEC 5
products. The order configurator is a Web application that can
be used with any browser. The SIPROTEC-5 configurator can be
used to configure complete devices or individual components,
such as communication modules or expansion modules.
At the end of the configuration process, the product code and a
detailed presentation of the configuration result are provided. It
clearly describes the product and also serves as the order
number.
All functions from the library
The SIPROTEC 5 devices always have a basic functionality available depending on device type. You can extend these flexibly
with any desired functions from the library. Additional functions
are paid with your credit balance, which is reflected in function
points. The function-point calculator assists you in finding the
correct function point value for your application. This guarantees that the selected device has the required functionality.
[Konfiguration_1, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/1 Representation of configuration result (hardware details)
In the SIPROTEC 5 system, the main function is determined by

the selection of the device type, while the scope of the additional functionality is determined by a single property, the function points value. This means that the functionality does not
have to be fixed in detail during product selection. In the later
engineering phase, any optional additional function can be
selected from the device-specific function library. You must
simply ensure that your balance of function points ordered for
the device is not exceeded. Extra function points can simply be
reordered at any time.
Clearly presented result representation
The successful configuration of a device is represented on a
clearly organized result page. You can also save the result as
a .pdf file (see Figure 3.10/2). The specified product code can
then be adopted directly into the information system or the
ordering system or DIGSI 5 (www.siemens.com/siprotec).
SIPROTEC 5 System
Engineering Product selection via the order configurator
3.10
[Konfiguration_2, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/2 Representation of configuration result (functional scope)
3.10/2
SIPROTEC 5 System
Engineering DIGSI 5
3.10
[DIGSI 5_BO, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/3 Structure of the DIGSI 5 user interface
DIGSI 5
The product code calculated with the SIPROTEC 5 configurator
can be adopted directly into the engineering program DIGSI 5. In
this way, you create your selected devices directly in DIGSI 5.
Since all device characteristics are unambiguously specified via
the product code, engineering work with DIGSI 5 starts on a
consistent basis without the need for a time-consuming re-entry
of the device characteristics.
From planning to engineering up to testing DIGSI 5
The engineering tool DIGSI 5 assists you in your workflow from
planning to operation of your systems with SIPROTEC 5 devices.
With DIGSI 5 you have full control over the engineering. The
functional scope of the tool covers all tasks from device
configuration and device setting to commissioning and evaluation of fault data.
This is how a modern, efficient engineering process looks in
short form:
In the rough planning, the system layout is documented using
CAD. This system layout is prepared as the basis for the detail
planning in the Single-line Editor. Depending on the application,
the required functionality (protection functions, control and
automation scope as well as auxiliary functions) is defined and a
device is selected. In the next step, the device is assigned an
application template tailored to the application. Function adaptations are possible at any time after the selection of the application template. The high-performance copy functions with
consistency checks enable rapid project engineering. Then the

system configuration (routings, implementation of corresponding logic into function charts (CFC)) and the parameterization must also be performed.
The new program structure of DIGSI 5 is designed to optimally
support the required work steps during a project. The application-oriented engineering approach guarantees that you are
always focused on the workflow. DIGSI 5 makes you more
productive from design to engineering and even with installation, commissioning and operation.
The project view guides you through the entire workflow
In DIGSI 5 processing and maintenance of all components of
IEDs and of all associated data is carried out in a project-oriented
fashion. This means that the topology, devices, parameter
values, communication settings, process data and much more
are stored in one project.
All devices are available in one central location. By simply
opening the device in the project tree, the entire contents are
made available. When you begin with a device, you can edit
your tasks simply and intuitively.
The user interface of DIGSI 5 is divided into several areas (Figure
3.10/3). In the project tree on the left, everything that belongs
to your project is displayed, for example devices and global
settings. Double-clicking on an entry opens up an editor in the
main panel of the window. This can be, for example, an editor
SIPROTEC 5 System
Engineering DIGSI 5
for changing protection parameters, for configuring communication mappings or for creating function charts (CFC).
3.10
In the lower area of the screen view, you can quickly and
conveniently access the properties of all elements (for example,
with circuit breakers or signals). This area also contains lists with
warnings and errors.
The libraries are particularly important in DIGSI 5. They are
located on the right and contain everything that is used in the
editors. Here you select the required scope and insert it into
your project. When configuring the hardware, you can select
different hardware components, for example, a communication
module. On the other hand, if you are working with function
charts (CFC), you select the corresponding logical building
blocks and select the required functionality while configuring
the protection scope. For this purpose, you move the elements
to the position of the editor where you need them.
Visual definition of the primary topology in single lines
The single-line diagram describes the primary topology of your
system. (Figure 3.10/4). For this, simply select the correct
single-line template from the library. Further processing, for
example, an extension, is possible without difficulty. DIGSI 5
contains a library with elements that are familiar to you from
the ANSI and ISO standards.
well as circuit breakers). Thus, a topological reference is created.

Setting values of the transformers (primary and secondary rated
values, as well as the neutral point formation with current transformers) can then be adopted from the single-line diagram.
Design of user-defined control displays
With the display editor you can create or change the factory-set
displays, known as control displays. The editor assists you in a
typical workflow. You simply decide which fields of your already
created single-line diagram are to be used for the display pages
and that is all there is to it. Naturally, the displays can also be
completely newly created or imported. To do this, drag a signal
from the library to a dynamic element in the display and the
connection is created. Besides the use of icons in accordance
with the IEC and ANSI standards, you can create your own static
or dynamic icons in an icon editor.
Routing and assignment
The routing matrix is one of the most important functionalities
of DIGSI 5. It is conveniently divided between 2 editors: "Information routing" and "communication mapping". Both views are
designed such that you can quickly complete your task. With
pre-defined or user-defined filters, you reduce the displayed
information to a minimum. As in Excel, you can select which
information is to be displayed for each column (Figure 3.10/6).
In the matrix, all signals are sorted according to function and
function groups. Sources and targets are displayed as columns.
The scope reaches from the compressed form of representation
to a detailed representation of information in which you can
view and change each piece of information (routing to binary
inputs and outputs, LEDs, logs, etc.) in different columns. In this
way, all information can be configured very simply.
For communication mapping all necessary settings are already
populated for the selected protocol. You can adapt these simply
and quickly to your needs.
With a large selection of filters and the option to open and close
rows and columns, you will find it easy to display only the information that you need.
Saving time is a priority with DIGSI 5. All table-based data
displays furnish the functionality to fill adjacent cells with a
single mouse-click in the same way you know from Excel.
[SLE_two_bays, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/4 Graphical definition of the topology of a substation in the

single line
From the application to the solution: Application templates

and their modification
After the topology has been defined, the next step is to add the
required device. You simply use the ordering code from the
configurator in DIGSI 5 and your device specification is already
known. In the next step, you select the application template
appropriate for your application and adapt it according to your
requirements. Remove functions that are not needed and add
the desired functions. The library offers you an extensive selection that you can use for this. The consistency of the device
configuration is continually checked. Finally, you can graphically
connect the application template with the primary elements of
the single-line diagram (voltage and current transformers as
3.10/4
SIPROTEC 5 System
Engineering DIGSI 5
modes offer you a compressed view of the building blocks and
connection points, so that you can see all the information you
need without having to scroll through it.
3.10
Even the use of signals in a function chart (CFC) is designed to

be simpler. Drag a signal via drag and drop from the signal
library to the input or output port of a building block and you
are finished. Created logic plans can be tested even without
devices (offline) with DIGSI 5. This ensures the necessary quality
for commissioning and gives you a time advantage.
[Change_CT_ratio, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/5 Graphical linkage of primary and secondary equipment
[CFC, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/7 Simple creation of automations with the CFC editor
Setting the parameters of the device

All parameter settings are represented in the same way. This
occurs in the parameter editor, which displays all parameters of
a function. Here you have the choice between different views of
the settings. On the one hand there is a primary view where you
can directly enter the primary setting values.
Protecting your plant better against invalid operations
In this way, you can avoid using conversion factor ratios, which
can lead to setting errors. The same applies for the "per unit"
view where setting parameters refer to object rated values. If
you decide on the secondary view, the setting parameters must
be converted to secondary values.
A PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) where, for example,

standard interlockings can be executed, is integrated in
SIPROTEC 5 devices. If you want to change or adapt these, use
the function chart (CFC) editor that is included as a component
in DIGSI 5 Standard and Premium. Thanks to the fully graphical
user interface, even users without programming knowledge can
fully utilize the functional scope and thus flexibly adapt the
functionality of the device (Figure 3.10/7).
For setting special protection characteristics, the graphical

representation of the characteristics is advantageous. In the
parameter editor, all characteristic variants of the function are
represented. Through this, you can graphically check the effects
of changes in the settings immediately. Setting values of
different settings groups can quickly and easily be compared in
a common window, differences can be detected and compensated for (Figure 3.10/8).
[Information_routing_long, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/6 The entire flexibility of the information routing editor
For this, an entire library is available to you with building blocks

that are compatible with IEC 61131-3. This library contains
simple logical operators, such as AND, but also complex functions such as timers, command chains for switching sequences,
and much more.
The use of the editor is more efficient than ever before. You
thus need fewer building blocks in order to achieve your objectives. This decisively improves the readability of the function
chart (CFC). New display modes also increase clarity. The new
SIPROTEC 5 System
Engineering DIGSI 5
3.10
[Function Settings_with_diagram, 1, en_US]
[Test sequence, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/8 Easy parameter setting
Figure 3.10/9 Definition of test sequences for comprehensive tests of

device configurations
Cooperating in teams
Improve your engineering performance by cooperating in
teams. Using extensive export and import functions, one crew
can define the protection parameters and work on the routing
settings while others set system interface parameters. The individual areas can be updated at any time with new entries of
colleagues. For example, when the protection parameter crew
has updated its data, this data can be adopted into the project.
Comprehensive testing support during commissioning and
operation
The testing and diagnostic functions assist you in the commissioning phase. You can thus quickly and simply test the wiring
or observe the effect that a message carried over the system
interface has in the superordinate station. The error messages
that are recorded in the event of a disturbance of the protected
object in the relay are listed in DIGSI 5 and can be displayed,
saved and printed for documentation purposes.
The new testing options are an innovation. Multi-level test
sequences can be defined (even for phasor factors) via a
sequence functionality. These are loaded into the device with
DIGSI 5 and simulate the physical inputs there. These are then
executed in the device via the integrated test sequencer, which
simulates the analog process values. In this way, you can define
and execute complex checks for testing your project engineering and logic at an early stage.
With the test and diagnostic functions, extensive test equipment
is no longer necessary or its tests are reduced to a minimum.
Processes that were developed for testing special protection
principles, such as for line differential protection, can be found
in the appropriate device manual. The function chart (CFC)
editor also offers new analysis functions. DIGSI 5 thus enables
offline debugging of logic plans as well as tracing of measured
values both in the representation of the logic plan and in the
representation of lists. This reduces overall testing effort during
commissioning. The results of the function chart (CFC) analysis
can also be represented after completion of the test sequence,
for example, with the assistance of SIGRA. Thus, even complex
runtime relations can easily be analyzed.
3.10/6
[Grafische_Konfiguration, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/10 Graphical configuration of network connections

between devices
Direct online access of all accessible devices

DIGSI 5 also assists you in your workflow if your devices engineered offline are connected to the devices in your plant in your
system. In DIGSI 5, all devices accessible via communication
interfaces are displayed immediately next to your offline
devices. The preferred communication in networks is Ethernet.
Naturally, you can individually access devices via a USB interface. In order to work with a physical device, connect the online
device and offline configuration via drag and drop, and you are
done.
Besides transferring the device configuration to individual
devices, you can also automatically transfer all device configurations to your devices.
Besides online access, in addition to reading fault records and
message logs, you can also display measured values and
messages. You can save snapshots of measured values and
SIPROTEC 5 System
Engineering IEC 61850 - Ethernet-based substation automation protocol
messages in archives for subsequent analysis or for documenting tests of temporary operating states or commissioning.
Openness through import and export
DIGSI 5 offers a broad spectrum of exchange formats. These
include the standard formats of IEC 61850 as well as the
uniform data exchange format TEAX of Siemens Energy Automation Tools. This XML-based format is the foundation for all
import-export scenarios and ensures efficient workflows in the
engineering process. Since data must only be entered once,
engineering effort is reduced and you profit from consistent
data quality at all levels of automation.
Besides efficient data exchange for the levels of power automation, the XML data format also supports easy exchange of data
with other applications.
neering of the devices. Similarly, you can export the settings

data to other applications for further processing. It is thus easy
to exchange data with other power distribution applications, for
example, network calculations, protection data administration/
evaluation and data for the protection function test.
3.10
With Siemens ENEAS Generic Solutions, Siemens is taking the

next step forwards and offers a modular system with defined
templates, consisting of precise definitions and ready-made
project engineering and documentation solutions for configurations, SIPROTEC bay devices, SICAM station units, operating
management, for functions and communication. The result is
that all project phases from planning to commissioning, as well
as all upgrades, expansions and maintenance, are more efficient.
Via the import interface, you can read data from other applications into DIGSI 5. This thus enables external project engi-
[dw_engineering_appl, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.10/11 Open exchange formats allow reuse of data at all levels
IEC 61850 - Ethernet-based substation automation protocol

IEC 61850 is more than just a substation automation protocol.
The standard comprehensively defines data types, functions and
communication in station networks. In Edition 2, the influence
of the standard is extended to more sectors of the energy supply
industry. Siemens actively participated in designing the process
of adapting Edition 1 to Edition 2 for the purposes of the standardization framework. Edition 2 fills in certain omissions and
defines additional applications. As a global market leader with
Edition 1 SIPROTEC 4 devices, we have resolved the issues of
interoperability, flexibility and compatibility between Editions 1
and 2: Cooperation with Edition 1 devices is possible without
difficulties.
Flexible object modeling, freedom in addressing objects and
flexible communication services assure the highest possible

degree of interoperability and effective exchange and expansion concepts.
Full compatibility and interoperability with IEC 61850 Editions

1 and 2
The internal structure of SIPROTEC 5 devices conforms to IEC

61850. The net result is that for the first time an integrated,
end-to-end system and device engineering, from the single
plant line to device parameterization, conforming to the guiding
principles of IEC 61850 is possible.
IEC 61850
Converting the complexity of the IEC 61850 data model into

your familiar user language
Integrated, consistent system and device engineering (from

the single line of the plant to device parameterization on the
basis of the IEC 61850 data model)
SIPROTEC 5 System
ices assure the highest possible degree of interoperability and
effective exchange and expansion concepts.
The name of the logical device (ldName) is freely editable. For
example, the standard-conforming name CTRL can be changed
to CONTROL. Structural changes can also be made by changing
the logical device (LD), so that the interface structure can be
flexibly adapted to the user's own requirements. Rigid manufacturer specifications are a thing of the past. Prefix and instance of
the logical node (LN) can also be edited.
3.10
The standard prescribes the length and rules that are checked by
DIGSI 5 when they are entered.
[IEC_Change_CT_ratio, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.10/12 System specification and configuration in DIGSI 5 the

complexity of IEC 61850 is transparent
DIGSI 5 with integrated IEC 61850 engineering covers the

complexity of the standard with a sophisticated user interface.
In standard engineering, you as the user will not be required to
deal with the details of IEC 61850; you get to use your user
language.
In the user language, distance protection is distance protection
with zones and dependent functions, not a collection of logical
nodes. Reports are message lists in which information about the
systems control is configured. In the system configurator,
GOOSE connections are simply configured in a table with source
and target information. You work in your language, with functions and messages associated with a device. If you wish, you
can view the allocated IEC 61850 objects in the IEC 61850
protocol language. This bilingualism is supported throughout
the user interface by DIGSI 5 and the export files on the substation control system. As the user, you can even add helpful notes
to the data points you define in your language and then export
them for data purposes in the ICD and SCD description.
Function levels of a device, which the standard maps to logical

nodes (LN), can be deleted, copied, and extended with the
user's own objects. Messages can be added to a switching object
such as the LN XCBR, for example, monitoring messages for a
circuit breaker that have not been defined in the original LN. As
the user, you can route all of the information associated with a
given switching object into a logical node (LN).
Logical nodes (LN) can be added from a library. These instructions can be supplemented with your own objects. You can also
define and create generic nodes. For example, there are logical
nodes (LN) whose functionality you as the user create for yourself through logic functions. These user-defined functions can
be loaded into the device and run there. Monitoring functions
can be created and expanded as required.
A high degree of flexibility in communication is offered for
configuration of GOOSE messages and reports.
Addresses, dataset names, etc., can be set by you, the user.
Flexible engineering offers a high degree of design freedom on
many levels, enhancing interoperability for more complete
communication interchangeability. This in turn safeguards
investments in model devices in accordance with IEC 61850.
With the single-line diagram, you as the customer can view the
topological structure of the system. DIGSI 5 has been prepared
so that it can export this topological structure of a system to the
SSD file conforming to the standard. This description, as an
extension of the SCD file, represents the primary system for
technical data purposes. In the future, the objects of the device
with which processes of the primary system are controlled can
be adapted flexibly to reflect the customer's specifications. Flexible engineering is the key to bringing the system view into
harmony with the IEC 61850 structure of the device.
[DIGSI_catalog, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/13 Creating an IEC 61850 station
Flexible engineering offers IEC 61850 experts a wide range of

freedom to design their own IEC 61850 structure, including with
user-defined functions and objects. Flexible object modeling,
freedom in addressing objects and flexible communication serv-
3.10/8
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.10
[structure_editor, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.10/14 Editor for adapting the IEC 61850 structure in the
SIPROTEC 5 view
[One IEC 61850, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.10/15 An IEC 61850 system configurator for all devices in the station
IEC 61850 system configurator

The IEC 61850 system configurator is the manufacturer-neutral
solution for the interoperable engineering of IEC 61850
products and systems and supports all devices with IEC 61850,
not just Siemens products - like SIPROTEC 5, SIPROTEC 4,
SIPROTEC Compact, Reyrolle, SICAM RTUs, SICAM IO/AI/P85x/

Q100 but also devices from other areas (such as SITRAS PRO)
or from third parties.
The tool supports the SCL (substation configuration description
language) configuration files from the IEC 61850-6 through
SIPROTEC 5 System
Engineering Effective fault analysis with SIGRA
3.10
import or export of all formats (ICD/IID/CID/SCD/SSD/SED). Thus,

IEC 61850 devices can be added and a complete IEC 61850
station is available for the substation automation technology.
IEDs from the IEC 61850 standard of Edition 1 or Edition 2 are
supported. The possible engineering therefore includes not only
the GOOSE communication and the client/server configuration
via MMS reporting but also the system topology, the process bus
communication with SMV (sampled measured values) and the
IEC 60870-5-104 addresses for the gateway to the network
control center via IEC 61850-80-1.
Simple engineering thanks to customer-friendly workflows and
the universal display of IEC 61850 addresses as well as customer
description texts. Users with IEC 61850 basic or expert knowledge find the desired level of detail. For documentation
purposes, the engineering can be displayed in the web browser
in a customer-friendly form.
[TimeSignalsDiagram, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/16 SIGRA time signals
Harmonized interfaces of the tool, such as with DIGSI 4 and

DIGSI 5, reduce the engineering effort for Siemens engineering
even more.
Effective fault analysis with SIGRA
After a protection trip following a system incident, it is important that the fault is quickly and completely analyzed. With the
fault records saved in the SIPROTEC 5 devices, you can investigate and resolve even complicated faults. The high-performance
tool SIGRA assists you in your evaluation. Besides the usual timesignal representation of the recorded measurands, it is also
designed to display vector diagrams, locus diagrams and bar
charts in order to represent harmonics and data tables. From the
measured values recorded in the fault records, SIGRA calculates
additional values, such as missing quantities in the 3-phase
current system, impedance, symmetrical components, etc.
Defect tracing can be evaluated simply and conveniently using
2 measuring cursors.
You are also able to evaluate several fault records in parallel
with SIGRA. For example, the records from the ends of a line
differential protection: You can synchronize these to a common
time base, then process as usual and save as a new record
(representation in a diagram). Thus, the defect trend can be well
documented.
SIGRA also has an offline fault locator. In this context, the fault
records from the line ends are evaluated. Through the precise
determination of the fault location you save time, which you
can then use to investigate the fault on-site.
SIGRA can be used for all fault records present in the COMTRADE
and SIPROTEC file formats. The software product is available as
an optional package in addition to DIGSI 5 Standard, as a standalone variant, and is a component of DIGSI 5 Premium.
[VectorDiagram, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/17 SIGRA phasor diagram
Overview of functions
6 diagram types:
- Time-signal representation (standard)

- Circle diagrams (for example for RX)
- Vector diagrams (reading of angles)
- Bar chart (for example for visualizing harmonics)
- Table (with values of several signals at the same point in
time)
- Fault location determination (display of fault location)
Calculation of additional values, such as e.g. positive
sequence impedances, RMS values, symmetrical components,

phasors etc.
2 measuring cursors that are synchronized in all views

High-performance panning and zoom functions (e.g. section
enlargement)
User-friendly project engineering via drag & drop

Innovative signal routing in a clearly structured matrix
Time-saving user proles, which can be assigned to individual
relay types or series
Addition of further fault records and synchronization of

multiple fault records with a common time basis
Simple documentation through copying of the diagrams e.g.

into MS Ofce programs
Ofine fault location determination

SIPROTEC 5 System
Engineering Overview of functions
Commenting of fault records, commenting of individual
measuring points in diagrams and free placement of these

comments in diagrams
Application of mathematical operations to signals.
3.10
[Circle diagram new, 1, de_DE]
Figure 3.10/18 SIGRA circle diagrams
[Harmonics, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/19 SIGRA harmonics
DIGSI 5, IEC 61850 and SIGRA assist you in an optimal and

holistic manner for your SIPROTEC 5 project
Powerful and effective analysis of fault records

Integrated system and device engineering
Graphical user interface simplifies and accelerates
project engineering
Application templates and function groups as represen-
tations of the primary application and the primary

objects, such as the line or circuit breaker, ensure a useroriented working method and perspective
Test and simulations tools offer optimal plausibility

checks
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware Hardware building blocks - flexible and modular
3.11
The SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks offer a freely

configurable device. You have the choice: Either you use a
pre-configured device with a quantity structure already
tailored to your application, or you build a device yourself
from the extensive SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks to
exactly fit your application.
The flexible hardware building blocks offer you:
The SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks offer:

Durability and reliability
Tailored hardware extension

Robust housings
Excellent EMC shielding in compliance with the most recent
standards and IEC 61000-4
Base modules and expansion modules, each with
Extended temperature range: -25C to +70C.
Various on-site operation panels

A large number of modules for communication, meas-
Modular device technique
different I /O modules
ured value conversion
Hardware building blocks - flexible and modular

With SIPROTEC 5, Siemens has also taken a new path with the
design. Proven elements have been improved and innovative
ideas have been added. When looking at the new devices, their
modular structure is evident. In this way, the scope of the
process data can be adapted flexibly to the requirements in the
switchgear. You can choose: Either you use a pre-configured
device with a quantity structure already tailored to your application, or you build a device yourself from the SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks to exactly fit your application. Pre-configured devices can be extended or adapted as needed.
For the SIPROTEC devices 7xx85, 7xx86 and 7xx87, you can also
combine different base and expansion modules, add communication modules and select an installation variant that fits the
space you have available. The 7xx82 devices cannot be
expanded with expansion modules.
With this modular principle, you can realize any quantity structures you desire. In this way, hardware that is tailored to the
application can be selected. Figure 3.11/1 shows a modular
device consisting of a base module and 4 expansion modules.
Freely configurable and extendable devices

Large process data range (up to 40 current and voltage transformers for protection applications and up to 80 for central
busbar protection; more than 200 inputs and outputs for
recording applications possible)
Operation panel that is freely selectable for all device types

(for example, large or small display, with or without key
switches, detached operation panel)
Identical wiring of flush-mounting and surface-mounting

housings.
User-friendly operation panel
9 freely assignable function keys for frequently required operator control actions
Separate control keys for switching commands

Context-sensitive keys with labeling in the display
Complete numeric keypad for simple entry of setting values
and easy navigation in the menu
Up to 80 LEDs for signaling, 16 of which are in two colors.

User-friendly design
No opening of device necessary for installation and servicing

Easy battery replacement on the back of the device
Simple replacement of communication modules with plugin technology
Electronically settable (no jumpers) threshold for binary
inputs
Rated current (1 A/5 A) of current transformer inputs
configurable electronically
Removable terminal blocks

Pre-wiring of terminals is possible
Simple replacement of current transformers, for example
with sensitive ground-current transformers for network
conversions
[SIP5 GD_SS_LED_LED_oLED_W3, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/1 SIPROTEC 5 device built in modules
SIPROTEC 5 - the use of the modular building block

The SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks provide the cumulative experience of Siemens in digital protection devices and bay
controllers. In addition, specific innovations were realized that
make the application easier for you, such as recorder and PQ
functionalities.
3.11/1
Increased safety, since open current-transformer circuits are

no longer possible (safety CT plug).
Base and expansion modules
A SIPROTEC 5 device consists of a base module, up to 9 expansion modules and a power supply module for the optional
second row. Base and expansion modules are distinguished
firstly by their width. The base module is 1/3 x 19" wide. Located
on the rear panel are process connections and space for up to
two plug-in modules. The expansion modules and the power
supply for the second row are each 1/6 x 19 wide. Expansion
modules can provide either additional process connections or
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware On-site operation panel
communication connections and are available for the devices
7xx85, 7xx86, 7xx87 and 6MD8.
Figure 3.11/2 shows the rear panel of a device consisting of a

base module in which the power supply, the CPU board and an
input/output CPU module are permanently installed, as well as
4 expansion modules for extending the input/output quantity
structure, and communication modules. Each expansion module
contains an input/output module. The components are
connected by bus connector plugs and mechanical interlockings.
Such a device can be ordered pre-configured from the factory. In
this context, you can choose between the standard variants
predefined by Siemens and the devices you have combined
yourself. Every SIPROTEC 5 device can also be converted or
extended according to your wishes. The modular concept absolutely ensures that the final device meets all standards, particularly with regard to EMC and environmental requirements.
On-site operation panel

The on-site operation panel is a separate component of the
SIPROTEC 5 modular system. This allows you to combine a base
or expansion module with a suitable on-site operation panel,
according to your requirements. The modular system offers
3 different on-site operation panels for selection for base
modules and also for expansion modules.
3.11
The following variants are available for basic modules:
With a large display, keypad and 16 two-colored LEDs

With a small display, keypad and 16 two-colored LEDs
16 two-colored LEDs
[E_CC_SIP5_19Zoll_KomMod, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/2 Rear view of base module with 4 expansion modules
[Bedieneinheiten, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/3 Operation panels with (from left) large and small display, and operation panel without display
SIPROTEC 5 System
The following variants are available for extension modules:
3.11
Without operating or control elements

With 16 LEDs (single-colored)
With 16 LEDs (single-colored) and key switch
[Erweiterungsmodule, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.11/4 Designs of the expansion modules
The SIPROTEC 5 module is flexible regarding selection of the onsite operation panel. You can order any device type with a large
graphical display or with a smaller economical standard display.
For applications without device control, an operation panel
without display is also available. The operation panel with a
small display provides seven rows for measured values or menu
texts and the graphical representation of, for example, a single
busbar. All operation and control keys are available to the user,
that is, he can also control switching devices.
Elements of the on-site operation panels
The operator elements are illustrated with the example of the
on-site operation panel with a large display.
The central element is the generously sized display for text and
graphics. With its high resolution, it has ample space for icons in
graphical representations.
Below the display there is a 12-key block. In combination with 4
navigation keys and 2 option keys, you have everything you
need to navigate conveniently and quickly through all information that is shown in the display. 2 LEDs on the upper border of
the operation panel inform you about the current device operating state.
16 additional LEDs, to the left of the keypad, ensure quick,
targeted process feedback. The USB interface enables fast data
transfer. It is easily accessible from the front and well protected
with a plastic cover.
3.11/3
[Display, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.11/5 Display images - measured value and control display
The operation panel with large display can also show a complex
control display and thus offers more room for measured values
and the display of event lists. This operation panel is therefore
the first choice for bay controllers, busbar protection or
combined protection and electronic control units.
As a third option, an economical variant is available without
keypad and display. This variant is appropriate for devices that
are seldom or never used by the operational crew.
The keys O and I (red and green) for the direct control of equipment, a reset button for the LEDs, and the CTRL key for activating the system diagram complete the operation panel.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Options
You can order any SIPROTEC 5 device, regardless of its individual
configuration, in 3 different installation variants:
As a flush-mounting device
As a surface-mounting device with integrated on-site opera-
The construction of the flush-mounting devices will be recognizable from the previous sections. We would like to briefly introduce you to the two other variants here.
3.11
tion panel
As a surface-mounting device with the on-site operation panel

detached
[Bedienfront, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.11/6 SIPROTEC 5 operation panel
A surface-mounting device with integrated on-site operation

panel
For wall-installation, the SIPROTEC 5 devices can be ordered in
the surface-mounting housing. Thanks to a new concept, these
devices have terminal connection diagrams that are identical to
the corresponding flush-mounting devices. This is achieved by
installing the devices using the principle "with the face to the
wall" and then attaching the operation panels to the terminal
side. With the distance frames that are used, sufficient space
remains for the wiring, which can be routed away upward and
downward.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware Integrated interfaces
7xx82
3.11
9/16
Flexible
Analog measuring
transducer inputs
(20 mA)
0-4
Flexible, 0-12
Current inputs
4/8
Flexible
Voltage inputs
4/0
Flexible
Housing (x 19 in)
1/3
1/3 to 2/1
Flush mounting device
yes
yes
Surface-mounted
device with integrated
on-site operation
panel
Yes, with assembly

frame
yes
Surface-mounted
device with detached
on-site operation
panel
no
yes
Small display (rows)
Large display (pixels)
320x240
320x240
Function Keys
Key switch
no
Optional
16
Flexible 16-82
DC 24-48 and
DC 60-250 / AC
115-230
DC 24-48 and
DC 60-250 / AC
115-230
LEDs
[Aufbaugehuse, 1, --_--]
Power Supply
Figure 3.11/7 Device in the surface-mounting housing with integrated

operation panel
A surface-mounting device with the on-site operation panel

detached
If the operation panel is to be installed detached from the
device, it can be installed as a separate part and connected to
the device with a 2.5 m or 5 m long connecting cable. In this
way, the SIPROTEC 5 device can be situated, for example, in the
low-voltage fixture and the operation panel can be installed
precisely at the correct working height in the cabinet door. In
this case, the device is fastened like a surface-mounting device
to the cabinet wall. An opening must be provided in the door for
the operation panel.
7xx85, 86, 87, 6MD8
Binary outputs
Table 3.11/1 Hardware properties
Integrated interfaces
USB connections on the front side
The device can be accessed with the operating program DIGSI 5
by plugging a standard USB cable into the USB-B socket on the
front side of the base module. The complete configuration and
setting of the device can be carried out via this point-to-point
connection.
Integrated interfaces on the rear panel of the base module
The base module offers various, permanently installed interfaces
on the rear panel. For even greater flexibility, 2 slots are available for plug-in modules. For this, please observe the connection diagrams in the attachment.
[abgesetztes_display, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/8 Device with detached operation panel

7xx82
Hardware expandable
Binary inputs
3.11/5
7xx85, 86, 87, 6MD8
no
yes
11/23
Flexible
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware The SIPROTEC 5 terminals
and is connected with the RJ45 on the base module. The CB202
has its own wide-range power supply unit. A great advantage
here is that the switch integrated in an Ethernet module can
execute its data forwarding function for neighboring devices
even if the power supply of the base device is switched off,
provided the CB202 is still powered. Thus, an Ethernet ring is
not broken when one device is in service.
3.11
Via plug-in modules, the devices can be extended with protocol

interfaces and analog inputs. The devices can be ordered with
assembled modules or be extended with modules retroactively.
An expansion module CB202 (right photo in Figure 3.11/9) can
also be assembled with plug-in modules. The modules are easy
to service and can be plugged in without having to open the
device. Since the modules have their own processor, the basic
functions of the device, for example, the protection functions
and the protocol application, are largely independent.
[Rckansicht_Basis_CB202, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/9 Rear view of the device with integrated interfaces and
module slots (left: base module, right: CB202)
Integrated Ethernet interface (RJ45)

This electrical RJ45 interface serves to connect DIGSI 5 via a local
Ethernet network. In this way, several devices can be operated
from DIGSI 5 via one external switch. DIGSI 5 detects the devices
even without an IP configuration on the local network and can
then assign them network addresses.
Optionally, the protocol IEC 61850 can be activated on this
interface for connections up to 6 clients. With the 7Sx82 devices
and SIPROTEC 5 with CP300, GOOSE messages are also
supported on this interface.
Modules are delivered without configured protocols or applications. One or more appropriate modules are suggested in the
order configurator corresponding to the desired protocol on a
module. There are serial modules with 1 or 2 electrical and
optical interfaces. Different applications can run on both interfaces, for example, synchronous protection communication of a
differential protection on one interface and an IEC 60870-5-103
protocol on the second interface. Electrical and optical modules
for Ethernet are still available. For example, the IEC 61850
protocol as well as auxiliary services may be executed for each
module.
The SIPROTEC 5 terminals
Innovative terminals were developed for the SIPROTEC 5 family .
ll terminals are individually removable (Figure 3.11/11). This
enables prewiring of the systems, as well as simple device
replacement without costly re-wiring.
A
Time-synchronizing interface (port G)

Via the 9-pole Sub-D socket (connection compatible with
SIPROTEC 4), the time in the device can be synchronized. The set
clock telegram IRIG-B005 (007) of a GPS receiver can be fed with
5 V, 12 V or 24 V levels. In addition, the Central European DCF77
format with summer and winter time changes is supported. An
additional second pulse input enables microsecond-precise
synchronization of the device from a highly precise time source,
e.g. a special GPS receiver. This accuracy is needed for special
protection and measuring tasks. In this way, devices can be
precisely synchronized to the microsecond supra-regionally. For
this, Siemens provides a pre-fabricated complete solution with
time receiver, optical fi ber converters and appropriate connection cables.
Connecting a detached operation panel (port H)
A detached operation panel provided together with the connection cable can be connected to this interface. The maximum
distance is 2.5 or 5 meters.
[terminal blocks, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/10 Voltage and current terminal block with jumpers
Connecting the expansion unit CB202 (RJ45)

The base module offers slots for 2 plug-in modules. If more
plug-in modules are needed, these can be provided via a special
expansion module CB202. This module is connected via RJ45.
The expansion module is delivered with an appropriate cable
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware Modules
In the module there are connections for:
4 current transformers, optional protection-class current
transformer, sensitive protection transformer or instrument

transformer
3.11
8 binary inputs (BI)

6 binary outputs (BO), designed as 4 fast speed (type F) make
contacts and 2 fast speed change-over contacts.
The connections are distributed over:
1 x 8-pole current terminal block

3 x 14-pole voltage terminal blocks
[E_CC_Close_up_AB-03_sRGB, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/11 Removed current terminal block
Select the modules suitable for your purposes so that you can
build the SIPROTEC 5 device that precisely matches your application. An overview of the modules that are available and their
quantity structures can be found in Table 3.11/3.
Current terminals
The 8-pole current terminal with 4 integrated current transformers is available in 3 designs:
4 protection-class current transformers

3 protection-class current transformers + 1 sensitive protection-class transformer
4 instrument transformers
The terminal design provides the following advantages for the
connection of currents:
Exchange of the current transformer type also possible retro-
actively on-site (for example, protection-class current transformers for instrument transformer, sensitive for normal
ground-current transformers in cases of network conversions)
Additional safety during tests or device replacement since the

secondary current transformer circuits always remain closed
[IO202, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/12 Rear view of an expansion module IO202
Voltage terminal
The voltage transformers and the binary input and output
signals are connected via the 14-pole voltage terminal. The
cable route away from the device enables clear terminal wiring.
Jumpers precisely matching the current and voltage terminals
are available for connecting contacts to common potential (see
spare parts/accessories, chapter Attachment).
Modules
Selection of the input/output modules
Which and how many process connections a base or expansion
module has depends on the choice of a particular input/output
module. The modular building block concept includes different
input/output modules.
The IO202 input/output module is used, for example, as a base
measuring module. By equipping several modules with this, you
can achieve up to 40 measuring channels per SIPROTEC 5
device.
3.11/7
Second device row

Should the quantity structure of a device with 4 expansion
modules not suffice, it can be expanded by a second row. A
PS203 power supply is required for this in the first mounting
position of the second row. The remaining 5 positions can be
filled with expansion modules from the SIPROTEC 5 building
blocks. Exception: The CB202 must always be positioned in the
first row and can only be used once per device.
Module CB202
Module CB202 represents a special case. The CB202 provides
3 plug-in module positions for up to 2 communication modules
or up to 3 measuring-transducer modules. Combinations are
also possible, for example, 2 communication modules and one
measuring-transducer module.
The power supply is integrated, so that the CB202 can be
powered independently of the master unit. Communication
with the master unit is assured via an RJ45 connector and the
bus connection on the front of the module.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware Measuring ranges of current-transformer modules
Measuring ranges of current-transformer modules
The measuring range (full modulation) of the current transformers can be set to different values electronically depending
on the field of application. In all cases, you can choose between
protection and instrument transformers. Due to the wide
dynamic range, only protection-class current transformers
should be considered for busbar protection. The possible measuring ranges according to rated current are shown in Table
3.11/2 "Measuring ranges according to rated current".
3.11
A large dynamic range is necessary for network protection applications, so that short circuit currents can be recorded without
distortion. A value of 100 Irated has proven optimal. For 5 W
transformers, this corresponds to a transformer rated current
setting of 500 A, and consequently of 100 A for 1 A transformers. For applications in generator protection, while it is true
that there are very large primary currents, a dynamic range of
20 Irated is still quite sufficient. Thus, a measuring range of
[CB202, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/13 Expansion module CB202
100 A is obtained for a setting of Irated = 5 A and a measuring

range of 20 A for Irated = 1 A.
Process bus module PB201

The SIPROTEC 5 expansion module PB201 makes it easy to
extend SIPROTEC 5 devices. The module provides 24 channels
for measured values (sampled measured values) for communication according to IEC 61850-9-2 with a merging unit. Integrated resampling makes it possible to connect merging units
having different sampling frequencies. To ensure network
redundancy, IEC 62439 redundancy protocols PRP and HSR are
integrated. Moreover, PB201 has an integrated web server for
expanded diagnostic functions.
Interfaces:
A: 2 LC Duplex interfaces channel A

B: 2 LC Duplex interfaces channel B
C: 2 LC Duplex interfaces channel C
Service: 1 LC duplex interface service port
A smaller dynamic range means that greater measuring accuracy is achieved in the rated current range. Consequently, the
dynamic range for instrument transformers and sensitive protection-class current transformer input for ground fault currents is
extremely limited. In this case, limited means that the input
current is truncated on the analog side. Of course, the inputs in
this case are protected against overdriving.
Rated current
Irated
Measuring
range
Measuring range
Protectionclass current
transformers
5A
500 A
250 A
1A
100 A
50 A
Instrument
transformers
5A
8A
8A
1A
1.6 A
1.6 A
Sensitive
ground-current
input
5A
8A
8A
1A
1.6 A
1A
7xx82 devices
Table 3.11/2 Measuring ranges according to rated current
Plug-In Modules
Plug-in modules are available for communication or analog
inputs and arc protection. The communication modules are
described in the "Communication" chapter.
Measuring-transducer module ANAI-CA-4EL
The module has four 20 mA inputs. It can be plugged into one
of the slots in the PS201 or CB202. Multiple measured value
modules can be used with each device (one in each available
slot). The connections are created via an 8-pole screw terminal
block Figure 3.11/15).
The technical data for the measuring transducer module is
provided in the Attachment "Summary of Technical Data".
[PB201, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/14 Process module PB201
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware Plug-In Modules
3.11
[ANAI-CA-4EL, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/15 ANAI-CA-4EL Measuring-Transducer Module
[ARC-CD-3FO, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/16 Arc protection module ARC-CD-3FO
Arc protection module ARC-CD-3FO

Up to 3 optical point sensors per arc protection plug-in module
(Figure 3.11/16) can be connected. This yields a maximum
number of up to 15 sensors for modular SIPROTEC 5 devices.
The point sensors can be ordered with connection cable lengths
from 3 m to 35 m.
3.11/9
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware Quantity structure of the modules for 7xx82 devices
IO102
Base module for all 7xx82 devices that require

current and voltage measurement
IO110
Base module for additional binary inputs and

outputs for all 7xx82 devices
Usable in module row
3.11
Power Supply
Available in the expansion module
BO power relay
Fast measuring transducer 20 mA/10 V
BO, change-over contact type F*
BO, change-over contact
BO make contact type HS**
2 1)
BO, make contact type F*
BI (isolated)
Available in base module
Base module for all 7xx82 devices that require

current measurement
Number of slots for plug-in modules
IO101
BO, make contact
Power supply module for all 7xx82 devices
BI (connected to common potential)
PS101
I input
V input
Description
Description
Quantity structure of the modules for 7xx82 devices
12
*Type F - fast relay with monitoring (response time < 5 ms) / **Type HS - high-speed relay (contact with solid-state bypass) with monitoring (response time < 0.2 ms)
1) Of these, 1 life contact
The connection diagrams of the individual modules are included in the Attachment
Table 3.11/3 Quantity structure of the modules for 7xx82 devices
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware Quantity structure of the modules for all 7xx85, 7xx86, 7xx87 and 6MD8 devices
CB202
Module with 3 additional slots for modules

and an independent power supply
PB201
Process-bus module
IO201
Base module for protection applications that

do not require voltage measurement
IO202
Base module for all devices that require

current and voltage measurement
IO203
Module for devices that require numerous

current inputs
IO204
This module contains 4 power relays for direct

control of the operating mechanism motors of
grounding switches and disconnectors
10
IO205
For applications with binary inputs and binary

outputs
12
IO206
For applications with binary inputs and binary

outputs
IO207
Geared toward bay controllers due to the

predominant number of binary inputs
IO208
Typical module for protective applications. In

contrast to the IO202, it is equipped with
more relay outputs
IO209
This module is used when extremely fast tripping times (4 make contacts, 0.2 ms pickup
time) are required, such as in extra-high
voltage protection
IO211
This module is for devices that require

numerous voltage inputs
IO212
Module for very fast detection of measuring

transducer signals (20 mA or 10 V) with a
main field of application for the recording of
interference signals and monitoring
IO214
Typical module for protective applications. In

contrast to the IO202, it has a reduced quantity structure
IO215
Special module for connection of special highimpedance voltage dividers via 10-V voltage
inputs
42)
BO power relay
Power supply module for second module row
Power Supply
PS203
2 1)
Power supply module for first module row
PS201
BO, make contact
BI (isolated)
I input
V input
Description
Description
3.11
Quantity structure of the modules for all 7xx85, 7xx86, 7xx87 and 6MD8 devices
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
16
1.2
1.2
16
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1) Of these, 1 life contact / 2) 10 V voltage inputs for RC dividers with high impedance
1.2
1.2
1.2
SIPROTEC 5 System
IO230
Module for receiving large volumes of information, such as in the bay controllers or
busbar protection. The process connection is
made via special terminals
48
IO231
Module for receiving and the output of large

volumes of information, such as in the bay
controllers or busbar protection. The process
connection is made via special terminals
24
24
3.11
Power Supply
BO power relay
BO, make contact
BI (isolated)
I input
V input
Description
Description
Hardware Standard variants
1.2
1.2
1) Of these, 1 life contact / 2) 10 V voltage inputs for RC dividers with high impedance
Table 3.11/4 Quantity structure of the modules for all 7xx85, 7xx86, 7xx87 and 6MD8 devices
Standard variants
To make it easier to select the correct devices, Siemens offers
you pre-configured devices called standard variants. These
combinations of a base module and one or more expansion
modules are intended for specific applications. In this way, you
can order exactly the right device with a single order number.
The standard variants can also be modified easily and quickly
with additional expansion modules. Thus, it is just as easy to add
modules as it is to replace certain modules with others. The
available standard variants are listed in the order configurator.
Figure 3.11/17 shows one possible standard variant for

SIPROTEC 7SL87. This variant describes a 2/3 x 19" wide device
having the following quantity structure.
15 binary inputs
20 binary outputs
8 current inputs
8 voltage inputs.
The modules used in the device can be seen on the results page
of the SIPROTEC 5 configurator (see chapter Engineering for
more details).
In our example, the following modules are used in positions 1 to
3:
Position 1: IO208
Position 2: PS201
Position 3: IO202.
The individual terminals are defined by the mounting position of
the module and the terminal designations of the module (see
the Attachment, Connection variations).
As an example, the terminals of the first 4 current inputs, which
are on the IO208 at position 1, are designated as follows:
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/17 Standard variant for SIPROTEC 7SL87
I1: 1A1 and 1A2

I2: 1A3 and 1A4
I3: 1A5 and 1A6
I4: 1A7 and 1A8.
SIPROTEC 5 System
The additional 4 current inputs are at the 3rd mounting position
on the IO202 module and are designated as follows:
3.11
I1: 3A1 and 3A2

I2: 3A3 and 3A4
I3: 3A5 and 3A6
I4: 3A7 and 3A8.
Regardless of whether you choose a standard variant or

configure your devices freely you always receive a thoroughly
tested, complete device.
[dwbgrpos-170713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.11/18 Terminal designations and counting method
(1)
Current terminal A
(2)
Voltage terminal A, B, C, D
(3)
Terminal for time synchronization G
(4)
Plug-in module E, F
SIPROTEC 5 System
(5)
Terminal for detached on-site operation panel H
(6)
Battery compartment
(7)
Terminal for integrated Ethernet interface J
(8)
Terminal for COM link K
(9)
2-pole terminal to connect power supply
(10)
Base module 1/3 of 19
(11)
Expansion module 1/6 of 19
(12)
Connecting cable between 1st and 2nd Device Row
3.11
Advantages of the flexible hardware module:
With the flexible hardware module, you conveniently
configure the optimal hardware scope for your application
For many applications, the appropriate device specification is already pre-defined as a standard variant
The hardware design is appropriate for your switching

cell
The innovative SIPROTEC 5 terminal with integrated
current transformers offers increased safety in systems

testing and flexibility when exchanging the transformer
type
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.11
Appendix
Appendix
Chapter
DIGSI 5 Variants and system requirements
4.1
4.2
Connection diagrams
4.3
Dimension drawings
4.4
4.5
Technical data
4.6
Appendix
DIGSI 5 Variants and system requirements Description
Description
DIGSI 5 is the versatile engineering tool for parameterizing,
commissioning, and operating all SIPROTEC 5 devices. Its innovative user interface includes context-sensitive user instructions.
Simple connection to the device via USB enables you to work
with a device easily and efficiently. The full capabilities of
DIGSI 5 are revealed when you connect it to a network of
protection devices: Then you can work with all of the devices in
a substation in one project.
DIGSI 5 offers superior usability and is optimized for your work
processes. Only the information you actually need to carry out
your tasks is shown. These can be reduced further via expanded
filter mechanisms. Consistent use of sophisticated and standardized mechanisms in the user interfaces requires less training.
Overview of functions
DIGSI 5 is tailored to specific requirements. The free software
variant DIGSI 5 Compact offers everything that is required for a
single device. The DIGSI 5 Standard Version is suitable for
complex scenarios with several devices. DIGSI 5 Premium
contains the full functionality you need to raise your productivity to a new level. The functionalities of the various DIGSI 5
variants are listed in table "Overview of functions of the various
DIGSI 5 variants".
DVD ROM drive

Keyboard and mouse
USB port
Software requirements
The following operating systems are supported:
MS Windows 7
MS Windows 8.1
MS Windows Server 2012 R2
VMware support for virtual machines running under one of
4.1
the operating systems listed above
A complete list of supported operating systems is included in the

product information for DIGSI 5. The delivered equipment
contains device templates and an online manual, including
service (download of updates via the Internet, hot line).
The available DVD contains all components in English, German,

French, Portuguese, Spanish, Turkish, Russian and Italian. More
languages will be added in the future. The delivered package
includes a USB cable for connecting directly to the PC and a
memory stick with the licenses for installing the program.
[dw_engineering, 2, en_US]
Figure 4.1/1 Structure of the engineering process
Hardware requirements
Intel Celeron Dual Core 2.2 GHz (Ivy/Sandy Bridge)

5 GB available hard-disk space (Solid state disk (SSD) recommended)
4 GB RAM (8 GB recommended)
HD-ready graphic display ready with a resolution of
1280x1024 or 1376x768
Appendix
DIGSI 5 Variants and system requirements Order data for DIGSI 5 variants
Order data for DIGSI 5 variants
Description
DIGSI 5 Compact
DIGSI 5 Standard
DIGSI 5 Premium with SIGRA
Software for configuration and

operation of individual SIPROTEC
5 devices including the acquisition of process data from the
device.
Like DIGSI 5 Compact, but without constraint with regard to the

number of supported SIPROTEC 5 devices per project. Includes
system configurator for IEC 61850.
As for DIGSI 5 Standard, but with

integrated test and startup functionality, including the option to
create test sequences and run
them in the protection device
without external test equipment.
An editor for continuous functions charts (CFC) is also

included.
4.1
Additional graphical editors for single line diagrams and device

display pages are also included.
SIGRA 4 for professional fault-record analysis is available as an
option.
Projects are limited to only

contain a single device.
IEC 61850 also supports flexible

engineering and functional
naming.
Features
All features are listed in the table All features are listed in the table "Overview of functions of DIGSI 5 All features are listed in the table
"Overview of functions of
variants".
"Overview of functions of
DIGSI 5 variants".
DIGSI 5 variants".
Authorization
No license key necessary
Authorization required using the license key on the USB stick; can
be used on one computer per license.
Authorization required using the

license key on the USB stick; can
be used on one computer per
license.
Available operating
languages
German, English, Portuguese,

Spanish, Russian, Italian, French
and Turkish (selectable)
German, English, Portuguese, Spanish, Russian, Italian, French and

Turkish (selectable)
German, English, Portuguese,

Spanish, Russian, Italian, French
and Turkish (selectable)
Included in the
scope of
delivery
Program, device driver and
Program, device driver and online documentation on DVD-ROM Program, device driver and
USB stick with the number of licenses ordered. The program can online documentation on
DVD-ROM
be used on one computer per license.
Includes a test license valid for 30 days for free testing of DIGSI 5 USB stick with the number of
online documentation on
DVD-ROM
USB stick including a test
license valid for 30 days, for
free testing of DIGSI 5
Premium
Product information
USB cable for connecting a PC/
Premium
Product information
USB cable for connecting a PC/laptop computer and all
SIPROTEC 5 device types
PV178
USB cable for connecting a PC/

laptop computer and all
laptop computer and all

Order number
licenses ordered. The program

can be used on one computer
per license.
Product information
Without SIGRA
With SIGRA
PV123 (1 license)
P1V24
P1V246 (1 license)
PV185 (5 licenses)
P1V48
P1V31 (5 licenses)
PV130 (10 licenses)
P1V376
P1V253 (10 licenses)
For additional order numbers,

for example for updates and
upgrades, please refer to the
order configurator.
For additional order numbers, for example for updates and

upgrades, please refer to the order configurator.
Appendix
DIGSI 5 Variants and system requirements Overview of functions for DIGSI 5 variants
Overview of functions for DIGSI 5 variants
Compact
Standard
Premium
Maximum number of devices per project
unlimited
unlimited
Copy and paste
Multilingualism is supported
Single-line Editor with ANSI and IEC standard icons available
Device display editor enables creation of user-defined displays and symbols
Project processing
Single lines and device displays

4.1
Setting parameters and routing

Information allocations including filtering and sorting
Graphical visualization of protection parameters
Comparison of devices (offline/offline - offline/online)
Continuous function charts (CFC)

Graphical function chart (CFC) editor included
Communication
Assignment of communications to system interface
Assignment of communications to various protocols
Graphical network view of devices
Inter-device communication
IEC 61850 Edition 2 is fully supported
IEC 61850 Structure editor for flexible engineering and functional naming
IEC 61850
Access and communication

Via USB and Ethernet
Access to communication partners via system interface
Predefined only
Online
Measured values (current values, minimum, maximum, average values) and storage in
the project as snapshots
Messages (and storage in the project as snapshots)
Logs and records
Display fault records
1) SIGRA available as optional package
Loading settings for the selected device
COMTRADE Viewer
COMTRADE viewer 1)
SIGRA
Commissioning and testing

Creating and running multistage test sequences, no external equipment necessary
Test views for testing the device configuration
Offline function chart (CFC) analysis (debugging)
Export and import

SCL formats (IEC 61850 formats)
Devices (full and partial)
Topology, settings, information routing and communication assignments
Single Lines/Topology
WMF export only
Displays
Test object definition (XRIO)
Printing and exporting project documentation
Creation of user-defined print formats
Authorization of access to devices with NERC CIP-compatible password
Secure connection to the device
Configuration data protected from alteration
Confirmation codes for safeguarding critical activities (e.g. switching)
Documentation
Safeguarding and security
Appendix
Group
Accessories
Article per packaging unit
Order no. (short designation)
Terminal
Voltage terminal, terminal block, 14-pole
P1Z499
Terminal
Voltage input (power supply)
P1Z505
Terminal
Type A current terminal, 4 x protection
P1Z512
P1Z529
P1Z536
P1Z1869
P1Z1647
Terminal block, 2-pole1

(for modular devices)
Terminal
Type A current terminal, 3 x protection and 1 x measurement

4.2
Terminal
Type A current terminal, 4 x measurement

Terminal
Type B current terminal, 4 x protection

(for non-modular devices)
Terminal
Type B current terminal, 3 x protection and 1 x measurement

(for non-modular devices)
Terminal
2-pole cross connector for current terminal
P1Z543
Terminal
Module terminal pair IO1102
P1Z1656
Terminal
Terminal set only for IO230/2313
P1Z1841
Terminal
2-pole cross connector for voltage terminal
P1Z550
Terminal
Cover for current terminal block
P1Z567
Terminal
Cover for voltage terminal block
P1Z574
Accessories
Cable, integrated operation panel, 0.43 m
P1Z666
Accessories
Cable, detached operation panel, 2.50 m (for retrofitting surfacemounting housing with integrated operation panel in surfacemounting housing with detached operation panel)
P1Z1878
Accessories
Cable, detached operation panel, 5.00 m (for retrofitting surfacemounting housing with integrated operation panel in surfacemounting housing with detached operation panel)
P1Z2132
Accessories
Cable set, COM link cable
P1Z673
Accessories
Set of angle brackets
P1Z1850
Accessories
Labeling strips for LEDs/keypad
10
P1Z697
Accessories
Set of part for mounting bracket 1/2
P1Z703
Accessories
Set of parts for mounting bracket 2/3
P1Z710
Accessories
P1Z727
Accessories
P1Z734
Accessories
Screw cover 1/3, type C11
P1Z901
Accessories
Accessories
P1Z1281
Accessories
Bus termination plate
P1Z1496
Accessories
Panel surface mounting assembly frame (for mounting a device

7xx82 in the panel surface mounting)
P1X73
Accessories
SDHC memory card for 7KE85
P1Z2530
Sensors for arc protection
Point sensor with line length of 3 m
P1X19
P1X28
P1X37
P1X46
P1X55
P1X64
P1X82
Table 4.2/1 Accessories
Appendix
Connection diagrams
4.3
[tdcb202x-100713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 4.3/3 Connection diagram for the CB202
[tdps101x-210513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.3/1 Connection diagram for the PS101
[tdps203x-030713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
[tdio101x-220513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.3/5 Connection diagram for the IO101

[tdps201x-270812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Appendix
Connection diagrams
4.3
[tdio201x-290812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio102x-220513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio110x-220513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Appendix
Connection diagrams
4.3
[tdio203x-110313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio202x-240812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.3/9 Anschlussplan der IO202
[tdio204x-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Appendix
Connection diagrams
4.3
[tdio205x-240812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio207x-300812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio206x-050313-02.tif, 1, en_US]
4.3/4
Appendix
Connection diagrams
4.3
[tdio208x-300812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio211x-211112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio209x-270812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.3/16 Connection diagram for the IO209 (HS: Highspeed Relay)
Appendix
Connection diagrams
4.3
[tdio212x, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.3/18 Connection diagram IO212
[dwtdio230x-211013, 1, en_US]

[tdio214x-270812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.3/19 Anschlussplan der IO214
The connection diagram is identical to the input and output

module IO202 in the expansion module.
4.3/6
Appendix
Connection diagrams
4.3
[td_tdio231x, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.3/21 Connection diagram IO231
Appendix
Dimension drawings Flush-Mounting Device
Flush-Mounting Device
4.4
[dw_z1_2-3, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.4/3 Cut-Out Widths and Drilling Pattern - 2/3 Device, First Row
[dw_z1_1-3, 1, en_US]
[dw_z1_5-6, 1, en_US]
[dw_z1_1-2, 1, en_US]
[dw_z1_1-1, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.4/5 Cut-Out Widths and Drilling Pattern - 1/1 Device, First
Device Row
4.4/1
Appendix
Dimension drawings Flush-Mounting Device
All drillings in the area of the specific device cut-out widths must
comply with the dimensions in the corresponding figures.
4.4
[dw_z2_4-6, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.4/8 Cut-Out Widths and Drilling Pattern - 2/3 Device, Second
Device Row
[dw_z2_2-6, 1, en_US]
Device Row
[dw_z2_5-6, 1, en_US]
Device Row
[dw_z2_3-6, 1, en_US]
Device Row
Appendix
Dimension drawings Surface-Mounting Devices with Detached On-Site Operation Panel
4.4
[dw_z2_6-6, 1, en_US]
[dw_surface_mounting_in, 1, en_US]
Device Row
Width of the Assembly Opening in
mm (in Inches)
1/3 device (base module)
146+2 mm (5.75 +0.08)
1/2 device (base module with one

expansion module)
221+2 mm (8.7 +0.08)
2/3 device (base module with 2

expansion modules)
296+2 mm (11.65 +0.08)

expansion modules)
371+2 mm (14.61 +0.08)

expansion modules)
446+2 mm (17.56 +0.08)
Figure 4.4/11 Flush-Mounting Devices, Dimensions from the Side and

Front Views
Surface-Mounting Devices with Detached On-Site Operation

Panel
Table 4.4/1 Cut-Out Widths

Dimension a
Housing Widths in mm (in Inches)
(Total Width: Housing Width +
4.6 mm (0.18 in))
1/3 device
145 (5.71)
1/2 device
220 (8.66)
2/3 device
295 (11.61)
5/6 device
370 (14.57)
1/1 device
445 (17.52)
Table 4.4/2 Variable Housing Widths
[dw_z1_osop_1-3, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.4/12 Drilling Pattern of the On-Site Operation Panel of the 1/3
Device
4.4/3
Appendix
Dimension drawings Surface-Mounting Devices with Detached On-Site Operation Panel
Device
4.4
Device
[dwosopab-070211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 4.4/17 Surface-Mounting Device with Detached On-Site Operation Panel, Dimensions in the Side and Front Views
The drilling patterns correspond to the following graphics

Figure 4.4/20 to Figure 4.4/29.
Device
The cable length for the detached operation panel is up to 5 m

(196.85 in).
Device
Appendix
Dimension drawings Surface-Mounting Devices with Integrated On-Site Operation Panel (Non-Modular
Device)
Surface-Mounting Devices with Integrated On-Site
Operation Panel (Non-Modular Device)
4.4
[dw_console side view.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 4.4/18 Non-Modular Surface-Mounting Device with Integrated

On-Site Operation Panel, Dimensions from the Side and
Front Views
Surface-Mounting Devices with Integrated On-Site

Operation Panel (Modular Device)
[dwbohrge-1_3.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.4/20 Drilling Pattern of a 1/3 Surface-Mounting Device First

Device Row
[dwosopin-070211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 4.4/19 1/3-Surface-Mounting Device with Integrated On-Site

Operation Panel, Dimensions from the Side and Front
Views

Device Row
4.4/5
Appendix
Dimension drawings Surface-Mounting Devices with Integrated On-Site Operation Panel (Modular
Device)
4.4
[dwbohrge-070211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Device Row

Device Row

Device Row
[dw_z2_bohr_1-3.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.4/25 Drilling Pattern of a 1/3 Surface-Mounting Device

Second Device Row
Appendix
Dimension drawings Surface-Mounting Devices with Integrated On-Site Operation Panel (Modular
Device)
4.4

Second Device Row

Second Device Row

Second Device Row

Second Device Row
4.4/7
Appendix
Measured value
Description
Grouping of base measured values

Operational measured values
RMS value calculation and power calculation as per the definition

Phase currents IA, IB, IC
Ground current IN, INS (sensitive)
Phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, VC
Phase-to-phase voltages V12, V23, V31
Residual voltage VNG
Frequency f
Power P, Q, S (three-phase, phase-specific)
Power factor f
Fundamental and symmetrical components
Calculation of phasor variables with Fourier filter or according to transformation rule

Phase currents IA, IB, IC
4.5
Ground current IN, INS (sensitive)

Phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, VC
Phase-to-phase voltages V12, V23, V31
Residual voltage VNG
Symmetrical components I0, I1, I2, V0, V1, V2
Protection-Specific Measured Values
Measured values that are especially calculated for individual protection functions, such as:
Distance protection (reactances and resistances of conductor loops)
Differential protection (differential and restraint current, charging currents per phase)
Energy Values
Metered values are determined for active and reactive energy. Restore time, restore interval and
counting mode are adjustable. Restoring can also be initiated via a binary input. The following
metered values are available:
Active energy Wp+ (release), Wp (uptake)
Reactive energy Wq+ (release), Wq (uptake)
Statistic Values
The following statistic values are formed as follows:

Total number of initiated trippings of the circuit breaker
Number of initiated trippings of the circuit breaker, separated per switch pole
Total sum of primary breaking currents
Sum of the primary breaking currents, separated for each switch pole
Grouping of advanced measured values

Mean Values
Mean values can be calculated on the basis of the operational measured values and the symmetrical
components. The time slot for mean value generation and the output interval are parameterizable.
Minimum values and maximum values
The minimum/maximum values can be generated on the basis of operational measured values,
symmetrical components and selected measured values (for example, from mean values). The display
of minimum and maximum values contains the time of their occurrence. The calculation is stabilized
against smaller value fluctuations in currents and voltages.
Appendix
Technical data Current Inputs
Current Inputs
Measuring-Transducer Inputs (via Module ANAI-CA-4EL)
All current, voltage, and power data are specified as RMS values.
Connector type
8-pin multiple contact strip
Rated frequency frated
Differential current
input channels
50 Hz, 60 Hz
16.7 Hz (for rail protection devices only)
Protection-class
4.6
Rated current
Irated
Measuring
range of the
modular
devices
Measuring
range of the
non-modular
devices
5A
0 A to 500 A
0 A to 250 A
1A
0 A to 100 A
0 A to 50 A
Instrument transformers
5A
0 A to 8 A
0 A to 8 A
1A
0 A to 1.6 A
0 A to 1.6 A
Power consumption
per current circuit at
rated current
Approx. 0.1 VA
Thermal rating
500 A for 1 s
(protection and instru- 150 A for 10 s

ment transformers)
20 A continuously
25 A for 3 min
30 A for 2 min
Dynamic load-carrying 1250 A one half wave
capacity
Measuring-Transducer Inputs (via Module ARC-CD-3FO)
Measuring range
DC -24 mA to +24 mA
Fault
< 0.5 % of measuring range
Input impedance
140
Conversion principle
Delta-sigma (16 bit)
Permissible potential
difference between
channels
DC 20 V
Galvanic separation
from ground/housing
DC 700 V
Permissible overload
DC 100 mA continuously
Measurement repetition
200 ms
Voltage Input
All current, voltage, and power data are specified as RMS values.
Rated frequency frated
16.7 Hz (for rail-protection devices only)

Input and output
modules
IO202/IO208/IO211/
IO214
IO215
Measuring range
0 V bis 200 V
0 V bis 7,07 V
Input impedance
200 k
7 k
230 V continuously
20 V continuously
Connector type
AVAGO AFBR-4526Z
Number of transceivers
Thermal rating
Fiber type
Polymer Optical Fiber (POF) 1 mm
Integrated Power Supply
Receiver
For modular devices, the following printed circuit-board assemblies

have a power supply:
Maximum
-10 dBm 2 dBm
Minimum
-40 dBm 2 dBm
PS201 Power supply of the base module and of the 1st device row
Spectrum
400 nm to 1100 nm
PS203 Voltage supply of 2nd device row
Attenuation
In the case of plastic optical fibers, you can

expect a path attenuation of 0.2 dB/m Additional attenuation comes from the plug and
sensor head.
CB202 Plug in module assembly with integrated power supply, for

example, to accommodate communication modules
Optical budget 1
Minimal 25 dB
Permissible
voltage ranges
16 kHz
ADC type
10-bit successive approximation
Auxiliary rated
voltage VH
Type
LED
Wavelength
= 650 nm
(PS201, PS203,
CB202)
Transmit power
Minimum 0 dBm
Maximum 2 dBm
Numerical aperture
0.5 2
Signal rate connection 1 pulse per second

test
Permissible
voltage ranges
(PS101)
Pulse duration connec- 11 s

tion test
Comment:
1
All values in combination with sensors approved by Siemens.
Numerical aperture (NA = sin (launch angle))
DC 19 V
to DC 60 V
DC 48 V to DC 300 V
AC 80 V to AC 265 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
(PS201, PS203,
CB202)
Analog sampling rate

Transmitter
4.6/1
50 Hz, 60 Hz
DC 24 V/DC 48 V DC 60 V/DC 110 V/DC 125 V/

DC 220 V/
DC 250 V or
AC 100 V/AC 115 V/AC 230 V,
50 Hz/60 Hz
DC 19 V
to DC 60 V
DC 48 V to 150
V
DC 88 V
to DC 300 V
AC 80 V to
AC 265 V, 50 Hz/
60 Hz
Appendix
Technical data Power Relay (for Direct Control of Motor Switches)
Auxiliary rated
voltage VH
DC 24 V/DC 48 V DC 60 V/DC
110 V/
(PS101)
DC 125 V
DC 110 V/ DC
125 V/
DC 220 V/DC
250 V
or
AC 100 V/AC
115 V/
AC 230 V, 50 Hz/
60 Hz
Stored-energy time for auxiliary

voltage outage or short circuit,
modular devices
PS101
4 A intert,
AC 250 V,
DC 150 V,
UL recognized
DC 60 V
to DC 125 V
For V AC 115 V 200 ms

Rated voltage range
DC 24 V to 250 V
The binary inputs of SIPROTEC 5 are bipolar
with the exception of the binary inputs on the
IO230 and on the IO231.
Power consumption,
max.
0.6 VA
DC 24 V
to DC 48 V
Pickup time
Approx. 3 ms
Dropout time
Approx. 4 ms
AC 100 V to AC
230 V
Switching thresholds
Adjustable with DIGSI 5

Range 1 for 24 V, 48
V, and 60 V
2 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC 300 V,

UL recognized
Operating voltage
2 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC 300 V, UL recognized

SIBA type 179200 or Schurter type SPT 5x20
Power consumption (life relay active)
DC
AC 230 V/50 Hz
AC 115 V/50 Hz
1/3 base
module, nonmodular
7.0 W
16 VA
12.5 VA
Vlow DC 10 V
Vhigh DC 19 V
Range 3 for 220 V and Vlow DC 88 V

250 V
Vhigh DC 176 V
Operating voltage
Maximum permitted
voltage
DC 300 V
The binary inputs contain interference suppression capacitors. In order

to ensure EMC, use the terminals shown in the terminal diagrams/
connection diagrams to connect the binary inputs to the common
potential.
Power Relay (for Direct Control of Motor Switches)
Without plug-in
modules
1/3 base
module,
modular
4.6
Range 2 for 110 V and Vlow DC 44 V

125 V
Vhigh DC 88 V
Operating voltage
SIBA type 179200 or Schurter

type SPT 5x20
SIBA
type 179200 or
Schurter
type SPT 5x20
PS201, PS203,
CB202
For V DC 60 V/DC 110 V 50 ms
Approx. DC 0.6 mA to 1.8 mA (independent of

the operating voltage)
Internal fuse
DC 24 V
to DC 48 V
For V DC 24 V 20 ms
Current consumption,
excited
18 A
Recommended external protection Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, characteristic C according to IEC 60898
For V DC 110 V 50 ms
For V AC 115 V 50 ms
Stored-energy time for auxiliary

voltage outage or short circuit,
non-modular devices
Superimposed alternating voltage, 15% of the DC auxiliary rated

peak-to-peak, IEC 60255-11
voltage (applies only to direct
voltage)
Inrush current
For V DC 24 V 50 ms
13 W
33 VA
24 VA
Without plug-in
modules
1/6 expansion
module
3W
6 VA
6 VA
1/6 plug-in
module
assembly
without plug-in
modules
(modules
CB202)
3.5 W
14 VA
7 VA
Plug-in module < 5 W

for base module
or plug-in
module
assembly (for
example,
communication
module)
Switching capacity for permanent and periodic operation

250 V/4.0 A
1000 W
220 V/4.5 A
1000 W
110 V/5.0 A
550 W
60 V/5.0 A
300 W
48 V/5.0 A
240 W
24 V/5.0 A
120 W
In order to prevent any damage,

the external protection circuit
must switch off the motor in case
the rotor is blocked.
Turn on switching power for 30 s, recovery time until switching on

again is 15 minutes.
For short-term switching operations, an impulse/pause ratio of 3 %
must be considered.
< 6 VA
< 6 VA
100 V/9.0 A
1000 W
60 V/10.0 A
600 W
48 V/10.0 A
480 W
24 V/10.0 A
240 W
AC and DC contact voltage
Continuous and inching operation

is not permitted.
In order to prevent any damage,
the external protection circuit
must switch off the motor in case
the rotor is blocked.
250 V
Permissible continuous current per 5 A

contact
Appendix
Technical data High-Speed Relay with Semiconductor Acceleration (Type HS)
Permissible current per contact
(switching on and holding)
30 A for 1 s
Short-time current across closed

contact
250 A for 30 ms

contact
250 A for 30 ms
5A
Total permissible current for

contacts connected to common
potential
5A

potential
Switching time OOT (Output
Operating Time)
Closing time, typical: 4 ms

Operating Time)
16 ms
Additional delay of the output

medium used
Rated data of the output contacts DC 300 V, 10 A, Resistive
in accordance with UL certification
DC 250 V, 1 hp motor - 30 s ON,
15 min OFF

medium used
AC 277 V, 0.7 hp
AC 347 V, 4.5 A, General Purpose
B300
R300
DC 60 V, 1/2 hp motor - 30 s ON,

15 min OFF
Interference suppression capacitors across the contacts
4.7 nF, 20 %, AC 250 V

15 min OFF
Supervision
2-channel activation with cyclic

testing (only for make contact)

15 min OFF
4.7 nF, 20 %, AC 250 V
The power relays operate in interlocked mode, that is, only one relay of
each switching pair picks up at a time thereby avoiding a power-supply
short circuit.
High-Speed Relay with Semiconductor Acceleration (Type

HS)
Standard Relay (Type S)

Switching capacity
On: 1000 W/VA

Off: 30 VA; 40 W ohmic;
30 W/VA at L/R 40 ms
250 V

(continuous)
5A

30 A for 1 s (make contact)

contact
250 A for 30 ms
5A
10 ms
Switching capacity
On/Off: 1000 W/VA
Contact voltage
AC 200 V, DC 250 V

(continuous)
5A


potential

contact
250 A for 30 ms

Operating Time)

potential
5A

medium used

Operating Time)
Closing time, typical: 0.2 ms
Max. rated data of the output

contacts in accordance with UL
certification

medium used
DC 48 V, 0.8 A, General Purpose

DC 240 V, 0.1 A, General Purpose
Maximum: 9 ms
AC 240 V, 5 A, General Purpose

AC 120 V, 1/3 hp
AC 250 V, 1/2 hp
B300
R300
Fast Relay (Type F)

On: 1000 W/VA
Off: 30 VA; 40 W ohmic;
30 W/VA at L/R 40 ms
4.6/3
DC 24 V, 8 A, General Purpose
Opening time, typical: 6 ms
Rated data of the output contacts B150

Q300
Switching capacity
Maximum: 5 ms
Rated data of the output contacts AC 120 V, 8.5 A, General Purpose

AC 277 V, 6 A, General Purpose
DC 110 V, 3/4 hp motor - 30 s ON,

15 min OFF
4.6
Opening time, typical: 2 ms
4.7 nF, 20 %, AC 250 V
Expansion Module
250 V
Status
Color
Quantity

(continuous)
5A
Routable
Red
16 optional

Appendix
Technical data Base Module
Base Module
EMC Electromagnetic Emission Tests (Type Tests, Test under

Mounting Conditions)
Status
Color
Quantity
RUN
Green
ERROR
Red
Routable (adjustable
with DIGSI 5)
2-colored: red or green 16
Standards
IEC 61000-6-4
(generic standard)
Conducted emission on auxiliary-voltage lines
Only the defined color

can be used in operation.
Signal
Levels/
IEC 60255-26 (product

standard)
CISPR 22
Radiated emission
Signal Rated Input Voltage, DC
CISPR 11
30 MHz to 1 000 MHz

limit class A
CISPR 22
1 GHz to 6 GHz limit

class A
5V
12 V
24 V
Loading effect in electricity-supply systems,

harmonics
VIHigh
6.0 V
15.8 V
31.0 V
Harmonic current emissions
VILow
1.0 V at
1.4 V at
1.9 V at
IILow = 0.25 mA
IILow = 0.25 mA
IILow = 0.25 mA
Burdens
IIHigh
4.5 mA to 9.4 mA 4.5 mA to 9.3 mA 4.5 mA to 8.7 mA
RI
890 at VI = 4 V
640 at VI = 6 V
Loading effect in electricity-supply systems,

voltage fluctuations
Flicker
1930 at VI = 8.7 3780 at VI = 17

V
1700 at VI =
3560 at VI = 31
15.8 V
Pin
Signal
Signal Description
P24-TSIG
DC 24 V input
P5-TSIG
DC 5 V input
M-TSIG
Return line Pxx-TSIG
M-TSYNC 4
Return line for P-TSYNC
Screen
Shield potential
P12-TSIG
DC 12 V input
P-TSYNC
DC 24 V input
Screen
Shield potential
150 kHz to 30 MHz

limit class A
Does not apply!

(see EN 61000-3-2,
section 7, power
consumption < 75 W)
Does not apply!
(see EN 61000-3-3,
section 6, no significant voltage fluctuations)
4.6
EMC Immunity Tests (Type Tests, Test under Mounting

Conditions)
Standards
IEC 60255-1 and -26 (product standards)

EN 61000-6-2 (generic standard)
Electrostatic discharge Contact discharge:

test
Front-side modular and non-modular
IEC 61000-4-2
devices 8 kV
Back-side modular devices 8 kV
Back-side non-modular devices 6 kV

Air discharge 15 kV
Both polarities
150 pF
Ri = 330
Table 4.6/1 Time-Synchronization Connection
Radiated electromagnetic field immunity
Time-Synchronization Interface (Port G)
Frequency sweep
Time Synchronization
External synchronization sources, for example,

DCF77
IRIG-B signal
Internal RTC (real time)
Connection
Rear
IEC 61000-4-3
20 V/m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz

10 V/m, 1 GHz to 2.7 GHz
80 % AM
1 kHz
Radiated electromagnetic field immunity
20 V/m, 80 MHz/160 MHz/380 MHz/450 MHz/

900 MHz
Spot frequencies
10 V/1.85 GHz/2.15 GHz
IEC 61000-4-3
80 % AM
1 kHz
D-sub 9
Dwell time 10 s
Rated signal voltages
DC 5 V, DC 12 V, or DC 24 V (optional)
Test voltage
AC 500 V at 50 Hz
Appendix
Technical data Insulation and Safety Tests
Electrical fast transient/
burst immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
4 kV
Damped oscillatory
wave immunity test
5 ns/50 ns
IEC 61000-4-18
5 kHz
Power-frequency
disturbance test
Burst length 15 ms
Repetition rate 300 ms
IEC 61000-4-16
Both polarities
Ri = 50
Pulse: 1.2 s/50 s
Auxiliary voltage
IEC 61000-4-5
Common mode: 4 kV,

12 , 9 F
Differential mode:
1 kV, 2 , 18 F
4.6
Measuring inputs,
binary inputs, and
Common mode: 4 kV,

42 , 0.5 F
relay outputs (no

differential mode
testing)
Differential mode:
1 kV, 42 , 0.5 F
Conducted RF, amplitude-modulated

IEC 61000-4-6
Conducted RF, amplitude-modulated
IEC 61000-4-6
Test duration 60 s
Zone A
150 V (differential mode)
300 V (common mode)
Standards
IEC 60255-27
Voltage test (routine test), current measurement inputs, voltage measurement inputs,
relay outputs
AC 2.5 kV
Voltage test (routine test),
DC 3.5 kV
50 Hz
Auxiliary voltage, binary inputs

DC 700 V
or varistor
Voltage test (routine test), only isolated

communication and time-synchronization
interfaces and analog inputs (module position
E, F, M, N, and P)
10 V, 150 kHz to
80 MHz, 80 % AM,
1 kHz
Surge immunity test (type testing), all circuits

except communication and time-synchronization interfaces and analog inputs, class III
5 kV (peak value)
1.2 s/50 s
0.5 J
27 MHz/68 MHz at 10
V, dwell time 10 s
3 positive and 3 negative impulses at intervals of 1 s
80 % AM, 1 kHz
Spot frequencies
Power frequency
magnetic field
immunity test
3 MHz, 10 MHz, 30 MHz, 2 kV (peak value)
Insulation and Safety Tests
Test duration 5 min

High-energy surge
voltages
1 MHz, 2.5 kV (peak value)
100 A/m (continuous)
Insulation resistance
> 100 M @ DC 500 V
1000 A/m for 3 s
Resistor of protective-equipotential-bonding
< 0.1 @ DC 12 V,
30 A after 1 min.
IEC 61000-4-9
Installation Requirements
IEC 61000-4-8
Pulsed magnetic field
1500 A/m, 6.4 s/16 s

Standard for Surge
Withstand Capability
(SWC)
IEEE Std C37.90.1
2.5 kV (peak value)

1 MHz
= 15 s
Overvoltage category
III
Degree of pollution
Protection class
400 impulses per s
Standards
Test duration 10 s
IEC 60255 (product standard)
Ri = 200
Common mode and differential mode test
Standard for Fast Tran- 4 kV
sient Surge Withstand
5 ns/50 ns
Capability
5 kHz
IEEE Std C37.90.1
Burst length 15 ms
Repetition rate 300 ms
Both polarities
IEEE Std C37.90

UL 508
Additional standards are listed for the individual tests.
Vibration and Shock Stress During Transport
Standards
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
Vibration Test (sinusoidal)
Sinusoidal 5 Hz to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude
Ri = 50
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 1

and
Test duration 60 s
IEC 60068-2-6
Shock Test
Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 and Acceleration 150 m/s2

IEC 60068-2-27
IEEE Std C37.90.2
4.6/5
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min

20 cycles in 3 axes perpendicular to one
another
Common mode and differential mode test

Standard for With20 V/m
stand Capability or
80 MHz to 1 GHz
Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic Pulse modulation
Interference from
Transceivers (Keying
test)
8 Hz to 150 Hz: 20 m/s2 acceleration
Duration 11 ms
3 shocks each in both directions of the
3 axes
Appendix
Technical data Vibration and Shock Stress in Stationary Use
Continuous shock
Humidity
Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 and Acceleration 100 m/s2

IEC 60068-2-27
Permissible humidity stress
Duration 16 ms
3 axes
(according to IEC 60068-2-30)
Up to 93 % relative humidity on
56 days a year
Comment:
1
Devices subjected to condensation

are not to be operated!
The non-modular devices in the assembly frame meet class 1.
Arrange the devices so that they

are not exposed to direct sunlight
or extreme temperature changes.
This will prevent condensation in
the device.
Vibration and Shock Stress in Stationary Use

Standards
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
Vibration Test (sinusoidal)
Sinusoidal 10 Hz to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm

amplitude
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 1

and
IEC 60068-2-6
60 Hz to 150 Hz; 10 m/s2 acceleration
Constant humid heat, 56 days
40 C, 93 % relative humidity
Humid heat, cyclical
12 h + 12 h cycles
25 C/55 C/95 % relative humidity
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min

20 cycles in 3 axes perpendicular to one
another
Temperatures
Shock Test
Semi-sinusoidal
Type test, in operation
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Acceleration 50 m/s2
(in compliance with IEC 60068-2-1

and IEC 60068-2-2, test Ad for
16 h and test Bd for 16 h)
Duration 11 ms
3 axes
Seismic Tests
Sinusoidal 3 Hz 2 to 35 Hz:
Temporarily permissible during

operation (tested for 96 h)
IEC 60255-21-3, class 2 and Frequency sweep 1 octave/min

IEC 60068-3-3
1 cycle in 3 axes perpendicular to one

another
3 Hz to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude (horizontal axes)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 20 m/s2 acceleration (horizontal axes)
Recommended for uninterrupted

duty
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 10 m/s2 acceleration

(vertical axis)
(in compliance with IEC 60255-1)
The non-modular devices in the assembly frame meet class 1.
For technical reasons, the frequency range is raised from 1 Hz to 3 Hz

at the lower limit.
4.6
-25 C to +85 C
-20 C to +70 C
Load conditions for the nonmodular devices: With surrounding
temperatures above 55 C, no
more than 50 % of the binary
inputs and relay outputs per
assembly are allowed to be continuously active.
Readability of the display may be
impaired below -10 C and above
+55 C.
3 Hz to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude (vertical

axis)
Comment:
75 % relative humidity on the

annual average
-10 C to +55 C
Temperatures for continuous

storage
-25 C to +55 C
Type test, transport and storage

for 96 h
-40 C to +70 C
Heat-related limitations for the binary inputs on the IO230 input

module (modular devices)
Other Environmental Information

Maximum altitude above sea level
2000 m (6561.68 ft)
Minimum admissible atmospheric

pressure
783.8 hPa
Switching
thresholds
Up to 40 C
Up to 55 C
Up to 70 C
Range 1 for
24 V, 48 V, and
60 V operating
voltage
All 48 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
All 48 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
All 48 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
Appendix
Technical data Degree of Protection to IEC 60529
Range 2 for 110
V and 125 V
operating
voltage
Range 3 for 220

V and 250 V
operating
voltage
i
4.6
All 48 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
All 48 binary
36 binary inputs
inputs usable for usable for uninuninterrupted
terrupted duty
duty
(max. 3 in each
group of 4 at the
same time)
36 binary inputs 24 binary inputs 12 binary inputs

usable for unin- usable for unin- usable for uninterrupted duty
terrupted duty
terrupted duty
(max. 3 in each (max. 2 in each (max. 1 in each
group of 4 at the group of 4 at the group of 4 at the
same time)
same time)
same time)
NOTE
At an ambient temperature of 55 C to 70 C, a
maximum of 36 relays per row may be switched
on simultaneously.
Heat-related limitations for the binary inputs on the IO231 input

module (modular devices)
Switching
thresholds
Up to 40 C
Up to 55 C
Up to 70 C
Range 1 for
24 V, 48 V, and
60 V operating
voltage
All 24 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
All 24 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
All 24 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
Range 2 for 110

V and 125 V
operating
voltage
All 24 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
18 binary inputs
All 24 binary
inputs usable for usable for uninterrupted duty
uninterrupted
duty
(max. 3 in each
group of 4 at the
same time)
Range 3 for 220

V and 250 V
operating
voltage
18 binary inputs 12 binary inputs 6 binary inputs

usable for unin- usable for unin- usable for uninterrupted duty
terrupted duty
terrupted duty
(max. 3 in each (max. 2 in each (max. 1 in each
group of 4 at the group of 4 at the group of 4 at the
same time)
same time)
same time)
Degree of Protection to IEC 60529

For equipment in the surfacemounting housing
IP50
For equipment in the flushmounting housing
Front IP51
Back side of the modular devices
IP50
Back side of the non-modular
devices IP40
For operator protection
IP2x for current terminal (installed

removed)
Minimum Bending Radii of the Connecting Cables Between

the On-Site Operation Panel and the Base Module
Fiber-optic cable
Pay attention to the length of the

cable protection sleeve, which you
must also include in calculations.
D-Sub cable
R = 50 mm (minimum bending
radius)
Plug-In Module Dimensions

Type of Construction (Maximum
Dimensions)
Width x Height x Depth (in Inches)
USART-Ax-xEL, ETH-Bx-xEL
61 mm x 45 mm x 120.5 mm (2.4
x 1.77 x 4.74)
USART-Ax-xFO, ETH-Bx-xFO
(without protection cover)
61 mm x 45 mm x 132.5 mm (2.4
x 1.77 x 5.22)
ANAI-CA-4EL
61 mm x 45 mm x 119.5 mm (2.4
x 1.77 x 4.7)
ARC-CD-3FO
61 mm x 45 mm x 120.5 mm (2.4
x 1.77 x 4.74)
Expansion Module Dimensions

Dimensions)
Width x Height x Depth 5 (in

Inches)
Flush-mounting device
75 mm x 268 mm x 229 mm (2.95

x 10.55 x 9.02)
Surface-mounted device with inte- 75 mm x 314 mm x 337 mm (2.95

grated on-site operation panel
x 12.36 x 13.27)
Surface-mounted device with
detached on-site operation panel
Type of
Construction
Width over all x Height over all x Depth 6(in Inches)
(Maximu
m Dimensions)
Type of
construction
1/3
1/2
2/3
5/6
1/1
Flushmounting
device
150 mm x
268 mm x
229 mm
(5.91 x
10.55 x
9.02)
225 mm x
268 mm x
229 mm
(8.86 x
10.55 x
9.02)
300 mm x
268 mm x
229 mm(1
1.81 x
10.55 x
9.02)
375 mm x
268 mm x
229 mm
(14.76 x
10.55 x
9.02)
450 mm x
268 mm x
229 mm
(17.72 x
10.55 x
9.02)
IP2x for voltage terminal

(removed/with cover)
IP2x for voltage terminal (installed)
4.6/7
Maximum altitude above sea level
2000 m (6561.68 ft)
75 mm x 314 mm x 230 mm (2.95

x 12.36 x 9.06)
Dimensions of Device Rows
IP1x for voltage terminal

(removed/without cover)
Degree of pollution, IEC 60255-27
R = 50 mm
Appendix
Technical data Dimensions of the Basic and 1/3 Modules
Type of
Construction
Device Size
Width over all x Height over all x Depth 6(in Inches)
Weight of the Non-Modular Devices 7xx82

Type of construction
(Maximu
m Dimensions)
1/3
Flush-mounting device 3.7 kg
Surfacemounted
device
with integrated onsite operation panel
150 mm x
314 mm x
337 mm
(5.91 x
12.36 x
13.27)
225 mm x
314 mm x
337 mm
(8.86 x
12.36 x
13.27)
300 mm x
314 mm x
337 mm
(11.81 x
12.36 x
13.27)
375 mm x
314 mm x
337 mm
(14.76 x
12.36 x
13.27)
450 mm x
314 mm x
337 mm
(17.72 x
12.36 x
13.27)
Surfacemounted
device
with
detached
on-site
operation
panel
150 mm x
314 mm x
230 mm
(5.91 x
12.36 x
9.06)
225 mm x
314 mm x
230 mm
(8.86 x
12.36 x
9.06)
300 mm x
314 mm x
230 mm
(11.81 x
12.36 x
9.06)
375 mm x
314 mm x
230 mm
(14.76 x
12.36 x
9.06)
450 mm x
314 mm x
230 mm
(17.72 x
12.36 x
9.06)
Bracket for nonmodular surfacemounting variant
1.9 kg
UL Note
Type 1 if mounted into a door or front cover of an enclosure.
When expanding the device with the 2nd device row, then they must
be mounted completely inside an enclosure.
4.6
Dimensions of the Basic and 1/3 Modules

Dimensions)
Width over all x Height over all x

Depth 7(in Inches)
Flush-mounting device
150 mm x 268 mm x 229 mm

(5.91 x 10.55 x 9.02)
Surface-mounted device with inte- 150 mm x 314 mm x 337 mm

grated on-site operation panel
(5.91 x 12.36 x 13.27)
Surface-mounted device with
detached on-site operation panel
150 mm x 314 mm x 230 mm

(5.91 x 12.36 x 9.06)
Masses
Device Size
Weight of the Modular Devices
Type of construction
1/2
2/3
Flush-mounting device 4.8 kg
1/3
8.1 kg
11.4 kg 14.7 kg 18.0 kg
7.8 kg
Surface-mounted
device with integrated
on-site operation
panel
12.6 kg 17.4 kg 22.2 kg 27.0 kg
Surface-mounted
device with detached
on-site operation
panel
8.7 kg
5.1 kg
Size
5/6
1/1
12.3 kg 15.9 kg 19.5 kg
Weight
Detached on-site oper- 1/3

ation panel
1.9 kg
Detached on-site oper- 1/6

ation panel
1.1 kg
Appendix
Technical data UL Note
4.6
4.6/9
Appendix
Legal notice
Indication of conformity
Copyright
This product complies with the directive of

the Council of the European Communities
on harmonization of the laws of the Member
States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Council Directive
2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment
for use within specified voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC).
Copyright Siemens AG 2016. All rights reserved.

The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this
document, or utilization and communication of the content
are not permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights,
including rights created by patent grant or registration of a
utility model or a design, are reserved.
This conformity has been proved by tests performed according

to the Council Directive in accordance with the generic standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 (for EMC directive) and
with the standard EN 60255-27 (for Low Voltage Directive) by
Siemens AG.
Registered trademarks
SIPROTEC, DIGSI, SIGUARD, SIMEAS, and SICAM
are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Any unauthorized
use is illegal. All other designations in this document
can be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own
purposes can infringe the rights of the owner.
The device is designed and manufactured for application in an

industrial environment.
The product conforms with the international standards of IEC
60255 and the
German standard VDE 0435.
Disclaimer of liability
This document has been subjected to rigorous technical
review before being published. It is revised at regular intervals,
and any modifications and amendments are included
in the subsequent issues. The content of this document
has been compiled for information purposes only. Although
Siemens AG has made best efforts to keep the document
as precise and up-to-date as possible, Siemens AG shall
not assume any liability for defects and damage which
result through use of the information contained herein.
This content does not form part of a contract or of business
relations; nor does it change these. All obligations of
Siemens AG are stated in the relevant contractual agreements.
Siemens AG reserves the right to revise this documentfrom time
to time.
Document Edition: 04
Release status: 01.2016
Version of the products described: V7.00
Published by
Siemens AG 2016
Energy Management Division
Digital Grid
Automation Products
Humboldtstr. 59
90459 Nuremberg, Germany
www.siemens.com/protection
For more information,
please contact our
Customer Support Center.
Tel.: +49 180 524 7000
Fax: +49 180 524 2471
(Charges depending on provider)
E-mail: support.energy@siemens.com
Article No. EMDG-C10028-00-7600
Printed in Germany
Dispo 06200
KG 01.16 3.0 330 En
2016 Siemens. Subject to changes and errors.

The information given in this document only contains
general descriptions and/or performance features which
may not always specifically reflect those described, or
which may undergo modification in the course of further
development of the products. The requested performance
features are binding only when they are expressly agreed
upon in the concluded contract.
For all products using security features of OpenSSL
the following shall apply:
This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(www.openssl.org).
This product includes cryptographic software written
by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
www.siemens.com/protection

Siprotec 5

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Siprotec 5

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SIPROTEC 5 for Every Application and Requirement

for SIPROTEC and

Online help DIGSI 5

Overview of Documentation for the SIPROTEC 5 System

The catalog describes the system features and the devices

The Product information includes general information about

Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle

2 SIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Siemens Catalog Edition 4

SIPROTEC 5 Devices and Fields of Application

Relay Selection Guide

Feeder and Overcurrent Protection

Line Differential Protection

Differential and Distance Protection

Overcurrent Protection as Backup Protection for Line Protection

Transformer Differential Protection

The products and systems described in this catalog are

Data Acquisition and Recording

Safety and Security Concept

DIGSI 5 Variants and system requirements

Spare parts and accessories

Grouping of measured values

The next generation of SIPROTEC devices, SIPROTEC 5, is based

With the new SIPROTEC 5 generation, you are well equipped to

Solutions for the power systems of today and the future

How can you benefit from this experience?

SIPROTEC has been established on the energy market for

Proven and complete applications

As the innovation driver and trendsetter in the field of power

Information about the SIPROTEC 4 and SIPROTEC Compact

Many users have approved SIPROTEC protection devices for use

Figure 1.1/1 SIPROTEC family

[SIPROTEC5 Historie_dt, 1, en_US]

Figure 1.1/2 SIPROTEC pioneer for generations

The SIPROTEC 5 series is based on long-term field experience of

Powerful protection functions ensure the safety of equipment

Figure 1.1/3 SIPROTEC 5 Modular hardware

Individually configurable devices save money on the initial

Arc protection, detection of transient ground faults, and

Purposeful and easy handling of devices and software thanks

Increased reliability and quality of the engineering process

Powerful communication components ensure safe and effective solutions

Full compatibility between IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2

Redundancy protocols RSTP, PRP and HSR for maximum availability

Efficient operating concepts due to flexible engineering of

Figure 1.1/4 SIPROTEC 5 - Modular process connection

IEC 61850 Edition 2

Comprehensive database to monitor modern power systems

based on integrated synchrophasor measurement units (PMU)

Perfectly tailored fit

Perfectly tailored fit in SIPROTEC 5 means:

End-to-end engineering from system design to operation makes

Modular system design in hardware, functionality and

The highlight of SIPROTEC 5 is the greater-than-ever emphasis

Functional integration of a wide range of applications, such as

Holistic workflow in SIPROTEC 5 means:

Integrated, consistent system and device engineering from

Simple, intuitive graphical linking of primary and secondary

Supplied application templates for the most frequently used

Manufacturer-independent tool for easy system engineering

Integrated tools for testing during engineering, commis-

sioning, and for simulating operational scenarios, such as

communication ensures the perfect fit to your needs

protection, control, measurement, power quality or fault